2 K 15 Captivasport 1 ST Print

2k15_chev_captiva_sport_23446878A.
ai
(Modern Bridge - Level 2 / #23321109)
Spine = Printer Adjust
Color = Black
Date = 03/18/14
2015 Captiva Sport

2015
Captiva Sport
23446878 A chevrolet.com (U.S.)

chevrolet.com.mx (Mexico)
Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Mexico- Black plate (1,1)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
2015 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-21
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-35 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-41 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-32
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-47
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
2015 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
OnStar Additional
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Special Application
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Introduction iii
Refer to the purchase Driver Behavior on page 9-2,

documentation relating to your Driving Environment on page 9-2,
specific vehicle to confirm the and Vehicle Design on page 9-2.
features.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for Danger, Warnings, and
quick reference. Cautions
The names, logos, emblems, Warning messages found on vehicle
slogans, vehicle model names, and Using this Manual labels and in this manual describe
vehicle body designs appearing in To quickly locate information about hazards and what to do to avoid or
this manual including, but not limited the vehicle, use the Index in the reduce them.
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, back of the manual. It is an
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
CAPTIVA are trademarks and/or
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
{ Danger
service marks of General Motors it can be found. Danger indicates a hazard with a
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,
high level of risk which will result
or licensors.
About Driving the Vehicle in serious injury or death.
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on the vehicle As with other vehicles of this type,
because of optional equipment that failure to operate this vehicle
was not purchased on the vehicle, correctly may result in loss of
control or an accident. Be sure to
{ Warning
model variants, country
specifications, features/applications read the driving guidelines in this Warning indicates a hazard that
that may not be available in your manual in the section called “Driving could result in injury or death.
region, or changes subsequent to and Operating” and specifically
the printing of this owner manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 23446878 A First Printing 2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
iv Introduction
M : This symbol is shown when O : Exterior Lamps

{ Caution you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
# : Fog Lamps
Caution indicates a hazard that
could result in property or vehicle information. . : Fuel Gauge
damage. * : This symbol is shown when + : Fuses
you need to see a service manual 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
for additional instructions or Changer
information.
j : LATCH System Child
Vehicle Symbol Chart Restraints
Here are some additional symbols * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more : : Oil Pressure
A circle with a slash through it is a
information on the symbol, refer to } : Power
the Index. / : Remote Vehicle Start
safety symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let 9 : Airbag Readiness Light > : Safety Belt Reminders
this happen.” # : Air Conditioning 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
Symbols ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
The vehicle has components and v +/-: Audio Steering Wheel M : Windshield Washer Fluid
labels that use symbols instead of Controls
text. Symbols are shown along with $ : Brake System Warning Light
the text describing the operation or " : Charging System
information relating to a specific
component, control, message, I : Cruise Control
gauge, or indicator. B : Engine Coolant Temperature
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Driver Information

Passenger Sensing System Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
(United States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Rear Vision
Instrument Panel Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Steering Wheel Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Initial Drive Information Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Universal Remote System . . . 1-19
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13 Performance and Maintenance
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Traction Control/Electronic
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Vehicle Features Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Driving for Better Fuel
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Roadside Assistance
Head Restraint Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8-8. 11. Data Link Connector (DLC) 21. Hazard Warning Flashers on
2. Instrument Panel Illumination (Out of View). See Malfunction page 6-3.
Control on page 6-4. Indicator Lamp on page 5-14. 22. Passenger Airbag Status
3. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and 12. Hood Release. See Hood on Indicator. See Passenger
Lane-Change Signals on page 10-3. Sensing System (United
page 6-3. 13. Cruise Control on page 9-30. States) on page 3-24.
4. Instrument Cluster on page 5-9. 14. Steering Wheel Adjustment on 23. Passenger Safety Belt
page 5-2. Reminder. See Safety Belt
5. Windshield Wiper/Washer on Reminders on page 5-11.
page 5-3. 15. Horn on page 5-3.
6. Infotainment on page 7-1. 16. Steering Wheel Controls on
7. Auxiliary Input Jack (If page 5-2 (If Equipped).
Equipped). See Auxiliary 17. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on
Devices on page 7-15. page 5-4.
8. Fog Lamps on page 6-4 (If 18. Traction Control/Electronic
Equipped). Stability Control on page 9-28.
Exterior Lamp Controls on 19. Shift Lever. See Automatic
page 6-1. Transmission on page 9-21.
9. Driver Information Center (DIC) 20. Climate Control Systems on
Buttons. See Driver Information page 8-1 (If Equipped).
Center (DIC) on page 5-23. Automatic Climate Control
10. Instrument Panel Storage on System on page 8-5 (If
page 4-1. Equipped).
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Information Operation on page 2-2.
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the Remote Vehicle Start
important features that may or may This vehicle may have a remote
not be on your specific vehicle. starting feature that starts the
For more detailed information, refer engine from outside of the vehicle.
to each of the features which can be Starting the Engine Using
found later in this owner manual.
Remote Start
Remote Keyless Entry Without Remote Start Shown, with
To start the vehicle:
(RKE) System Remote Start Similar 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
The RKE transmitter functions work Q: Press to lock all the doors,
up to 20 m (65 ft) away from the including the liftgate. 2. Press and release Q on the
vehicle. K : Press once to unlock the driver RKE transmitter.
door. If K is pressed again within 3. Immediately after completing
five seconds, all remaining doors Step 2, press and hold / until
unlock. the parking lamps flash. If the
L : Press and release to locate vehicle's lights can not be seen,
the vehicle. Press and hold L to press and hold / for at least
four seconds.
activate the panic alarm. Press L
again to turn off the alarm. When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
In Brief 1-5
doors will be locked and the climate Door Locks

control system will operate at the
same setting as when the vehicle From the outside, lock or unlock the
was last turned off. door using the key or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
After entering the vehicle during a See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
remote start, insert and turn the key System Operation on page 2-2.
to the ON/RUN position to drive the
vehicle. From the inside, push or pull the
manual door lock on each door.
If the vehicle is left running, it
automatically shuts off after Use the power door lock switch on
10 minutes unless a time extension the front doors.
has been done. Q: Press to lock the doors.
Open the rear doors to access the
Shutting the Engine Off After a K: Press to unlock the doors. security locks on the inside edge of
Remote Start See Door Locks on page 2-6 and each door.
To manually shut off a remote start: Power Door Locks on page 2-6. To activate, insert a key into the slot
and turn it to the horizontal position.
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the Safety Locks
The door can only be opened from
vehicle and press / until the The vehicle has rear door security the outside.
parking lamps turn off. locks to prevent passengers from
To return the door to normal
. Turn on the hazard warning opening the rear doors from the
operation, open the door and turn
flashers. inside.
the slot to the vertical position.
. Turn the ignition switch on and
then off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2-4.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1-6 In Brief
Liftgate Windows Express-Down Window

To lock or unlock the liftgate from The driver window switch has an
outside the vehicle, press Q or K express-down feature that lowers
the window without holding the
twice on the Remote Keyless
switch. Press the switch part way
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
and the window will open a small
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
amount. Press the switch down all
System Operation on page 2-2.
the way and release it and the
To lock or unlock the liftgate from window lowers all the way.
inside the vehicle, press Q or K on To stop the window while it is
the power door lock switch. lowering, press and release the
To open the liftgate, press the touch switch.
pad on the underside of the liftgate See Power Windows on page 2-13.
handle and pull up.
Press the front of the switch to open Window Lockout
To close the liftgate, pull down using the window. Pull the switch up to
the handle and close until it latches. close it. This feature prevents the rear seat
passengers from operating the
See Liftgate on page 2-8. The power windows operate when windows. Press the lockout switch
the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ on the driver door panel to activate
ACCESSORY, or while in Retained the switch. Press it again to
Accessory Power (RAP). See deactivate the switch.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9-17.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
In Brief 1-7
Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster Power Seats

Manual Seats
To adjust a manual seat:
If available, move the lever up or If available, move the control

down to raise or lower the seat. forward or rearward to adjust the
See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. seat position.
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1-8 In Brief
Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks
To raise or lower the front or rear

part of the seat cushion, move the
front or rear of the control up If available, move the lever forward
or down. or rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support. To recline the seatback:
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3-4. See Lumbar Adjustment on 1. Lift the lever on the outboard
page 3-4. side of the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
In Brief 1-9
To return the seatback to the upright To adjust a power seatback, Heated Seats
position: if equipped:
1. Lift the lever fully without . Tilt the top of the control
applying pressure to the rearward to recline.
seatback, and the seatback will . Tilt the top of the control forward
return to the upright position. to raise.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to See Reclining Seatbacks on
make sure it is locked. page 3-5.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Second Row Seats
The rear seatbacks can be folded
down to increase cargo space.
See Rear Seats on page 3-8. Automatic Climate Control System
Shown
If available, the buttons are on the
climate control panel. To operate,
the ignition must be on.
Press L or M to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting,
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1-10 In Brief
and then to the off setting. The Safety Belts Passenger Sensing
lights indicate two for the highest
setting and one for the lowest.
System (United States)
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3-6.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and The passenger sensing system will
adjusted properly. turn off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag under
To achieve a comfortable seating certain conditions. No other airbag
position, change the seatback is affected by the passenger
recline angle as little as necessary Refer to the following sections for sensing system.
while keeping the seat and the head important information on how to use
restraint height in the proper The passenger airbag status
safety belts properly:
position. indicator will light on the instrument
. Safety Belts on page 3-9. panel when the vehicle is started.
See Head Restraints on page 3-2 See Passenger Sensing System
. How to Wear Safety Belts
and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. (United States) on page 3-24 for
Properly on page 3-11.
more information.
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-12.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3-38.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
In Brief 1-11
Mirror Adjustment 3. Return the control to the center Manual Rearview Mirror
position so the mirror cannot be If equipped, push the tab forward for
Exterior Mirrors moved. daytime use and pull it for nighttime
Power Outside Mirrors Manual Folding Mirrors use to avoid glare from headlamps.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on
The outside mirrors can be folded page 2-12.
inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car Automatic Dimming Rearview
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward Mirror
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward If equipped, automatic dimming
to return it to the original position. reduces the glare of the headlamps
Automatic Dimming Feature from behind. This feature comes on
when the vehicle is started. See
If equipped, the outside driver mirror Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
automatically dims to reduce glare on page 2-12.
from vehicle headlamps.
Interior Mirrors
To adjust the power mirrors: Adjustment
1. Turn the knob to choose the Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
left (L) or the right (R) mirror. view of the area behind your
2. Use the knob to move the vehicle.
selected mirror so the side and
the area behind the vehicle
is seen.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1-12 In Brief
Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel Press this button again to return it to
while driving. the out position and the lamps
Adjustment automatically come on when any
Interior Lighting door is opened.
Dome Lamps +: Press the button (2) to turn the
dome lamps on and off while the
doors are closed.
Reading Lamps
To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever down.
There are front and rear dome
2. Move the steering wheel up lamps in the overhead console and
or down. the headliner.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel * : Press the button (1) on the The front reading lamps are in the
closer or away from you. overhead console to keep the dome overhead console.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the lamps and other interior lamps
steering wheel in place. turned off while any door is open.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
In Brief 1-13
Turn the control to the following Windshield Wiper/Washer

positions:
9 : Turns off the exterior lamps.
The knob returns to the AUTO
position after it is released.
AUTO: Automatically turns the
exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
The rear reading lamps are in the ; : Turns on the parking lamps
headliner. including all lamps, except the
To turn the reading lamps on or off, headlamps.
press the button next to each lamp. 2 : Turns on the headlamps
together with the parking lamps and
Exterior Lighting instrument panel lights. The windshield wiper lever is on the
See: right side of the steering column.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on Move the lever up or down to select
page 6-1 the wiper speed.
. Turn and Lane-Change Signals 8: Single wipe, briefly move the
on page 6-3 lever down. The lever returns to its
starting position when released. For
. Headlamp High/Low-Beam several wipes, hold the lever down.
Changer on page 6-2
9: Turns the windshield wipers off.
The exterior lamp control is on the

instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1-14 In Brief
3: Sets a delay between wipes. Climate Controls

Move the switch on top of the lever
left for less frequent wipes or right The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
for more frequent wipes. this system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate control
system functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless
a: Slow wipes. Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-2.
1: Fast wipes.
Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield wiper lever to
spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers. The wipers will
continue until the lever is released
or the maximum wash time is
reached.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper and rear wash button
is on the instrument panel above the
climate control system. Climate Control System
=: Press to wash and wipe the
rear window. 1. Fan Control 6. Air Conditioning
5 : Press to turn the delayed 2. Outside Air 7. Driver and Passenger Heated
wiping on or off. 3. Temperature Control Seats (If Equipped)
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on 4. Recirculation 8. Rear Window Defogger
page 5-3 and Rear Window Wiper/
Washer on page 5-4. 5. Air Delivery Mode Control
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
In Brief 1-15
Transmission
Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode
ERS mode allows you to choose the
top-gear limit of the transmission
and the vehicle's speed while
driving downhill or towing a trailer.
To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever to
M (Manual).
Automatic Climate Control System
1. Fan Control See Climate Control Systems on

2. Outside Air page 8-1 or Automatic Climate
Control System on page 8-5 (If
3. Temperature Control Equipped).
4. Recirculation
5. Air Delivery Mode Control
6. Air Conditioning
7. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats (If Equipped)
8. Rear Window Defogger
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1-16 In Brief
2. Press the plus/minus button Vehicle Features For more information about these
located on the shift lever, to and other radio features, see
increase or decrease the gear Operation on page 7-3.
range available. Radio(s)
Storing a Favorite Station
See Manual Mode on page 9-22. O : Press to turn the system on
and off. Turn to increase or A maximum of 36 stations can be
decrease the volume. stored as favorites using the six
softkeys below the radio station
BAND: Press to choose between
frequency tabs and by using the
FM, AM, or SiriusXM®, if equipped.
radio FAV button. Press FAV to go
f : Select radio stations. through up to six pages of favorites,
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Seek or scan each having six favorite stations
stations. available per page. Each page of
favorites can contain any
4 (Information): If equipped with combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM
XM, MP3, WMA, or RDS features, stations.
press to display additional text
information related to the current See Operation on page 7-3.
FM-RDS or SiriusXM station, or CD, Setting the Clock
MP3, or WMA song. Song title
information will be displayed on the To set the time and date:
top line of the display while the artist 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
information will be displayed on the ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
bottom line, if the information is
available during XM, CD, MP3, 2. Press O to turn the radio on.
or WMA playback. When
information is not available, "No 3. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD,
Info" displays. and YYYY (hour, minute, month,
day, and year) display.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
In Brief 1-17
4. Press the softkey below the tab Portable Audio Devices Steering Wheel Controls
to be changed.
The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
5. Increase or decrease the time or (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack on the
date by turning f clockwise or audio faceplate and a USB port in
counterclockwise. the center console. Some portable
See Clock on page 5-6. audio devices such as iPods®, MP3
players, and USB storage devices
can be connected to the vehicle
Satellite Radio using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or a
If equipped, SiriusXM® is a satellite USB cable.
radio service based in the See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-15.
48 contiguous United States and
10 Canadian provinces.
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
Bluetooth®
variety of programming and If equipped with a Bluetooth system, For vehicles with audio steering
commercial-free music, coast to it allows users with a wheel controls, some audio controls
coast, and in digital-quality sound. Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to can be adjusted at the steering
A fee is required to receive the make and receive hands-free calls wheel.
SiriusXM service. using the vehicle’s audio system
and controls. + / −: Press and release to go to
For more information, refer to: the next or the previous preset radio
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone station or CD track.
. www.siriusxm.com or call must be paired with the Bluetooth
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) system before it can be used in the J/0: For vehicles with Bluetooth®
vehicle. Not all phones will support and OnStar®, press and hold to
. www.xmradio.ca or call interact with those systems. Press
1-877-209-0079 (Canada) all functions. For more information,
see www.gm.com/bluetooth and and release to mute the system.
See Satellite Radio on page 7-6. Bluetooth on page 7-19. Press it again to turn the sound
back on.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1-18 In Brief
K : Press to reject an incoming upward to accelerate. If cruise 3 : Press to display the trip and
call, or end a current call. control is already active, use to fuel displays.
increase vehicle speed.
v + or v −: Move the thumbwheel T: Press to display the vehicle
up or down to increase or to −SET: Move the thumbwheel down information displays.
decrease the volume. briefly to set the speed and activate
cruise control. If cruise control is U: Press to customize the feature
already active, use to decrease settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle
Cruise Control Personalization on page 5-35 for
speed.
more information.
See Cruise Control on page 9-30.
V : Press to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or
Driver Information acknowledge messages on the DIC.
Center (DIC)
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC has different displays in the on page 5-23.
instrument cluster which can be
accessed by pressing the DIC Vehicle Personalization
buttons on the instrument panel, Some vehicle features can be
below the exterior lamps control. programmed by using the DIC
DIC Buttons buttons on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel. These
features include:
E: Press to turn the cruise control . Language
on or off. The indicator light on the
button turns on or off.
. Door Lock and Unlock Settings
RES+: If there is a set speed in
. Lighting
memory, move the thumbwheel up . Chime Volume
briefly to resume that speed or hold
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
In Brief 1-19
. Remote Start Keep the sensors on the vehicle's Universal Remote System
See Vehicle Personalization on rear bumper clean to ensure proper
page 5-35. operation.
See Parking Assist on page 9-32.
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) Power Outlets
If equipped, RVC displays a view of The accessory power outlets can be
the area behind the vehicle, on the used to plug in electrical equipment,
infotainment system display, when such as a cell phone or MP3 player. If equipped, the Universal Home
the vehicle is shifted into Remote System allows for garage
The power outlets are located inside
R (Reverse). door openers, security systems, and
the center floor console, on the rear
home automation devices to be
See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on of the center floor console, and in programmed to work with these
page 9-34. the rear cargo compartment.
buttons in the vehicle.
Remove the cover to access and
Parking Assist See Universal Remote System on
replace when not in use.
page 5-41.
If equipped, this system uses See Power Outlets on page 5-7.
sensors on the rear bumper to
assist with parking and avoiding
objects while in R (Reverse).
It operates at speeds less than
8 km/h (5 mph). Rear Parking Assist
(RPA) uses audible beeps to
provide distance and system
information.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1-20 In Brief
Performance and until the StabiliTrak Off light g The low tire pressure warning light
illuminates and the appropriate alerts to a significant loss in
Maintenance DIC message displays. pressure of one of the vehicle's
tires. If the warning light comes on,
. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button
Traction Control/ g again to turn on both systems.
stop as soon as possible and inflate
the tires to the recommended
Electronic Stability The appropriate DIC message pressure shown on the Tire and
Control displays. Loading Information label. See
The Traction Control System (TCS) See Traction Control/Electronic Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
limits wheel spin. The system turns Stability Control on page 9-28. The warning light will remain on until
on automatically every time the the tire pressure is corrected.
This vehicle also has a Brake Pedal
vehicle is started. Override feature that limits engine The low tire pressure warning light
The StabiliTrak system assists with torque when the brake pedal is may come on in cool weather when
directional control of the vehicle in applied. See Traction Control/ the vehicle is first started, and then
difficult driving conditions. The Electronic Stability Control on turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
system also turns on automatically page 9-28. may be an early indicator that the
every time the vehicle is started. tire pressures are getting low and
Tire Pressure Monitor the tires need to be inflated to the
. To turn off or on TCS, press and proper pressure.
release the TCS/StabiliTrak This vehicle may have a Tire
The TPMS does not replace normal
button g on the instrument Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain
panel. The appropriate DIC the correct tire pressures.
message displays.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
. To turn off both Traction Control on page 10-46.
and StabiliTrak, press and hold
the TCS/StabiliTrak button g
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
In Brief 1-21
Engine Oil Life System The oil life system can also be reset Driving for Better Fuel
as follows:
The engine oil life system calculates Economy
engine oil life based on vehicle use 1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN
with the engine off. Driving habits can affect fuel
and displays a CHANGE ENGINE mileage. Here are some driving tips
OIL SOON message when it is time 2. Fully press and release the to get the best fuel economy
to change the engine oil and filter. accelerator pedal three times possible.
Resetting the Oil Life System within five seconds. . Avoid fast starts and accelerate
Reset the system whenever the If the OIL LIFE REMAINING smoothly.
engine oil is changed so that the value is not 100%, the system
needs to be reset again.
. Brake gradually and avoid
system can calculate the next abrupt stops.
engine oil change. To reset the See Engine Oil Life System on
system: page 10-10.
. Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the DIC. See Driver E85 or FlexFuel . When road and weather
Information Center (DIC) on conditions are appropriate, use
Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can cruise control.
page 5-23 and Engine Oil use either unleaded gasoline or
Messages on page 5-30. ethanol fuel containing up to 85% . Always follow posted speed
ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuel limits or drive more slowly when
2. Press V for five seconds to conditions require.
on page 9-37. For all other vehicles,
reset the oil life at 100%.
use only the unleaded gasoline . Keep vehicle tires properly
Be careful not to reset the oil life described under Fuel on page 9-36. inflated.
display accidentally at any time
other than after the oil is
. Combine several trips into a
changed. It cannot be reset single trip.
accurately until the next oil
change.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1-22 In Brief
Replace the vehicle's tires with

OnStar®
.
the same TPC Spec number

molded into the tire's sidewall This vehicle may be equipped with a
near the size. comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live OnStar
. Follow recommended scheduled
Advisor for Emergency, Security,
maintenance.
Navigation, Connection, and
Diagnostic Services. OnStar
Roadside Assistance services may require a paid
Program subscription. See OnStar Overview
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 on page 14-1.
TTY Users (U.S. Only):

1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
New Chevrolet owners are
automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance Program.
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13-5.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Keys and Locks
Windows Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Keys
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Keys and Locks Interior Mirrors
{ Warning
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-12
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-12 the ignition key is dangerous and
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) children or others could be
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 seriously injured or killed. They
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Windows could operate the power windows
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 or other controls or make the
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 vehicle move. The windows will
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 function with the keys in the
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-6 ignition, and children or others
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Roof could be caught in the path of a
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 closing window. Do not leave
Doors children in a vehicle with the
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 ignition key.
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-10
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on The RKE transmitter functions work
page 13-12. up to 20 m (65 ft) away from the
If there is a decrease in the RKE vehicle.
operating range: Some conditions can affect the
. Check the distance. The performance of the transmitter. See
transmitter may be too far from Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the vehicle. System on page 2-2.
. Check the location. Other
The two keys can be used for the vehicles or objects may be
ignition and all locks. blocking the signal.
The key code is stamped on the key
. Check the transmitter's battery.
number plate and can be used to See “Battery Replacement” later
make new keys at any dealer. Store in this section.
this information in a safe place . If the transmitter is still not
outside the vehicle. working correctly, see your
If it becomes difficult to turn a key, dealer or a qualified technician
inspect the key blade for debris. for service.
Periodically clean with a brush
or pick. Without Remote Start Shown, with
Remote Start Similar
If equipped, with an active OnStar
subscription, an OnStar Advisor
may remotely unlock the vehicle.
See “OnStar” if equipped.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): L (Vehicle Locator/Panic new transmitter is programmed.

If equipped, this button is used to Alarm): Press and release to Each vehicle can have up to eight
operate the remote start feature. locate the vehicle. The turn signal transmitters programmed to it.
See Remote Vehicle Start on lamps flash and the horn sounds Battery Replacement
page 2-4. three times. Press and hold L to
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the activate the panic alarm. The turn
REMOTE KEY FOB BATTERY
doors, including the liftgate. The signal lamps flash and the horn
sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. message displays on the Driver
vehicle's lamps may flash and the Information Center (DIC). See
horn may sound. See “Remote Door The alarm turns off when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN or “REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOB
Lock” under Vehicle Personalization BATTERY” under Key and Lock
on page 5-35. when L is pressed again. The Messages on page 5-31.
On some models, the fuel door will ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
the panic alarm to work.
also be locked when the doors are
locked.
{ Caution
Programming Transmitters to
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the Vehicle When replacing the battery, do
not touch any of the circuitry on
the driver door. If K is pressed Only RKE transmitters programmed the transmitter. Static from your
again within five seconds, all to the vehicle will work. If a body could damage the
remaining doors unlock. The interior transmitter is lost or stolen, a
lamps come on and stay on for transmitter.
replacement can be purchased and
20 seconds or until the ignition is programmed through your dealer.
turned on. The exterior lamps may When the replacement transmitter is
flash when unlocking the vehicle. programmed to the vehicle, all
See “Remote Door Unlock” under remaining transmitters must also be
Vehicle Personalization on programmed. Any lost or stolen
page 5-35. transmitters no longer work once the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Remote Vehicle Start Starting the Engine Using

Remote Start
If equipped with a remote starting
feature, the engine can be started To start the vehicle:
from outside of the vehicle. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
/ (Remote Start): This button is vehicle.
on the RKE transmitter if the vehicle
has remote start.
2. Press and release Q on the
RKE transmitter.
Laws in some communities may
restrict the use of remote starters. 3. Immediately after completing
For example, some laws may Step 2, press and hold / until
require a person using the remote the parking lamps flash. If the
To replace the battery: start to have the vehicle in view vehicle's lights can not be seen,
1. Separate the transmitter with a when doing so. Check local press and hold / for at least
flat, thin object inserted into the regulations for any requirements on four seconds.
notch on the side. remote starting of vehicles.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
2. Remove the old battery. Do not Do not use the remote start feature lamps will turn on and remain on as
use a metal object. if the vehicle is low on fuel. The long as the engine is running. The
vehicle could run out of fuel. doors will be locked and the climate
3. Insert the new battery, positive control system will operate at the
side facing down. Replace with a The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
range may be less while the vehicle same setting as when the vehicle
CR2032 or equivalent battery. was last turned off.
is running.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. After entering the vehicle during a
Other conditions can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See remote start, insert and turn the key
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) to the ON/RUN position to drive the
System on page 2-2. vehicle.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
If the vehicle is left running, it A maximum of two remote starts or Conditions in Which the
automatically shuts off after remote start attempts are allowed Remote Start Will Not Work
10 minutes unless a time extension between ignition cycles.
has been done. The vehicle cannot be started using
After the vehicle's engine has been the remote start feature if the key is
Extending Engine Run Time started two times using the remote in the ignition, the hood is open, or if
start button, the ignition must be there is an emission control system
To extend the engine run time by turned on and then back off before malfunction.
10 minutes, repeat Steps 1–3 while the remote start procedure can be
the engine is still running. The used again. The engine turns off during a remote
engine run time can only be start if the coolant temperature gets
extended if it is the first remote start Shutting the Engine Off After a too high or if the oil pressure
since the vehicle has been driven. Remote Start gets low.
Remote start can be extended
one time.
To manually shut off a remote start: Remote Start Ready
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
If the remote start procedure is used If the vehicle does not have the
again before the first 10-minute time vehicle and press / until the remote vehicle start feature, it may
frame has ended, the first parking lamps turn off. have the remote start ready feature.
10 minutes will immediately expire This feature allows your dealer to
. Turn on the hazard warning add the manufacturer's remote
and the second 10-minute time flashers.
frame will start. vehicle start feature.
. Turn the ignition switch on and To add the manufacturer's remote
For example, if Q and then / are then off. vehicle start feature to the vehicle,
pressed again after the vehicle has see your dealer.
been running for five minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing the
engine to run for a total of
15 minutes.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Door Locks Warning (Continued)

Delayed Locking
A chime will sound to indicate a
{ Warning injuries or even death from door or the liftgate is open when you
heat stroke. Always lock the try to lock the doors with the power
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it. door lock switch. The doors will not
dangerous. lock, and the theft‐deterrent system
. Outsiders can easily enter
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door will not arm until all the doors are
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop closed and five seconds have
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors passed.
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
locked, the handle will not happening. Automatic Door Locks
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a Automatic Door Lock
crash is increased if the To lock or unlock a door, use the
key from the outside or the door The doors are programmed to
doors are not locked. So, all automatically lock when the shift
passengers should wear lock from the inside.
lever is moved out of P (Park).
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked Power Door Locks This feature can be programmed
whenever the vehicle is through the Driver Information
Use the power door lock switch on Center (DIC). See “Auto Door Lock”
driven. the front doors. in Vehicle Personalization on
. Young children who get into Q: Press to lock the doors. page 5-35.
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can K: Press to unlock the doors.
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Automatic Door Unlock Safety Locks

The doors can be programmed to
automatically unlock when the shift { Caution
lever is moved into P (Park). See
“Auto Door Unlock” in Vehicle Pulling the inside door handle
Personalization on page 5-35. while the rear door safety locks
are engaged could damage your
Lockout Protection vehicle. Do not pull the inside
door handle while the rear door
When the power door lock switch is
safety locks are engaged.
pressed with the key in the ignition,
and any door is open, all the doors
lock and the driver door unlocks. The vehicle has rear door security Open the rear doors to access the
When doors are closed with the key locks to prevent passengers from security locks on the inside edge of
in the ignition, the horn will sound opening the rear doors from the each door.
as a reminder. inside.
To activate, insert a key into the slot
If the doors are locked with the and turn it to the horizontal position.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The door can only be opened from
transmitter, and the key is in the the outside.
ignition, a chime sounds and all
except the driver door lock. To return the door to normal
operation, open the door and turn
The lockout protection feature can the slot to the vertical position.
be overridden by holding the power
door lock switch for three seconds.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Doors Warning (Continued)

To lock or unlock the liftgate from
outside the vehicle, press Q or K
Liftgate . Adjust the Climate Control twice on the Remote Keyless
system to a setting that Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
{ Warning brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the System Operation on page 2-2.
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See Climate To lock or unlock the liftgate from
vehicle if it is driven with the Control System in the Index. inside the vehicle, press Q or K on
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with . If the vehicle is equipped with the power door lock switch. See
any objects that pass through the a power liftgate, disable the Power Door Locks on page 2-6.
seal between the body and the power liftgate function.
To open the liftgate, press the touch
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine For more information about pad on the underside of the liftgate
exhaust contains Carbon carbon monoxide, see Engine handle and pull up.
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be Exhaust on page 9-20.
seen or smelled. It can cause To close the liftgate, pull down using
unconsciousness and even death. the handle and close until it latches.
If the vehicle must be driven with

the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: { Caution
. Close all of the windows. To avoid damage to the liftgate or
liftgate glass, make sure the area
. Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument above and behind the liftgate is
panel. clear before opening it.
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Liftgate Operation with Loss of Vehicle Security vehicles equipped with the remote
Power start feature only, are closed. The
This vehicle has theft-deterrent security light will come on solid for
features; however, they do not make approximately 30 seconds and then
the vehicle impossible to steal. flash slowly. If Q on the RKE
transmitter is pressed a second
Vehicle Alarm System time, the theft-deterrent system will
The vehicle may have a content arm immediately, bypassing the
theft-deterrent alarm system. 30-second delay. The content
theft-deterrent alarm is not armed
until the security light flashes slowly.
If any door, liftgate, or the hood, on
vehicles equipped with the remote
start feature only, are opened
To open the liftgate if the vehicle's without using the key or pressing K
battery is disconnected or the on the RKE transmitter, the exterior
voltage is low, access the release lamps flash and the horn will sound
lever. Remove the interior trim cover for about 30 seconds. If Q or K on
on the inside of the liftgate. Use a the RKE transmitter is not pressed,
tool to push the lever on the latch the alarm sounds and periodically
until the liftgate releases. repeats. If the system does not
operate as described above, see
The security light is near the center your dealer for service.
of the instrument panel.
The theft-deterrent system does not
To arm the theft-deterrent system, arm if you lock the doors with a key.
press Q on the RKE transmitter
when all doors and the hood, on
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
To avoid setting off the alarm by 4. Reach in through the window, The system is automatically armed
accident, always unlock a door with unlock the door with the manual when the key is removed from the
the RKE transmitter or a key. door lock, and open the door. ignition.
Unlocking a door any other way will This should set off the alarm. You do not have to manually arm or
set off the alarm if the system has If the alarm does not sound when it disarm the system.
been armed. should, but the vehicle's headlamps The security light comes on if there
If you set off the alarm by accident, flash, check to see if the horn is a problem with the theft-deterrent
turn off the alarm by pressing Q or works. The horn fuse may be blown. system operation.
K on the RKE transmitter or by To replace the fuse, see Fuses and
placing the key in the ignition and Circuit Breakers on page 10-31. When the PASS-Key III+ system
turning it to START. senses that someone is using the
If the alarm does not sound or the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle
vehicle's headlamps do not flash, from starting. Anyone using a
Testing the Alarm see your dealer for service. trial-and-error method to start the
To test the alarm:
vehicle will be discouraged because
1. From inside the vehicle, lower Immobilizer of the high number of electrical key
the driver window and open the See Radio Frequency Statement on codes.
driver door. page 13-12. When trying to start the vehicle if
2. Get out of the vehicle, close the the engine does not start and the
door, and activate the system by Immobilizer Operation security light on the instrument
locking the doors with the RKE cluster comes on, there may be a
This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+
transmitter. problem with the theft-deterrent
(Personalized Automotive Security
3. Wait for the security light to flash System) theft-deterrent system. system. Turn the ignition off and try
slowly. PASS-Key III+ is a passive again.
theft-deterrent system. If the engine still does not start, and
the key does not appear to be
damaged, wait about five minutes
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
and try another ignition key and To program the new key: Exterior Mirrors
check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 10-31. 1. Verify that the new key has 1
If the engine still does not start with stamped on it. Convex Mirrors
the other key, the vehicle needs 2. Insert the already programmed
service. If the vehicle does start, the key in the ignition and start the { Warning
first key may be faulty. See your engine. If the engine does not
dealer who can service the start, see your dealer for service. A convex mirror can make things,
PASS-Key III+ to have a new like other vehicles, look farther
key made. 3. After the engine has started, turn away than they really are. If you
the key to LOCK/OFF, and cut too sharply into the right lane,
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ remove the key.
decoder to “learn” the transponder you could hit a vehicle on the
value of a new or replacement key. 4. Insert the key to be programmed right. Check the inside mirror or
Up to 10 keys may be programmed and turn it to the ON/RUN glance over your shoulder before
for the vehicle. The following position within five seconds of changing lanes.
procedure is for programming the original key being turned to
additional keys only. If all the the LOCK/OFF position.
The passenger side mirror is convex
currently programmed keys are lost The security light turns off once shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
or do not operate, you must see the key has been programmed. curved so more can be seen from
your dealer or a locksmith who can 5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additional the driver seat.
service PASS-Key III+ to have keys keys are to be programmed.
made and programmed to the
system. If the PASS-Key III+ key is lost or
damaged, see your dealer or a
See your dealer or a locksmith who locksmith to have a new key made.
can service PASS-Key III+ to get a
new key blank that is cut exactly as Do not leave the key or device that
the ignition key that operates the disarms or deactivates the
system. theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Power Mirrors Automatic Dimming Feature Interior Mirrors

If equipped, the automatic dimming
mirror on the driver side reduces the Interior Rearview Mirrors
glare from the headlamps from
behind. Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
view of the area behind your
vehicle.
Folding Mirrors
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
Manual Folding Mirrors on the mirror. Use a soft towel
The vehicle has manual folding dampened with water.
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded
inward to prevent damage when Manual Rearview Mirror
going through an automatic car If equipped, push the tab forward for
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward daytime use and pull it for nighttime
To adjust the power mirrors: the vehicle. Push the mirror outward use to avoid glare from the
to return it to the original position. headlamps from behind.
1. Turn the knob to choose the
left (L) or the right (R) mirror.
Heated Mirrors Automatic Dimming
2. Use the knob to move the
selected mirror so the side and The vehicle may have heated Rearview Mirror
the area behind the vehicle mirrors.
If equipped, automatic dimming
is seen. = (Rear Window Defogger): reduces the glare of the headlamps
3. Return the control to the center Press to heat the outside rearview from behind. This feature comes on
position so the mirror cannot be mirrors. See “Rear Window when the vehicle is started.
moved. Defogger” under Automatic Climate
Control System on page 8-5.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Windows Power Windows Press the front of the switch to open

the window. Pull the switch up to
close it.
{ Warning { Warning The power windows operate when
Never leave a child, a helpless Children could be seriously the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, injured or killed if caught in the ACCESSORY, or while in Retained
especially with the windows path of a closing window. Never Accessory Power (RAP). See
closed in warm or hot weather. leave keys in a vehicle with Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
They can be overcome by the children. When there are children on page 9-17.
extreme heat and suffer in the rear seat, use the window Express-Down Window
permanent injuries or even death lockout button to prevent
from heat stroke. operation of the windows. See The driver window switch has an
Keys on page 2-1. express-down feature that lowers
the window without holding the
switch. Press the switch part way
and the window will open a small
amount. Press the switch down all
the way and release it and the
window lowers all the way.
To stop the window while it is
lowering, press and release the
switch.
Window Lockout
This feature prevents the rear seat
passengers from operating the
windows. Press the lockout switch
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
on the driver door panel to activate Roof 1. Open/Close: Slide and release
the switch. Press it again to the switch rearward to express
deactivate the switch. open the sunroof. Slide the
Sunroof switch forward or rearward to
Sun Visors stop movement.
The sunshade opens
automatically with the sunroof or
can be manually operated. The
sunshade cannot be closed with
the sunroof open.
Slide and hold the switch
forward to close the sunroof.
The sunshade must be closed
manually.
Pull the sun visor down to block 2. Vent Open/Close: Press and
glare. Detach the sun visor from the hold the switch to vent the
center mount to pivot to the side To operate the sunroof, the ignition sunroof. Pull and hold the switch
window or, if equipped, extend must be in ON/RUN, or ACC/ to close it. The sunshade must
along the rod. ACCESSORY, or Retained be manually operated when the
Accessory Power (RAP) must be sunroof is in the vent position.
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9-17.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Dirt and debris may collect on the

sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation or noise. It could also plug
the water drainage system.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
If water is seen dripping into the
water drainage system, that is
normal.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
2 NOTES
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

Safety Belt Use During Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Adding Equipment to the
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-28
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29
Head Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Replacing Airbag System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-3 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Child Restraints
Front Seats Airbag System Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Infants and Young
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 When Should an Airbag Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-35
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-36
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 What Makes an Airbag Lower Anchors and Tethers
Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 for Children (LATCH
How Does an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Replacing LATCH System
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
What Will You See after an Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Safety Belts Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Passenger Sensing System (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
How to Wear Safety Belts (United States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Securing Child Restraints
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-46
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
{ Warning head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly, Front Seats
there is a greater chance that The vehicle's front seats have
occupants will suffer a neck/ adjustable head restraints in the
spinal injury in a crash. Do not outboard seating positions.
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and The height of the head restraint can
adjusted properly. be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head To lower the head restraint, press
restraint to make sure that it is the button located on the top of the
locked in place. seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not removable.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Rear Seats Front Seats 2. Slide the seat to the desired

position and release the bar.
The vehicle's rear seats have
adjustable head restraints in the Seat Adjustment 3. Try to move the seat back and
outboard seating positions that can forth to be sure the seat is
be adjusted the same way as the locked in place.
front head restraints.
{ Warning
Seat Height Adjuster
Rear outboard head restraints are You can lose control of the
not removable. vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Active Head Restraints Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
The vehicle has an active head
restraint system in the front seating
positions. These automatically tilt To adjust a manual seat:
forward to reduce the risk of neck
injury if the vehicle is hit from
behind.
If available, move the lever up or

down to raise or lower the seat.
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Power Seat Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment
To raise or lower the front or rear

part of the seat cushion, move the
If available, move the control front or rear of the control up If equipped, move the lever forward
forward or rearward to adjust the or down. or rearward to increase or decrease
seat position. the lumbar support.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you Do not have a seatback reclined if To recline the seatback:
could go into it, receiving neck or the vehicle is moving.
other injuries. 1. Lift the lever on the outboard
Manual Reclining Seatbacks side of the seat.
The lap belt could go up over
your abdomen. The belt forces 2. Move the seatback to the
would be there, not at your pelvic { Warning desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
bones. This could cause serious
If either seatback is not locked, it seatback in place.
internal injuries.
could move forward in a sudden
For proper protection when the stop or crash. That could cause make sure it is locked.
vehicle is in motion, have the injury to the person sitting there.
seatback upright. Then sit well Always push and pull on the
back in the seat and wear the seatbacks to be sure they are
safety belt properly. locked.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
To return the seatback to the upright

. Tilt the top of the control forward
position: to raise.
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
Heated Front Seats
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position. { Warning
2. Push and pull on the seatback to If you cannot feel temperature
make sure it is locked. change or pain to the skin, the
Power Reclining Seatbacks seat heater may cause burns. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater, Automatic Climate Control System
especially for long periods of Shown
time. Do not place anything on
If available, the buttons are on the
the seat that insulates against climate control panel. To operate,
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, the ignition must be on.
cover, or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to Press L or M to heat the driver or
overheat. An overheated seat passenger seat cushion and
heater may cause a burn or may seatback.
damage the seat. Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
To adjust a power seatback, the button, the heated seat will
if equipped: change to the next lower setting,
and then to the off setting. The
. Tilt the top of the control
lights indicate two for the highest
rearward to recline.
setting and one for the lowest.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
The passenger seat may take

longer to heat up. { Warning
Things you put on this seatback
Folding Seatback can strike and injure people in a
The front passenger seatback may sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
fold flat. Remove or secure all items
before driving.
{ Warning
If you fold the seatback forward to To fold the seatback:
carry longer objects, such as skis, 1. Lower the head restraint all the
be sure any such cargo is not way. See Head Restraints on
near an airbag. In a crash, an page 3-2. 3. Lift the lever fully and fold the
inflating airbag might force that seatback forward until it
2. Move the seat as far back as disengages.
object toward a person. This possible. See Seat Adjustment
could cause severe injury or even on page 3-3. 4. Continue lowering the seatback
death. Secure objects away from until it is completely folded.
the area in which an airbag would
inflate. For more information, see
Where Are the Airbags? on
page 3-19 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-10.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
To raise the seatback: Rear Seats

1. Raise the seatback and push it
rearward until it re-engages. Folding the Seatback
{ Warning { Caution
If either seatback is not locked, it Folding a rear seat with the safety
could move forward in a sudden belts still fastened may cause
stop or crash. That could cause damage to the seat or the safety
injury to the person sitting there. belts. Always unbuckle the safety
Always push and pull on the belts and return them to their
seatbacks to be sure they are normal stowed position before
locked. folding a rear seat. 2. Lift the lever on the top of the
seatback and fold the seatback
To fold a seatback: forward.
make sure it is locked in place. 1. Unbuckle the rear safety belts 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
and put the front seatback in the other seatback, if desired.
upright position. See Reclining Raising the Seatback
Seatbacks on page 3-5.
{ Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
To return the seatback to the upright Safety Belts

Warning (Continued) position:
This section of the manual
Always push and pull on the 1. Lift the seatback up and push it
describes how to use safety belts
seatbacks to be sure they are back into place.
properly. It also describes some
locked. 2. Push and pull the top of the things not to do with safety belts.
seatback to be sure it is locked
into position. { Warning
{ Warning 3. Make sure the safety belts are
not twisted or caught in the Do not let anyone ride where a
A safety belt that is improperly seatback. safety belt cannot be worn
routed, not properly attached, properly. In a crash, if you or your
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
or twisted will not provide the passenger(s) are not wearing
other seatback, if necessary.
protection needed in a crash. The safety belts, injuries can be much
person wearing the belt could be When the seatback is not in use, it worse than if you are wearing
seriously injured. After raising the should be kept in the upright, locked safety belts. You can be seriously
position. injured or killed by hitting things
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are Reclining the Seatback inside the vehicle harder or by
properly routed and attached, and being ejected from the vehicle. In
To recline the seatback: addition, anyone who is not
are not twisted.
1. Lift and hold the lever on top of buckled up can strike other
the seatback. passengers in the vehicle.
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, and It is extremely dangerous to ride
then release the lever. in a cargo area, inside or outside
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the of a vehicle. In a collision,
other seatback, if desired. passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing

Warning (Continued) safety belts makes such good
sense.
are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow Questions and Answers About
passengers to ride in any area of Safety Belts
the vehicle that is not equipped Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
with seats and safety belts. after a crash if I am wearing a
Always wear a safety belt, and safety belt?
check that all passenger(s) are A: You could be — whether you are
restrained properly too. wearing a safety belt or not.
Your chance of being conscious
This vehicle has indicators as a during and after a crash, so you
reminder to buckle the safety belts. can unbuckle and get out, is
See Safety Belt Reminders on When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted.
page 5-11. as fast as the vehicle does. If the Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. belts?
It could be the windshield, the
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts — not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. them. Whether or not an airbag
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Also, in nearly all states and in

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
all Canadian provinces, the law shoulder and across the chest.
requires wearing safety belts. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
How to Wear Safety Belts forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.
Properly
This section is only for people of { Warning
adult size.
You can be seriously injured,
There are special things to know
or even killed, by not wearing
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller your safety belt properly.
children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or
riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become
Children on page 3-30 or Infants of you. loose or twisted.
and Young Children on page 3-32. . Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt
Follow those rules for everyone's for your seating position. under both arms or behind
protection. your back.
. Wear the lap part of the belt low
It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or
to buckle up. Statistics show that touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an
unbelted people are hurt more often this applies force to the strong armrest.
in crashes than those who are pelvic bones and you would be
wearing safety belts. less likely to slide under the lap
There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
All seating positions in the vehicle get twisted.
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
The following instructions explain you pull the belt across you very
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt quickly. If this happens, let the
properly. belt go back slightly to unlock it.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is Then pull the belt across you
adjustable, so you can sit up more slowly.
straight. To see how, see “Seats” If the shoulder portion of a
in the Index. passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. 3. Push the latch plate into the
If this happens, let the belt go buckle until it clicks.
back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch plate to
On vehicles with a Passenger make sure it is secure. If the belt
Sensing System, engaging the is not long enough, see Safety
child restraint locking feature in Belt Extender on page 3-16.
the right front seating position Position the release button on
may affect the passenger the buckle so that the safety belt
sensing system. See Passenger could be quickly unbuckled if
Sensing System (United States) necessary.
on page 3-24 for more
information. 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
later in this section for Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

instructions on use and
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
important safety information.
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
To unlatch the belt, push the button the safety belt in a crash. See How
on the buckle. The belt should to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
return to its stowed position. Slide page 3-11.
the latch plate up the safety belt
5. To make the lap part tight, pull webbing when the safety belt is not
up on the shoulder belt. in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt,
It may be necessary to pull the
near the guide loop on the side wall.
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully Before a door is closed, be sure the
tighten the lap belt on smaller safety belt is out of the way. If a
occupants. door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
are part of the safety belt assembly. properly adjusted, the comfort guide
They can help tighten the safety positions the shoulder belt away
belts during the early stages of a from the neck and head.
moderate to severe frontal, near There is one guide, if equipped, for
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold each outboard passenger position in
conditions for pretensioner the rear seat. Here is how to install
activation are met. Safety belt a comfort guide to the safety belt:
pretensioners can also help tighten
the safety belts in a side crash or 1. Remove the guide from its
rollover event. storage location, which is a
pocket on the side of the seat.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
Squeeze the release buttons they will need to be replaced, and
together and move the height probably other new parts for the
adjuster up or down to the desired vehicle's safety belt system. See
position. Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
after a Crash on page 3-17.
After the adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it up or Rear Safety Belt Comfort
down without squeezing the release Guides
buttons to make sure it has locked
into position. This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
Safety Belt Pretensioners available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
This vehicle has safety belt 2. Place the guide over the belt
belt comfort for older children who
pretensioners for the front outboard and insert the two edges of the
have outgrown booster seats and
occupants. Although the safety belt belt into the slots of the guide.
for some adults. When installed and
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
To remove and store the comfort

Warning (Continued) guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
and across the chest. These parts be removed from the guide. Store
of the body are best able to take the comfort guide in its storage
belt restraining forces. location, which is a pocket on the
side of the seat.
Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
3. Be sure that the belt is not occupants, they are more likely to
twisted and it lies flat. The be seriously injured if they do not
elastic cord must be under the wear safety belts.
belt and the guide on top.
{ Warning
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the 4. Buckle, position, and release the
protection needed in a crash. The safety belt as described
person wearing the belt could be previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt is on the shoulder and not
belt should go over the shoulder
falling off of it. The belt should
(Continued) be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Safety Belt Extender to have it repaired. Torn or frayed

safety belts may not protect you in a
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten crash. They can rip apart under
around you, you should use it. impact forces. If a belt is torn or
But if a safety belt is not long frayed, get a new one right away.
enough, your dealer will order you Make sure the safety belt reminder
an extender. When you go in to light is working. See Safety Belt
order it, take the heaviest coat you Reminders on page 5-11.
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid Keep safety belts clean and dry.
personal injury, do not let someone See Safety Belt Care on page 3-16.
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender Safety Belt Care
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap has been designed for adults. Never Keep belts clean and dry.
portion should be worn as low as use it for securing child seats. To
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy. belt. See the instruction sheet that { Warning
comes with the extender. Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety It may severely weaken them. In
Safety System Check a crash, they might not be able to
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a Now and then, check that the safety provide adequate protection.
crash. For pregnant women, as for belt reminder light, safety belts, Clean safety belts only with mild
anyone, the key to making safety buckles, latch plates, retractors, and soap and lukewarm water.
belts effective is wearing them anchorages are all working properly.
properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer to have the safety Airbag System
belt assemblies inspected or
System Parts after a replaced. The vehicle has the following
Crash New parts and repairs may be
airbags:
necessary even if the safety belt . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ Warning system was not being used at the . A frontal airbag for the front
time of the crash. outboard passenger.
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle. Have the safety belt pretensioners . A seat-mounted side impact
A damaged safety belt system checked if the vehicle has been in a airbag for the driver.
may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle . A seat-mounted side impact
person using it, resulting in airbag for the front outboard
serious injury or even death in a or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5-12. passenger.
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver
properly after a crash, have them and the passenger seated
inspected and any necessary directly behind the driver.
replacements made as soon as . A roof-rail airbag for the front
possible. outboard passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the front outboard
After a minor crash, replacement of passenger.
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that All vehicle airbags have the word
were used during any crash may AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
have been stressed or damaged. near the deployment opening.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
For frontal airbags, the word

AIRBAG is on the center of the Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the front death. Secure objects away from designed to work with safety
outboard passenger. the area in which an airbag would belts, not replace them. Also,
inflate. For more information, see airbags are not designed to inflate
For seat-mounted side impact Where Are the Airbags? on in every crash. In some crashes
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the page 3-19 and Vehicle Load safety belts are the only restraint.
side of the seatback closest to Limits on page 9-10. See When Should an Airbag
the door.
Inflate? on page 3-21.
For roof-rail airbags, the word
Airbags are designed to supplement Wearing your safety belt during a
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
the protection provided by safety crash helps reduce the chance of
Even if you do not have a front belts. Even though today's airbags hitting things inside the vehicle or
outboard passenger seat in the are also designed to help reduce being ejected from it. Airbags are
vehicle, there is still an active frontal the risk of injury from the force of an “supplemental restraints” to the
airbag in the right side of the inflating bag, all airbags must inflate safety belts. Everyone in the
instrument panel. Do not place very quickly to do their job. vehicle should wear a safety belt
cargo in front of this airbag. properly, whether or not there is
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system: an airbag for that person.
{ Warning
Be sure that cargo is not near an { Warning
airbag. In a crash, an inflating You can be severely injured or
airbag might force that object killed in a crash if you are not
toward a person. This could wearing your safety belt, even
cause severe injury or even with airbags. Airbags are
(Continued) (Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Where Are the Airbags?

{ Warning { Warning
Because airbags inflate with great Children who are up against,
force and faster than the blink of or very close to, any airbag when
an eye, anyone who is up it inflates can be seriously injured
against, or very close to any or killed. Always secure children
airbag when it inflates can be properly in the vehicle. To read
seriously injured or killed. Do not how, see Older Children on
sit unnecessarily close to any page 3-30 or Infants and Young
airbag, as you would be if sitting Children on page 3-32.
on the edge of the seat or leaning
forward. Safety belts help keep
you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear a safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver The driver frontal airbag is in the
should sit as far back as possible middle of the steering wheel.
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument cluster, which
sleep against the door or side
shows the airbag symbol. The
windows in seating positions with
system checks the airbag electrical
seat-mounted side impact airbags system for malfunctions. The light
and/or roof-rail airbags. tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5-12 for more
information.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
The front outboard passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger
frontal airbag is in the instrument Side Similar Side Similar
panel on the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
airbags for the driver and front front outboard passenger, and
outboard passenger are in the side second row outboard passengers
of the seatbacks closest to the door. are in the ceiling above the side
windows.
{ Warning
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Warning (Continued)
When Should an Airbag It depends on what is hit, the
direction of the impact, and how
Inflate? quickly the vehicle slows down.
that person causing severe injury This vehicle is equipped with
or even death. The path of an Frontal airbags may inflate at
airbags. See Airbag System on different crash speeds depending on
inflating airbag must be kept page 3-17. Airbags are designed to
clear. Do not put anything whether the vehicle hits an object
inflate if the impact exceeds the straight on or at an angle, and
between an occupant and an specific airbag system's deployment
airbag, and do not attach or put whether the object is fixed or
threshold. Deployment thresholds moving, rigid or deformable, narrow
anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a or wide.
hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the
airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain Frontal airbags are not intended to
the occupants. The vehicle has inflate during vehicle rollovers, in
Do not use seat accessories that rear impacts, or in many side
electronic sensors that help the
block the inflation path of a impacts.
airbag system determine the
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
severity of the impact. Deployment In addition, the vehicle has
Never secure anything to the roof thresholds can vary with specific advanced technology frontal
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags vehicle design. airbags. Advanced technology
by routing a rope or tie‐down Frontal airbags are designed to frontal airbags adjust the restraint
through any door or window inflate in moderate to severe frontal according to crash severity.
opening. If you do, the path of an or near frontal crashes to help Seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflating roof-rail airbag will be reduce the potential for severe are designed to inflate in moderate
blocked. injuries, mainly to the driver's or to severe side crashes depending
front outboard passenger's head on the location of the impact.
and chest. Seat-mounted side impact airbags
Whether the frontal airbags will or are not designed to inflate in frontal
should inflate is not based primarily impacts, near frontal impacts,
on how fast the vehicle is traveling. rollovers, or rear impacts.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
A seat-mounted side impact airbag inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the first and second rows. The rollover
is designed to inflate on the side of airbag causing the bag to break out capable roof-rail airbags are
the vehicle that is struck. of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, designed to help reduce the risk of
Roof-rail airbags are designed to and related hardware are all part of full or partial ejection in rollover
inflate in moderate to severe side the airbag module. events, although no system can
crashes depending on the location For airbag locations, see Where Are prevent all such ejections.
of the impact. In addition, these the Airbags? on page 3-19. But airbags would not help in many
roof-rail airbags are designed to types of collisions, primarily
inflate during a rollover or in a How Does an Airbag because the occupant's motion is
severe frontal impact. Roof-rail not toward those airbags. See When
airbags are not designed to inflate in
Restrain? Should an Airbag Inflate? on
rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags In moderate to severe frontal or page 3-21.
will inflate when either side of the near frontal collisions, even belted
Airbags should never be regarded
vehicle is struck, if the sensing occupants can contact the steering
as anything more than a supplement
system predicts that the vehicle is wheel or the instrument panel. In
to safety belts.
about to roll over on its side, or in a moderate to severe side collisions,
severe frontal impact. even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle. What Will You See after
In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should have Airbags supplement the protection
an Airbag Inflates?
inflated simply because of the provided by safety belts by After the frontal airbags and
vehicle damage or repair costs. distributing the force of the impact seat-mounted side impact airbags
more evenly over the inflate, they quickly deflate, so
What Makes an Airbag occupant's body. quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Inflate? Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
are designed to help contain the
In a deployment event, the sensing head and chest of occupants in the partially inflated for some time after
system sends an electrical signal outboard seating positions in the they deploy. Some components of
triggering a release of gas from the the airbag module may be hot for
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
several minutes. For location of the 2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.
airbag modules, see What Makes Warning (Continued)
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3-22.
airbag inflates, then get fresh air { Warning
The parts of the airbag that come by opening a window or a door.
into contact with you may be warm, A crash severe enough to inflate
If you experience breathing the airbags may have also
but not too hot to touch. There may problems following an airbag
be some smoke and dust coming damaged important functions in
deployment, you should seek the vehicle, such as the fuel
from the vents in the deflated medical attention.
airbags. Airbag inflation does not system, brake and steering
prevent the driver from seeing out of systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
the windshield or being able to steer The vehicle has a feature that may appears to be drivable after a
the vehicle, nor does it prevent automatically unlock the doors, turn moderate crash, there may be
people from leaving the vehicle. on the interior lamps and hazard concealed damage that could
warning flashers, and shut off the make it difficult to safely operate
{ Warning fuel system after the airbags inflate.
The feature may also activate,
the vehicle.
without airbag inflation, after an Use caution if you should attempt
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust event that exceeds a predetermined to restart the engine after a crash
threshold. You can lock the doors, has occurred.
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of turn off the interior lamps and
asthma or other breathing trouble. hazard warning flashers by using In many crashes severe enough to
To avoid this, everyone in the the controls for those features. You inflate the airbag, windshields are
must first, however, turn the ignition broken by vehicle deformation.
vehicle should get out as soon as
key to the following ignition switch
it is safe to do so. If you have
positions:
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an 1. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Additional windshield breakage may an airbag system will not work The passenger sensing system
also occur from the front outboard properly. See your dealer for turns off the front outboard
passenger airbag. service. passenger frontal airbag under
. Airbags are designed to inflate certain conditions. No other airbag
only once. After an airbag Passenger Sensing is affected by the passenger
sensing system.
inflates, you will need some new System (United States)
parts for the airbag system. The passenger sensing system
The vehicle has a passenger
If you do not get them, the works with sensors that are part of
sensing system for the front
airbag system will not be there the front outboard passenger seat
outboard passenger position. The
to help protect you in another and safety belt. The sensors are
passenger airbag status indicator
crash. A new system will include designed to detect the presence of
will light on the instrument panel
airbag modules and possibly a properly-seated occupant and
when the vehicle is started.
other parts. The service manual determine if the front outboard
for your vehicle covers the need passenger frontal airbag should be
to replace other parts. allowed to inflate or not.
. The vehicle has a crash sensing According to accident statistics,
and diagnostic module which children are safer when properly
records information after a secured in a rear seat in a correct
crash. See Vehicle Data child restraint for their weight
Recording and Privacy on and size.
The words ON and OFF will be
page 13-13 and Event Data Whenever possible, children
visible during the system check.
Recorders on page 13-14. age 12 and under should be
When the system check is
. Let only qualified technicians complete, either the word ON or secured in a rear seating position.
work on the airbag systems. OFF will be visible. See Passenger Never put a rear-facing child seat in
Improper service can mean that Airbag Status Indicator (United the front. This is because the risk to
States) on page 5-12. the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14

. The system determines that a
{ Warning Warning (Continued) small child is present in a child
restraint.
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints . The system determines that a
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
small child is present in a
or killed if the passenger frontal is off. If you secure a
booster seat.
airbag inflates. This is because forward-facing child restraint in
the back of the rear-facing child the front outboard passenger . A front outboard passenger
restraint would be very close to seat, always move the seat as far takes his/her weight off of the
the inflating airbag. A child in a back as it will go. It is better to seat for a period of time.
forward-facing child restraint can secure the child restraint in a . The front outboard passenger
be seriously injured or killed if the rear seat. seat is occupied by a smaller
passenger frontal airbag inflates person, such as a child who has
and the passenger seat is in a outgrown child restraints.
If the vehicle does not have a rear
forward position. seat that will accommodate a . There is a critical problem with
Even if the passenger sensing rear-facing child restraint, a the airbag system or the
system has turned off the rear-facing child restraint should not passenger sensing system.
passenger frontal airbag, no be installed in the vehicle, even if When the passenger sensing
system is fail-safe. No one can the airbag is off. system has turned off the front
guarantee that an airbag will not The passenger sensing system is outboard passenger frontal airbag,
inflate under some unusual designed to turn off the front the off indicator will light and stay lit
circumstance, even though the outboard passenger airbag if: as a reminder that the airbag is off.
airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status
. The front outboard passenger
(Continued) Indicator (United States) on
seat is unoccupied.
page 5-12.
. The system determines that an
infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
The passenger sensing system is 4. Reinstall the child restraint

designed to turn on the front { Warning following the directions provided
outboard passenger frontal airbag by the child restraint
anytime the system senses that a If the airbag readiness light ever manufacturer and refer to
person of adult size is sitting comes on and stays on, it means Securing Child Restraints (Rear
properly in the front outboard that something may be wrong Seat) on page 3-44 or Securing
passenger seat. with the airbag system. To help Child Restraints (Front
avoid injury to yourself or others, Passenger Seat) on page 3-46.
When the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right
system has allowed the airbag to be 5. If, after reinstalling the child
away. See Airbag Readiness
enabled, the on indicator will light restraint and restarting the
Light on page 5-12 for more
and stay lit as a reminder that the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
airbag is active. information, including important turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
safety information. recline the vehicle seatback and
For some children who have
outgrown child restraints, and for adjust the seat cushion,
very small adults, the passenger If the On Indicator Is Lit for a if adjustable, to make sure that
sensing system may or may not turn Child Restraint the vehicle seatback is not
off the front outboard passenger pushing the child restraint into
If a child restraint has been installed the seat cushion.
frontal airbag, depending upon the and the on indicator is lit:
person’s seating posture and Also make sure the child
body build. Everyone in the 1. Turn the vehicle off. restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle who has outgrown child 2. Remove the child restraint from vehicle head restraint. If this
restraints should wear a safety belt the vehicle. happens, adjust the head
properly — whether or not there is restraint. See Head Restraints
an airbag for that person. 3. Remove any additional items on page 3-2.
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
6. Restart the vehicle. If a person of adult size is sitting in passenger sensing system to
If the on indicator is still lit, the front outboard passenger seat, turn the airbag off for some
secure the child restraint in a but the off indicator is lit, it could be adult-sized occupants. If this
rear seat position in the vehicle, because that person is not sitting happens, let the belt go back all
and check with your dealer. properly in the seat or that the child the way and start again without
restraint locking feature is engaged. pulling the belt out all the way.
If no rear seat is available, do Use the following steps to allow the
not install a child restraint in this 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
system to detect that person and person remain in this position for
vehicle. enable the front outboard passenger two to three minutes after the on
frontal airbag: indicator is lit.
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
Adult-Sized Occupant 1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material { Warning
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat If the front outboard passenger
heaters, or seat massagers. airbag is turned off for an
adult-sized occupant, the airbag
3. Place the seatback in the fully will not be able to inflate and help
upright position. protect that person in a crash,
4. Have the person sit upright in resulting in an increased risk of
the seat, centered on the seat serious injury or even death. An
cushion, with legs comfortably adult-sized occupant should not
extended. ride in the front outboard
If the shoulder portion of the belt passenger seat, if the passenger
is pulled out all the way, the airbag off indicator is lit.
child restraint locking feature will
be engaged. This may
unintentionally cause the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Additional Factors Affecting The on indicator may be lit if an purchase a service manual, see
System Operation object, such as a briefcase, Service Publications Ordering
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or Information on page 13-11.
Safety belts help keep the other electronic device, is put on an
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired remove the object from
{ Warning
braking, which helps the passenger the seat. For up to 10 seconds after the
sensing system maintain the
vehicle is turned off and the
passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” { Warning battery is disconnected, an airbag
in the Index for additional can still inflate during improper
Stowing of articles under the service. You can be injured if you
information about the importance of
passenger seat or between the are close to an airbag when it
proper restraint use.
passenger seat cushion and inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
A thick layer of additional material, seatback may interfere with the They are probably part of the
such as a blanket or cushion, proper operation of the passenger airbag system. Be sure to follow
or aftermarket equipment such as sensing system. proper service procedures, and
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
make sure the person performing
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system Servicing the work for you is qualified to do so.
operates. We recommend that you Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
not use seat covers or other Adding Equipment to the
aftermarket equipment except when Airbags affect how the vehicle
approved by GM for your specific should be serviced. There are parts Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to of the airbag system in several Adding accessories that change the
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on places around the vehicle. Your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
page 3-28 for more information dealer and the service manual have height, front end, or side sheet
about modifications that can affect information about servicing the metal may keep the airbag system
how the system operates. vehicle and the airbag system. To from working properly. The
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
operation of the airbag system can of the seat fabric, could also Airbag System Check
also be affected by changing any interfere with the operation of the
parts of the front seats, safety belts, passenger sensing system. This The airbag system does not need
the airbag sensing and diagnostic could either prevent proper regularly scheduled maintenance or
module, steering wheel, instrument deployment of the passenger replacement. Make sure the airbag
panel, any of the airbag modules, airbag(s) or prevent the passenger readiness light is working. See
ceiling or pillar garnish trim, front sensing system from properly Airbag Readiness Light on
sensors, side impact sensors, turning off the passenger airbag(s). page 5-12.
or airbag wiring. See Passenger Sensing System
Your dealer and the service manual (United States) on page 3-24. { Caution
have information about the location The vehicle has rollover roof-rail If an airbag covering is damaged,
of the airbag sensors, sensing and airbags. See Different Size Tires
opened, or broken, the airbag
diagnostic module, and airbag and Wheels on page 10-54 for
may not work properly. Do not
wiring. additional important information.
open or break the airbag
In addition, the vehicle has a If you have to modify your vehicle coverings. If there are any
passenger sensing system for the because you have a disability and opened or broken airbag
front outboard passenger position, have questions about whether the coverings, have the airbag
which includes sensors that are part modifications will affect the vehicle's covering and/or airbag module
of the passenger seat. The airbag system, or if you have replaced. For the location of the
passenger sensing system may not questions about whether the airbag airbags, see Where Are the
operate properly if the original seat system will be affected if the vehicle
Airbags? on page 3-19. See your
trim is replaced with non-GM is modified for any other reason, call
dealer for service.
covers, upholstery, or trim; or with Customer Assistance. See
GM covers, upholstery, or trim Customer Assistance Offices on
designed for a different vehicle. Any page 13-3.
object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
or device, installed under or on top
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints
replace airbag system parts. See
Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
{ Warning after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the airbag on when you are driving, the airbag
systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system may the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
not work properly and may not
page 5-12.
protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death. To
help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as Older children who have outgrown
possible. booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
The manufacturer instructions that

. Can proper safety belt fit be In a crash, children who are not
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the buckled up can strike other people
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no, who are buckled up, or can be
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat. thrown out of the vehicle. Older
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to children need to use safety belts
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts? properly.
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the { Warning
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. Never allow more than one child
belt can provide. The shoulder
to wear the same safety belt. The
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit safety belt cannot properly spread
Does the shoulder belt rest on the impact forces. In a crash, they
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs. can be crushed together and
If no, try using the rear safety
This applies belt force to the seriously injured. A safety belt
belt comfort guide, if available.
child's pelvic bones in a crash. must be used by only one person
See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt It should never be worn over the at a time.
on page 3-12. If a comfort guide abdomen, which could cause
is not available, or if the severe or even fatal internal
shoulder belt still does not rest injuries in a crash.
on the shoulder, then return to Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
the booster seat. Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
. Does the lap belt fit low and page 3-12.
snug on the hips, touching the According to accident statistics,
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, children are safer when properly
return to the booster seat. restrained in a rear seating position.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Warning (Continued)
Infants and Young
Children
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the
the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints.
{ Warning
{ Warning Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
Never allow a child to wear the wrapped around their neck. The
safety belt with the shoulder belt shoulder belt can tighten but
behind their back. A child can be cannot be loosened if it is locked.
seriously injured by not wearing The shoulder belt locks when it is
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a pulled all the way out of the
crash, the child would not be retractor. It unlocks when the
restrained by the shoulder belt. shoulder belt is allowed to go all
The child could move too far the way back into the retractor,
forward increasing the chance of but it cannot do this if it is
head and neck injury. The child wrapped around a child’s neck.
might also slide under the lap If the shoulder belt is locked and
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Warning (Continued) { Warning

tightened around a child’s neck, Never hold an infant or a child
the only way to loosen the belt is while riding in a vehicle. Due to
to cut it. crash forces, an infant or a child
Never leave children unattended will become so heavy it is not
in a vehicle and never allow possible to hold it during a crash.
children to play with the safety For example, in a crash at only
belts. 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
Every time infants and young arms. An infant should be
children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by
secured in an appropriate { Warning
restraint.
appropriate child restraints. Neither Children who are up against,
the vehicle's safety belt system nor or very close to, any airbag when
its airbag system is designed it inflates can be seriously injured
for them. or killed. Never put a rear-facing
Children who are not restrained child restraint in the front
properly can strike other people, outboard seat. Secure a
or can be thrown out of the vehicle. rear-facing child restraint in a rear
seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a
rear seat. If you must secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
For most basic types of child

Warning (Continued) restraints, there are many different { Warning
models available. When purchasing
the front outboard seat, always a child restraint, be sure it is A young child's hip bones are still
move the front passenger seat as designed to be used in a motor so small that the vehicle's regular
far back as it will go. vehicle. safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
The restraint manufacturer's Instead, it may settle up around
instructions that come with the the child's abdomen. In a crash,
restraint state the weight and height
the belt would apply force on a
limitations for a particular child
body area that is unprotected by
restraint.
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
{ Warning injuries. To reduce the risk of
To reduce the risk of neck and serious or fatal injuries during a
head injury during a crash, infants crash, young children should
need complete support. In a always be secured in appropriate
crash, if an infant is in a child restraints.
rear-facing child restraint, the
crash forces can be distributed
Selection of a particular restraint across the strongest part of an
should take into consideration not
infant's body, the back and
only the child's weight, height, and
shoulders. Infants should always
age but also whether or not the
restraint will be compatible with the be secured in rear-facing child
motor vehicle in which it will restraints.
be used.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Child Restraint Systems
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats

Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
restraint with the seating surface A booster seat can also help a child
against the back of the infant. to see out the window.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Securing an Add-On Child endangered in a crash if the child Administration (NHTSA) website to
Restraint in the Vehicle restraint is not properly secured in locate the nearest child safety seat
the vehicle. inspection station.
{ Warning When securing an add-on child Securing the Child Within the
restraint, refer to the instructions Child Restraint
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual. { Warning
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are A child can be seriously injured or
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
killed in a crash if the child is not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement
properly secured in the child
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
restraint. Secure the child
instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured properly following the instructions
child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a that came with that child restraint.
in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in Where to Put the
the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is Restraint
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
According to accident statistics,
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas of the United States, children and infants are safer when
seats by lap belts or the lap belt Certified Child Passenger Safety properly restrained in a child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Technicians (CPSTs) are available restraint system or infant restraint
the LATCH system. See Lower to inspect and demonstrate how to system secured in a rear seating
Anchors and Tethers for Children correctly use and install child position.
(LATCH System) on page 3-38 for restraints. In the U.S., refer to the
more information. Children can be National Highway Traffic Safety
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Whenever possible, children age

12 and under should be secured in Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
a rear seating position.
The vehicle may have a far back as it will go. It is better to
Never put a rear-facing child passenger sensing system which secure the child restraint in a
restraint in the front. This is because is designed to turn off the front rear seat.
the risk to the rear-facing child is so outboard passenger frontal airbag
great if the airbag deploys. See Passenger Sensing System
under certain conditions. (United States) on page 3-24 for
{ Warning Even if the passenger sensing
system, if equipped, has turned
additional information.
A child in a rear-facing child off the front outboard passenger When securing a child restraint in a
restraint can be seriously injured frontal airbag, no system is rear seating position, study the
or killed if the front outboard fail-safe. No one can guarantee instructions that came with the child
passenger airbag inflates. This is that an airbag will not deploy restraint to make sure it is
because the back of the under some unusual compatible with this vehicle.
rear-facing child restraint would circumstance, even though it is
Child restraints and booster seats
be very close to the inflating turned off.
vary considerably in size, and some
airbag. A child in a forward-facing Secure rear-facing child restraints may fit in certain seating positions
child restraint can be seriously in a rear seat, even if the airbag better than others. Always make
injured or killed if the front is off. If you secure a sure the child restraint is properly
outboard passenger airbag forward-facing child restraint in secured.
inflates and the passenger seat is the front outboard seat, always Depending on where you place the
in a forward position. move the front passenger seat as child restraint and the size of the
(Continued) (Continued) child restraint, you may not be able
to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
restraints. Adjacent seating vehicle. The LATCH system is Make sure to follow the instructions
positions should not be used if the designed to make installation of a that came with the child restraint,
child restraint prevents access to or child restraint easier. and also the instructions in this
interferes with the routing of the In order to use the LATCH system in manual.
safety belt. your vehicle, you need a child When installing a child restraint with
Wherever a child restraint is restraint that has LATCH a top tether, you must also use
installed, be sure to secure the child attachments. LATCH-compatible either the lower anchors or the
restraint properly. rear-facing and forward-facing child safety belts to properly secure the
Keep in mind that an unsecured seats can be properly installed child restraint. A child restraint must
child restraint can move around in a using either the LATCH anchors or never be installed using only the top
collision or sudden stop and injure the vehicle’s safety belts. Do not tether and anchor.
people in the vehicle. Be sure to use both the safety belts and the The LATCH anchorage system can
properly secure any child restraint in LATCH anchorage system to secure be used until the combined weight
the vehicle — even when no child is a rear-facing or forward-facing of the child plus the child restraint is
in it. child seat. 29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt
Booster seats use the vehicle’s alone instead of the LATCH
Lower Anchors and safety belts to secure the child in anchorage system once the
the booster seat. If the manufacturer combined weight is more than
Tethers for Children recommends that the booster seat 29.5 kg (65 lbs).
(LATCH System) be secured with the LATCH system, The following explains how to attach
The LATCH system secures a child this can be done as long as the a child restraint with these
restraint during driving or in a crash. booster seat can be positioned attachments in the vehicle.
LATCH attachments on the child properly and there is no interference
restraint are used to attach the child with the proper positioning of the Not all vehicle seating positions or
restraint to the anchors in the lap-shoulder belt on the child. child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4).
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. Be
sure to read and follow the
instructions for the child restraint.
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of
built into the vehicle. There are two the child restraint to the vehicle.
lower anchors for each LATCH A top tether anchor is built into the
seating position that will vehicle. The top tether
accommodate a child restraint with attachment (2) on the child restraint
lower attachments (2). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Lower Anchor and Top Tether To assist in locating the lower

Anchor Locations anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
To assist in locating the top tether Do not secure a child restraint in a

anchors, the top tether anchor position without a top tether anchor
symbol is near the top tether if a national or local law requires
Rear Seat
anchors. that the top tether be attached, or if
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating The top tether anchors are on the the instructions that come with the
positions with top tether anchors. back of the rear seatback. Be sure child restraint say that the top tether
H (Lower Anchor): Seating to use an anchor on the same side must be attached.
positions with two lower anchors. of the vehicle as the seating According to accident statistics,
position where the child restraint will children and infants are safer when
be placed. properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3-36 for
additional information.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH { Warning Warning (Continued)
System Do not attach more than one child shoulder belt is allowed to go all
restraint to a single anchor. the way back into the retractor,
{ Warning Attaching more than one child but it cannot do this if it is
restraint to a single anchor could wrapped around a child’s neck.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment If the shoulder belt is locked and
not attached to anchors or with to come loose or even break tightened around a child’s neck,
the safety belt, the child restraint during a crash. A child or others the only way to loosen the belt is
will not be able to protect the child could be injured. To reduce the to cut it.
correctly. In a crash, the child risk of serious or fatal injuries
could be seriously injured or Buckle any unused safety belts
during a crash, attach only one behind the child restraint so
killed. Install a LATCH-type child child restraint per anchor.
restraint properly using the children cannot reach them. Pull
anchors, or use the vehicle safety the shoulder belt all the way out
belts to secure the restraint, of the retractor to set the lock,
following the instructions that { Warning and tighten the belt behind the
child restraint after the child
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual. Children can be seriously injured restraint has been installed.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck. The
shoulder belt can tighten but
cannot be loosened if it is locked.
The shoulder belt locks when it is
pulled all the way out of the
retractor. It unlocks when the
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
secure the restraints. Some 2. If the child restraint manufacturer

{ Caution restraints also use another vehicle recommends that the top tether
anchor to secure a top tether. be attached, attach and tighten
Do not let the LATCH the top tether to the top tether
attachments rub against the 1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may child restraint instructions and
damage these parts. If necessary, anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower the following steps:
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments or the desired 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
seating position does not have 2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
attachments.
lower anchors, secure the child the top tether according to
Do not fold the empty rear seat restraint with the top tether and the child restraint
with a safety belt buckled. This the safety belts. Refer to the instructions and the
could damage the safety belt or child restraint manufacturer following instructions:
the seat. Unbuckle and return the instructions and the instructions
safety belt to its stowed position, in this manual.
before folding the seat. 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
If you need to secure more than one position.
child restraint in the rear seat, see 1.2. Put the child restraint on
Where to Put the Restraint on the seat.
page 3-36.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
This system is designed to make attachments on the child
the installation of child restraints restraint to the lower
easier. When using lower anchors, anchors.
do not use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead, use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments to
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
If the position you are using are using a single tether,

does not have a headrest raise the headrest or head
or head restraint and you restraint and route the
are using a single tether, tether under the headrest or
route the tether over the head restraint and in
seatback. between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
If the position you are using securely held in place. To check,
has an adjustable headrest grasp the child restraint at the
or head restraint and you LATCH path and attempt to
are using a dual tether, move it side to side and back
route the tether around the and forth. There should be no
headrest or head restraint. more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement, for proper
If the position you are using installation.
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you Replacing LATCH System
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the Parts After a Crash
seatback.
{ Warning
A crash can damage the LATCH
If the position you are using system in the vehicle. A damaged
has an adjustable headrest LATCH system may not properly
or head restraint and you (Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Warning (Continued)
Securing Child Restraints If the child restraint or vehicle seat
position does not have the LATCH
(Rear Seat) system, you will be using the safety
secure the child restraint, When securing a child restraint in a belt to secure the child restraint in
resulting in serious injury or even rear seating position, study the this position. Be sure to follow the
death in a crash. To help make instructions that came with the child instructions that came with the child
sure the LATCH system is restraint to make sure it is restraint. Secure the child in the
working properly after a crash, compatible with this vehicle. child restraint when and as the
see your dealer to have the instructions say.
system inspected and any If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and If more than one child restraint
necessary replacements made as
Tethers for Children (LATCH needs to be installed in the rear
soon as possible. seat, be sure to read Where to Put
System) on page 3-38 for how and
where to install the child restraint the Restraint on page 3-36.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system using LATCH. If a child restraint is 1. Put the child restraint on
and it was being used during a secured in the vehicle using a the seat.
crash, new LATCH system parts safety belt and it uses a top tether,
may be needed. see Lower Anchors and Tethers for 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Children (LATCH System) on the lap and shoulder portions of
New parts and repairs may be the vehicle's safety belt through
necessary even if the LATCH page 3-38 for top tether anchor
locations. or around the restraint. The child
system was not being used at the restraint instructions will show
time of the crash. Do not secure a child seat in a you how.
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints

tether, follow the child restraint
(Front Passenger Seat)
{ Warning
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat A child in a rear-facing child
tether. See Lower Anchors and is a safer place to secure a restraint can be seriously injured
Tethers for Children (LATCH forward-facing child restraint. See or killed if the front outboard
System) on page 3-38 for more Where to Put the Restraint on passenger frontal airbag inflates.
information. page 3-36. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
7. Before placing a child in the In addition, the vehicle may have a be very close to the inflating
child restraint, make sure it is passenger sensing system which is
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
securely held in place. To check, designed to turn off the front
grasp the child restraint at the child restraint can be seriously
outboard passenger frontal airbag
safety belt path and attempt to under certain conditions. See injured or killed if the front
move it side to side and back Passenger Sensing System (United outboard passenger frontal airbag
and forth. When the child States) on page 3-24 and inflates and the passenger seat is
restraint is properly installed, Passenger Airbag Status Indicator in a forward position.
there should be no more than (United States) on page 5-12 for Even if the passenger sensing
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. more information, including system has turned off the front
To remove the child restraint, important safety information. outboard passenger frontal
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and Never put a rear-facing child seat in airbag, no system is fail-safe. No
let it return to the stowed position. the front. This is because the risk to one can guarantee that an airbag
If the top tether is attached to a top the rear-facing child is so great, will not deploy under some
tether anchor, disconnect it. if the airbag deploys. unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off.
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Do not secure a child seat in a 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Warning (Continued) position without a top tether anchor the lap and shoulder portions of
if a national or local law requires the vehicle's safety belt through
Secure rear-facing child restraints that the top tether be anchored, or if or around the restraint. The child
in a rear seat, even if the airbag the instructions that come with the restraint instructions will show
is off. If you secure a child restraint say that the top strap you how.
forward-facing child restraint in must be anchored.
the front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back When using the lap-shoulder belt to
secure the child restraint in this
as it will go. It is better to secure
position, follow the instructions that
the child restraint in a rear seat.
came with the child restraint and the
See Passenger Sensing System following instructions:
(United States) on page 3-24 for 1. Move the seat as far back as it
additional information. will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
If the vehicle does not have a rear When the passenger sensing
seat that will accommodate a system, if equipped, has turned
rear-facing child restraint, a off the front outboard passenger
rear-facing child restraint should not frontal airbag, the off indicator
be installed in the vehicle, even if 4. Push the latch plate into the
on the passenger airbag status buckle until it clicks.
the airbag is off. indicator should light and stay lit
If the child restraint uses a top when the vehicle is started. See Position the release button on
tether, see Lower Anchors and Passenger Airbag Status the buckle so that the safety belt
Tethers for Children (LATCH Indicator (United States) on could be quickly unbuckled if
System) on page 3-38 for top tether page 5-12. necessary.
anchor locations. 2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
7. If the vehicle does not have a

rear seat and the child restraint
has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer's
instructions regarding the use of
the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3-38 for more information.
8. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down grasp the child restraint at the
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt and forth. When the child
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed,
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than
a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
may be helpful to use your knee If the airbag is off, the off indicator in
to push down on the child the passenger airbag status
restraint as you tighten the belt. indicator, if equipped, will come on
Try to pull the belt out of the and stay on when the vehicle is
retractor to make sure the started.
retractor is locked. If the If a child restraint has been installed
retractor is not locked, repeat and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
Steps 5 and 6. On Indicator is Lit for a Child
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Restraint ” under Passenger

Sensing System (United States) on
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
2 NOTES
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Pull down the armrest to access the

cupholders.
Compartments
Storage Compartments Front Storage
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1 { Warning
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Do not store heavy or sharp
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 objects in storage compartments.
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 In a crash, these objects may
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 cause the cover to open and
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 could result in injury.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Instrument Panel Storage
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
The vehicle has a storage area to
Cargo Management
the left of the steering wheel. Pull
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
down on the handle to access.
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
For vehicles with a storage area
Roof Rack System Glove Box located under the front passenger
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 seat, lift up on the end of the tray
To open the glove box, lift up on the
lever. If the glove box has a lock, and pull it forward to access it.
use the key to lock and unlock it.
Sunglasses Storage
Cupholders This vehicle may have a sunglasses
There are cupholders in the center storage compartment near the
console and in the second row seat rearview mirror. Push the cover
armrest. to open.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
4-2 Storage
Center Console Storage Additional Storage adapters and hooks. These are
used to hold the net and mesh
Features pocket.
Cargo Cover
For vehicles with a cargo cover, use
it to cover items in the rear of the
vehicle.
To remove the cover and remove it
from the vehicle, pull both ends
toward each other. To reinstall,
place each end of the cover in the
holes behind the rear seat.
This vehicle has a center console Cargo Tie-Downs

with an upper and lower storage
area. To access the upper storage Four cargo tie‐downs are located in The adapters are used to hold the
area pull on the latch to lift the the rear compartment of the vehicle. net. Slide the adapters to the
armrest. Slide the cupholder back to The tie-downs can be used to desired location on the upper and
access a larger storage area secure small loads. lower rail and turn the handle up to
underneath. lock it in place. Compress the rods
Cargo Management of the net and insert them into the
corresponding openings of the
System adapter. The longer rod is for the
If the vehicle has a cargo upper adapter.
management system in the rear of
the vehicle, it will have rails with
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Storage 4-3
The hooks hold the mesh pocket. To Roof Rack System

insert a hook on the rail, place the { Caution
hook in the upper groove of the rail
and press it into the lower groove. { Warning Loading cargo on the roof rack
that weighs more than 75 kg
If something is carried on top of (165 lb) or hangs over the rear or
Convenience Net the vehicle that is longer or wider sides of the vehicle may damage
For vehicles with a convenience net, than the roof rack — like paneling, the vehicle. Load cargo so that it
located in the rear, use it to store plywood, or a mattress — the rests evenly between the
small loads as far forward as wind can catch it while the vehicle crossrails, making sure to fasten
possible. The net should not be is being driven. The item being cargo securely.
used to store heavy loads. carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
and damage the vehicle. Never when driving, check to make sure
carry something longer or wider crossrails and cargo are securely
than the roof rack on top of the fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
vehicle unless using a GM rack will make the vehicle’s center
certified accessory carrier. of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
If equipped with a roof rack it can be braking, or abrupt maneuvers;
used to load items. For roof racks otherwise it may result in loss of
that do not have crossrails included, control. If driving for a long distance,
GM Certified crossrails can be on rough roads, or at high speeds,
purchased as an accessory. See occasionally stop the vehicle to
your dealer for additional make sure the cargo remains in its
information. place.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
4-4 Storage
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle

capacity when loading the vehicle.
For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9-10.
Check that all cargo is securely
fastened to prevent damage or loss
while driving.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator (United States) . . . . 5-12
Low Washer Fluid Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Controls Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13
Malfunction
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . .
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22
5-23
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Controls Service Vehicle Soon
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Information Displays
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Driver Information
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Electric Parking Brake Vehicle Messages
Rear Window Wiper/ Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Brake System Messages . . . . 5-28
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 All-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-18 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-29
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Power Steering Warning Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Engine Cooling System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-19 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Indicators Traction Control System Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-30
Warning Lights, Gauges, and (TCS) Warning Light . . . . . . . 5-19 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-31
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Engine Coolant Temperature Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-31
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-31
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Object Detection System
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Ride Control System
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Reduced Engine Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-33
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-33
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Controls 4. Pull the lever up to lock the

Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-34 steering wheel in place.
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Adjustment
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-35 Steering Wheel Controls
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-41
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pull For vehicles with audio steering
the lever down. wheel controls, some audio controls
2. Move the steering wheel up can be adjusted at the steering
or down. wheel.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel + / − (Next/Previous): Press and
closer or away from you. release to go to the next or the
previous preset radio station or CD
track.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
J / 0 (Call/Mute): For vehicles with Windshield Wiper/Washer 3 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):

Bluetooth® and OnStar®, press and Sets a delay between wipes. Move
hold to interact with those systems. the switch on top of the lever left for
See Bluetooth on page 7-19 or less frequent wipes or right for more
“OnStar,” if equipped. Press and frequent wipes.
release to mute the system. Press it a (Low): Slow wipes.
again to turn the sound back on.
1 (High): Fast wipes.
K (End Call): Press to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call. Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
v + or v − (Volume): Move the to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thumbwheel up or down to increase thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
or to decrease the volume. should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 10-25.
Horn Heavy snow or ice can overload the
The windshield wiper lever is on the
Press a on the steering wheel pad right side of the steering column. wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
to sound the horn. stop the motor until it cools down.
Move the lever up or down to select
the wiper speed. Rainsense™
8 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly move
the lever down. The lever returns to { Caution
its starting position when released.
For several wipes, hold the Going through an automatic car
lever down. wash with the wipers on can
damage them. Turn the wipers off
9 (Off): Turns the windshield when going through an automatic
wipers off.
car wash.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
If equipped with Rainsense™ The wipers can be left in a = (Rear Wiper/Washer): Press to
windshield wipers, the moisture Rainsense mode even when it is not wash and wipe the rear window.
sensor is next to the inside rearview raining.
mirror and is mounted on the The rear window washer uses the
windshield. When active, these Windshield Washer same reservoir as the windshield
sensors are able to detect moisture washer. Check the windshield
on the windshield and automatically { Warning washer reservoir level if the front
windshield can be worked, but no
turn on the wipers.
In freezing weather, do not use fluid is sprayed when the rear
To turn on the Rainsense feature, the washer until the windshield is washer is activated. See Washer
the wipers must be set to one of the warmed. Otherwise the washer Fluid on page 10-20.
five delay settings on the lever.
Each of the five settings adjusts the
fluid can form ice on the 5 (Delay): Press to turn the
windshield, blocking your vision. delayed wiping on or off.
sensitivity of the sensor.
Since different drivers have different Compass
setting preferences, it is Pull the windshield wiper lever to
recommended that the mid-range spray windshield washer fluid and The vehicle may have a compass in
setting (position 3) be used initially. activate the wipers. The wipers will the Driver Information Center (DIC).
For more wipes, select the higher continue until the lever is released
or the maximum wash time is Compass Zone
settings; for fewer wipes, select the
lower settings located closer to the reached. The zone is set to Zone 8 upon
off position on the lever. leaving the factory. Your dealer will
Rear Window Wiper/ set the correct zone for your
The sensor automatically controls
the frequency of the wipes from the Washer location.
off setting to the high speed setting The rear wiper and rear wash button Under certain circumstances, such
according to the weather conditions. is on the instrument panel above the as during a long distance
climate control system. cross-country trip or moving to a
new state or province, it will be
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
necessary to compensate for 5. If calibration is necessary,

compass variance by resetting the calibrate the compass. See
zone through the DIC if the zone is “Compass Calibration
not set correctly. Procedure” following.
Compass variance is the difference Compass Calibration
between the earth's magnetic north
and true geographic north. If the The compass can be manually
compass is not set to the zone calibrated. Only calibrate the
where you live, the compass may compass in a magnetically clean
give false readings. The compass and safe location, such as an open
must be set to the variance zone in parking lot, where driving the
which the vehicle is traveling. vehicle in circles is not a danger.
It is suggested to calibrate away
To adjust for compass variance, use 2. Find the vehicle's current from tall buildings, utility wires,
the following procedure: location and variance zone manhole covers, or other industrial
number on the map. structures, if possible.
Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure Zones 1 through 15 are If CAL should ever appear in the
available. DIC display, the compass should be
1. Do not set the compass zone
when the vehicle is moving. Only 3. Press and hold the set/reset calibrated.
set it when the vehicle is in button to scroll through and If the DIC display does not show a
P (Park). select the appropriate heading, for example, N for North,
variance zone. or the heading does not change
Press the vehicle information
4. Press the trip/fuel button until after making turns, there may be a
button until PRESS V TO SET the vehicle heading, for strong magnetic field interfering with
COMPASS ZONE: ## displays. example, N for North, is the compass. Such interference
displayed in the DIC. may be caused by a magnetic CB or
cell phone antenna mount, a
magnetic emergency light, magnetic
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
note pad holder, or any other 4. The DIC will display 4. To increase the time or date do
magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, CALIBRATING COMPASS: one of the following:
move the magnetic item, then turn TURN IN CIRCLES. Drive the . Press the softkey below the
on the vehicle and calibrate the vehicle in tight circles at less selected tab.
compass. than 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete
To calibrate the compass, use the the calibration. The DIC will . Press ¨ SEEK, or \ FWD.
following procedure: display COMPASS
CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a . Turn f clockwise.
Compass Calibration Procedure few seconds when the 5. To decrease the time or date do
1. Before calibrating the compass, calibration is complete. The DIC one of the following:
make sure the compass is set to display will then return to the
the variance zone in which the previous menu. . Press © SEEK or s REV.
vehicle is located. See . Turn f counterclockwise.
“Compass Variance (Zone) Clock
Procedure” earlier in this The date does not automatically
To set the time and date:
section. display. To see the date press H
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ while the radio is on. The date with
Do not operate any switches ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
such as window, sunroof, display times out after a few
Press O to turn the radio on. seconds and goes back to the
climate controls, seats, etc.
normal radio and time display.
during the calibration procedure. 2. Press H and HR, MIN, MM, DD,
2. Press the vehicle information and YYYY (hour, minute, month, To change the time default setting
day, and year) display. from 12 hour to 24 hour or to
button until PRESS V TO change the date default setting from
CALIBRATE COMPASS 3. Press the softkey below any one month/day/year to day/month/year:
displays. of the tabs to be changed.
3. Press the set/reset button to 1. Press H and then the softkey
start the compass calibration. below the forward arrow label to
select the time 12H and 24H,
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
and the date MM/DD/YYYY

(month, day, and year) and { Caution { Caution
DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and
year) display. Leaving electrical equipment Hanging heavy equipment from
plugged in for an extended period the power outlet can cause
2. Press the softkey below the of time while the vehicle is off will damage not covered by the
desired option. drain the battery. Always unplug vehicle warranty. The power
3. Press H again to apply the electrical equipment when not in outlets are designed for
selected default, or let the use and do not plug in equipment accessory power plugs only, such
screen time out. that exceeds the maximum as cell phone charge cords.
20 amp rating.
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be Certain electrical accessories may
used to plug in electrical equipment, not be compatible with the
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. accessory power outlet and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
The power outlets are inside the If a problem is experienced, see
center floor console, on the rear of your dealer.
the center floor console, and in the
rear cargo compartment. When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the installation
The power outlet located in the rear instructions included with the
cargo area is powered at all times. equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Remove the cover to access and Equipment on page 9-47.
replace when not in use.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Warning Lights, When one of the warning lights

comes on and stays on while
Gauges, and driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
Indicators check the section that explains what
Warning lights and gauges can to do. Waiting to do repairs can be
signal that something is wrong costly and even dangerous.
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Instrument Cluster
English Cluster Shown, Metric Cluster Similar

7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Speedometer Tachometer Fuel Gauge

The speedometer shows the vehicle The tachometer displays the engine
speed in kilometers per hour (km/h) speed in revolutions per
and miles per hour (mph). minute (rpm).
Odometer { Caution
The odometer shows how far the
If the engine is operated with the
vehicle has been driven, in either
rpm’s in the warning area at the
kilometers or miles.
high end of the tachometer, the
vehicle could be damaged, and
Trip Odometer the damage would not be covered
The trip odometer shows how far by the vehicle warranty. Do not
the vehicle has been driven since operate the engine with the rpm’s Metric
the trip odometer was last reset. in the warning area.
Press the trip odometer reset stem
on the cluster to switch between the
odometer, trip odometer A, and trip
odometer B.
To reset each trip odometer to zero,
press and hold the trip odometer
reset stem. Only the trip odometer
that is currently displayed will be
reset.
English
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
When the ignition is on, the fuel took a little more or less than
gauge indicates how much fuel is half the tank's capacity to fill
left in the tank. the tank.
When the indicator nears empty, the . The gauge moves a little while
low fuel light comes on. There is still turning a corner or speeding up.
a little fuel left, but the fuel tank . The gauge takes a few seconds
should be refilled soon. See Low When the vehicle is started, this
to stabilize after the ignition is
Fuel Warning Light on page 5-21 for light flashes and a chime may come
turned on, but it goes back to
more information. on to remind the driver to fasten
empty when the ignition is
their safety belt. Then the light stays
An arrow on the fuel gauge turned off.
on solid until the belt is buckled.
indicates the side of the vehicle the For fuel tank capacity, see This cycle may continue several
fuel door is on. Capacities and Specifications on times if the driver remains or
Here are four things that some page 12-2. becomes unbuckled while the
owners ask about. None of these vehicle is moving.
means the fuel gauge is not working Safety Belt Reminders If the driver safety belt is buckled,
properly:
Driver Safety Belt Reminder neither the light nor the chime
. At the service station, the fuel comes on.
pump shuts off before the gauge
Light
reads full. There is a driver safety belt Passenger Safety Belt
reminder light on the instrument Reminder Light
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge cluster. There may be a passenger safety
indicated. For example, the belt reminder light near the
gauge may have indicated the passenger airbag status indicator.
tank was half full, but it actually See Passenger Sensing System
(United States) on page 3-24.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
reminder light and/or chime, remove

the object from the seat or buckle { Warning
the safety belt.
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
Airbag Readiness Light comes on while driving, it means
This light shows if there is an the airbag system might not be
For vehicles equipped with the electrical problem with the airbag working properly. The airbags in
passenger safety belt reminder light, system. The system check includes the vehicle might not inflate in a
when the vehicle is started this light the airbag sensor(s), passenger
flashes and a chime may come on crash, or they could even inflate
sensing system, the pretensioners, without a crash. To help avoid
to remind passengers to fasten their the airbag modules, the wiring, and
safety belt. Then the light stays on injury, have the vehicle serviced
the crash sensing and diagnostic right away.
solid until the belt is buckled. This module. For more information on the
cycle continues several times if the airbag system, see Airbag System
passenger remains or becomes on page 3-17. If there is a problem with the airbag
unbuckled while the vehicle is system, a Driver Information Center
moving. (DIC) message may also come on.
If the passenger safety belt is See Airbag System Messages on
buckled, neither the chime nor the page 5-33.
light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
Passenger Airbag Status
reminder light and chime may turn Indicator (United States)
on if an object is put on the seat The airbag readiness light comes on
The vehicle has the passenger
such as a briefcase, handbag, for several seconds when the
sensing system. See Passenger
grocery bag, laptop, or other vehicle is started. If the light does
Sensing System (United States) on
electronic device. To turn off the not come on then, have it fixed
page 3-24 for important safety
immediately.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
information. The instrument panel If the word OFF is lit on the airbag Charging System Light
has a passenger airbag status status indicator, it means that the
indicator. passenger sensing system has
turned off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the The charging system light comes on
passenger sensing system. See briefly when the ignition is turned
When the vehicle is started, the your dealer for service. on, but the engine is not running, as
passenger airbag status indicator a check to show the light is working.
will light the words ON and OFF, for
several seconds as a system check.
{ Warning The light turns off when the engine
is started. If it does not, have the
Then, after several more seconds, If the airbag readiness light ever vehicle serviced by your dealer.
the status indicator will light either comes on and stays on, it means
the word ON or the word OFF, to let If the light stays on, or comes on
that something may be wrong
you know the status of the front while driving, there could be a
with the airbag system. To help problem with the electrical charging
outboard passenger frontal airbag. avoid injury to yourself or others, system. Have it checked by your
If the word ON is lit on the have the vehicle serviced right dealer. Driving while this light is on
passenger airbag status indicator, it away. See Airbag Readiness could drain the battery.
means that the front outboard Light on page 5-12 for more
passenger frontal airbag is allowed information, including important If a short distance must be driven
to inflate. with the light on, be sure to turn off
safety information.
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Malfunction Malfunctions often are indicated by

Indicator Lamp the system before any problem is { Caution
apparent. Being aware of the light
A computer system called OBD II can prevent more serious damage Modifications made to the engine,
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second to the vehicle. This system also transmission, exhaust, intake,
Generation) monitors the operation assists the service technician in or fuel system of the vehicle or
of the vehicle to ensure emissions correctly diagnosing any the replacement of the original
are at acceptable levels, helping to malfunction. tires with other than those of the
maintain a clean environment. The same Tire Performance Criteria
malfunction indicator lamp comes
on when the vehicle is placed in
{ Caution (TPC) can affect the vehicle's
emission controls and can cause
ON/RUN, as a check to show it is If the vehicle is continually driven this light to come on.
working. If it does not, have the with this light on, the emission Modifications to these systems
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See controls might not work as well, could lead to costly repairs not
Ignition Positions on page 9-15. the vehicle fuel economy might covered by the vehicle warranty.
not be as good, and the engine This could also result in a failure
might not run as smoothly. This to pass a required Emission
could lead to costly repairs that Inspection/Maintenance test. See
might not be covered by the Accessories and Modifications on
vehicle warranty. page 10-2.
This light comes on during a

If the malfunction indicator lamp
malfunction in one of two ways:
comes on while the engine is
running, this indicates that the Light Flashing: A misfire condition
OBD II system has detected a has been detected. A misfire
problem and diagnosis and service increases vehicle emissions and
might be required.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
could damage the emission control The following may correct an If one or more of these conditions
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis emission control system occurs, change the fuel brand used.
and service might be required. malfunction: It may require at least one full tank
To prevent more serious damage to . Check that the fuel cap is fully of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
the vehicle: installed. See Filling the Tank on See Fuel on page 9-36.
. Reduce vehicle speed. page 9-38. The diagnostic If none of the above have made the
system can determine if the fuel light turn off, your dealer can check
. Avoid hard accelerations. cap has been left off or the vehicle. The dealer has the
. Avoid steep uphill grades. improperly installed. A loose or proper test equipment and
missing fuel cap allows fuel to diagnostic tools to fix any
. If towing a trailer, reduce the evaporate into the atmosphere.
amount of cargo being hauled as mechanical or electrical problems
A few driving trips with the cap that might have developed.
soon as it is possible. properly installed should turn the
If the light continues to flash, find a light off. Emissions Inspection and
safe place to stop and park the . Check that good quality fuel is Maintenance Programs
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at used. Poor fuel quality causes Depending on where you live, your
least 10 seconds, and restart the the engine not to run as vehicle may be required to
engine. If the light is still flashing, efficiently as designed and may participate in an emission control
follow the previous steps and see cause stalling after start-up, system inspection and maintenance
your dealer for service as soon as stalling when the vehicle is program. For the inspection, the
possible. changed into gear, misfiring, emission system test equipment will
Light On Steady: An emission hesitation on acceleration, likely connect to the vehicle's Data
control system malfunction has or stumbling on acceleration. Link Connector (DLC).
been detected on the vehicle. These conditions might go away
Diagnosis and service might be once the engine is warmed up.
required.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
happen if the 12-volt battery has If the light comes on, take the
recently been replaced or run vehicle to your dealer for service as
down. The diagnostic system is soon as possible.
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during Brake System Warning
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
Light
The DLC is under the instrument If this has been done and the The vehicle brake system consists
panel to the left of the steering vehicle still does not pass the of two hydraulic circuits. If one
wheel. See your dealer if assistance inspection for lack of OBD II circuit is not working, the remaining
is needed. system readiness, your dealer circuit can still work to stop the
The vehicle may not pass can prepare the vehicle for vehicle. For normal braking
inspection if: inspection. performance, both circuits need to
be working
. The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if Service Vehicle Soon
the light does not come on when Light
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
while the engine is off. See your
dealer for assistance in verifying
proper operation of the
Metric English
malfunction indicator lamp.
. The OBD II (On-Board The brake indicator light should
Diagnostics) system determines come on briefly as the engine is
that critical emission control The service vehicle soon light started. If it does not come on have
systems have not been comes on if a condition exists that the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
completely diagnosed. The may require the vehicle to be taken
vehicle would be considered not in for service.
ready for inspection. This can
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
When the ignition is on, the brake If the light is still on, have the The brake system warning light may
system warning light may also come vehicle towed for service. See also come on when the EPB is set.
on when the parking brake is set. Towing the Vehicle on page 10-70. Both lights will stay on until the EPB
The light stays on if the parking is released.
brake does not fully release. If it Electric Parking Brake If the light does not come on,
stays on after the parking brake is
fully released, there is a brake
Light or remains flashing, see your dealer.
problem. Have the brake system
inspected immediately.
{ Warning
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on. The parking brake status light The parking brake warning light
comes on when the Electric Parking should come on briefly when the
Driving with the brake system
Brake (EPB) is applied. If the light ignition is placed in ON/RUN. If it
warning light on can lead to a
continues flashing after the EPB is does not come on then, have it fixed
crash. If the light is still on after so it will be ready to warn if there is
released, or while driving, there is a
the vehicle has been pulled off a problem.
problem with the EPB system.
the road and carefully stopped,
A SERVICE PARKING BRAKE If this light comes on, there is a
have the vehicle towed for message may also display in the
service. problem with a system on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). vehicle that is causing the EPB
See Brake System Messages on system to work at a reduced level.
If the light comes on while driving, a page 5-28. The vehicle can still be driven, but
chime sounds. Pull off the road and should be taken to a dealer as soon
stop. The pedal might be harder to as possible. See Parking Brake on
push or go closer to the floor. page 9-26.
It might also take longer to stop.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Antilock Brake System If the ABS warning light remains on For vehicles with the
after resetting the system or comes All-Wheel-Drive light, it comes on
(ABS) Warning Light on again while driving, the vehicle briefly when the ignition is turned to
needs service. If the ABS warning ON/RUN.
light is on, but the regular brake If it does not, have the vehicle
system warning light is not on, the serviced by your dealer. If the
antilock brakes are not working system is working normally, the
properly, but the regular brakes are indicator light then goes off.
still functioning. Have the vehicle
serviced right away. If both brake This light comes on when there is a
This light should come on briefly lights are on, the vehicle does not malfunction in the All-Wheel-Drive
when the vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it have antilock brakes, and there is a (AWD) system.
does not come on, have the vehicle problem with the regular brakes as This light flashes when the AWD
serviced by your dealer. well. Have the vehicle towed for system is temporarily disabled.
If the ABS warning light stays on service. See Towing the Vehicle on
page 10-70. For more information see All-Wheel
longer than a few seconds after the Drive on page 9-24.
vehicle is in ON/RUN, or comes on
and stays on while driving, try All-Wheel-Drive Light This light comes on when the
resetting the system. To reset the compact spare tire is installed. See
system: Compact Spare Tire on page 10-65
for more information.
1. While driving, pull over when it is
safe to do so.
2. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
3. Turn the vehicle off.
4. Restart the vehicle.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Power Steering Warning StabiliTrak® Indicator Traction Control System

Light Light (TCS) Warning Light
This light comes on briefly when the The StabiliTrak light comes on This light comes on briefly as the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN as a briefly as the engine is started. If it engine is started. If it does not come
check to show it is working. does not come on, have the vehicle on, have the vehicle serviced by
If it does not come on have the serviced by your dealer. your dealer.
vehicle serviced by your dealer. This light flashes while the It also comes on when the Traction
If this light stays on, or comes on StabiliTrak system or the Traction Control System (TCS) has been
while driving, the system may not be Control System (TCS) is working. turned off. See Traction Control/
working. If this happens, see your The light comes on when there is a Electronic Stability Control on
dealer for service. problem with the StabiliTrak system. page 9-28.
See Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-28.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Engine Coolant Caution (Continued)

For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
Temperature Warning comes on briefly when the engine is
Light by the vehicle warranty. See started. It provides information
Engine Overheating on about tire pressures and the TPMS.
page 10-18.
When the Light Is On Steady
The engine coolant temperature This indicates that one or more of
warning light comes on when the the tires are significantly
engine has overheated. underinflated.
If this happens, pull over and turn A Driver Information Center (DIC)
This light comes on briefly while off the engine as soon as possible. tire pressure message may also
starting the vehicle. See Engine Overheating on display. See Tire Messages on
If it does not, have the vehicle page 10-18. page 5-33. Stop as soon as
serviced by the dealer. If the system possible, and inflate the tires to the
is working normally the indicator Tire Pressure Light pressure value shown on the Tire
light goes off. and Loading Information label. See
Tire Pressure on page 10-44.
{ Caution When the Light Flashes First and
Then Is On Steady
The engine coolant temperature
If the light flashes for about a minute
warning light indicates that the
and then stays on, there may be a
vehicle has overheated. Driving
problem with the TPMS. If the
with this light on can damage the problem is not corrected, the light
engine and it may not be covered will come on at every ignition cycle.
(Continued) See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10-47.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Fuel Economy Light The low fuel warning light comes on This light is also used to indicate the
briefly when the vehicle is started. status of the anti-theft alarm system
This light also comes on when the when the ignition is turned off. The
fuel level is low. When fuel is added, light will flash rapidly if the alarm
the light should go off. If it does not, system is arming and one or more
have the vehicle serviced. of the monitored entry points is not
closed. The light will stay on if the
alarm is arming and all entry points
Security Light are closed.
For vehicles with the fuel economy
mode, this light comes on when the For information regarding this light
eco (economy) button, located on and the vehicle's security system,
the center console near the shift see Vehicle Alarm System on
lever, is pressed. Press the button page 2-9.
again to turn off the light and exit
the fuel economy mode. Reduced Engine Power
See Fuel Economy Mode on The security light should come on Light
page 9-23 for more information. briefly as the engine is started. If the
system is working normally, the
Low Fuel Warning Light indicator light turns off. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
The reduced engine power light The high-beam on light comes on Low Washer Fluid
should come on briefly as the when the high-beam headlamps are
engine is started. If it does not come in use.
Warning Light
on, have the vehicle serviced by See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
your dealer. Changer on page 6-2 for more
This light, along with the malfunction information.
indicator lamp, displays when a
noticeable reduction in the vehicle's Front Fog Lamp Light
performance occurs.
The vehicle can be driven at a The low washer fluid warning light
reduced speed when the reduced comes on when the windshield
engine power light is on but washer fluid is low. See Washer
acceleration and speed might be Fluid on page 10-20 for more
reduced. If this light stays on, see information.
your dealer as soon as possible for
diagnosis and repair. The fog lamp light comes on when Cruise Control Light
the fog lamps are in use.
High-Beam On Light The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6-4 for more
information.
This light comes on when the cruise

control is set.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
This light goes out when the cruise Gate Ajar Light Information Displays
control is canceled. See Cruise
Control on page 9-30.
Driver Information
Door Ajar Light Center (DIC)
The vehicle has a DIC.
All information appears in the DIC
display in the instrument cluster.
If the gate ajar light comes on, the
liftgate is not completely closed. The DIC comes on when the ignition
Driving with the liftgate open can is on. After a short delay, the DIC
cause carbon monoxide (CO) to displays the information that was
This light comes on when a door is enter the vehicle. last displayed before the engine
open or not securely latched. Before was turned off.
See Engine Exhaust on page 9-20
driving, check that all doors are The DIC displays trip, fuel, and
for more information.
properly closed. vehicle system information, and
warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
The DIC also displays the compass
direction, outside air temperature,
and shift position indicator at the top
of the DIC display. If there is a
problem with the system that
controls the temperature display, the
numbers will be replaced with
dashes. If this occurs, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
If an abnormal temperature reading 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button V (Set/Reset): Press this button to
is displayed for an extended period to display the odometer, trip set or reset certain functions and to
of time, consult your dealer. Under odometer, fuel range, average fuel turn off or acknowledge messages
certain circumstances, especially economy, fuel used, and elapsed on the DIC.
when the engine is idling, a delay in time. Some vehicles also display
updating the temperature display is instantaneous fuel economy. The Trip/Fuel Menu Items
normal. compass and outside temperature 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
See Compass on page 5-4 and will also be shown in the display. to scroll through the following menu
Automatic Transmission on The temperature will be shown in °C items:
page 9-21. or °F depending on the units
selected. Odometer
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by pressing T (Vehicle Information): Press Press 3 until ODOMETER
the DIC buttons on the instrument this button to display the oil life, rear displays. This display shows the
panel, below the exterior lamps park assist, units, tire pressure distance the vehicle has been
control. readings and tire pressure sensor driven in either kilometers (km) or
learning for vehicles with the Tire miles (mi). Pressing the trip
DIC Buttons Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), odometer reset stem will also
compass zone setting, compass display the odometer.
recalibration on vehicles with this To switch between metric and
feature, coolant temperature, and English measurements, see “Units”
battery voltage. later in this section.
U (Customization): Press this
Trip Odometer
button to customize the feature
settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle Press 3 until TRIP A or TRIP B
There are trip/fuel, vehicle Personalization on page 5-35. displays. This display shows the
information, customization, and set/
current distance traveled in either
reset buttons. The button functions
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since
are detailed in the following pages.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
the last reset for the trip odometer. For example, if driving in traffic and change. This number is calculated
Pressing the trip odometer reset making frequent stops, this display based on the number of L/100 km
stem will also display the trip may read one number, but if the (km/L) (mpg) recorded since the last
odometer. vehicle is driven on a freeway, the time this menu item was reset. To
Each trip odometer can be reset to number may change even though reset the AVERAGE FUEL
the same amount of fuel is in the ECONOMY, press and hold V. The
zero separately by pressing V while fuel tank. This is because different
the trip odometer is displayed. You display will show zero.
driving conditions produce different
can also reset the trip odometer fuel economies. Generally, freeway Fuel Used
while it is displayed by pressing and driving produces better fuel
holding the trip odometer Press 3 until FUEL USED
economy than city driving. Fuel
reset stem. range cannot be reset. displays. This display shows the
number of liters (L) or gallons (gal)
Fuel Range If the vehicle is low on fuel, the of fuel used since the last reset of
FUEL LEVEL LOW message will be this menu item. To reset the fuel
Press 3 until RANGE displays.
displayed. See Fuel System used information, press and hold V
This display shows the approximate Messages on page 5-31.
number of remaining kilometers (km) while FUEL USED is displayed.
or miles (mi) the vehicle can be Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
driven without refueling. This display
Press 3 until AVERAGE FUEL
will show LOW if the fuel level Press 3 until ELAPSED TIME
is low. ECONOMY displays. This display
displays. This display can be used
shows the approximate average
The fuel range estimate is based on as a timer.
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
an average of the vehicle's fuel or kilometers per liter (km/L) or To start the timer, press the set/
economy over recent driving history miles per gallon (mpg). This number reset button while ELAPSED TIME
and the amount of fuel remaining in reflects only the approximate is displayed. The display will show
the fuel tank. This estimate will average fuel economy that the the amount of time that has passed
change if driving conditions change. vehicle has right now, and will since the timer was last reset, not
change as driving conditions including time the ignition is off.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Time will continue to be counted as Blank Display Oil on page 10-8. In addition to the
long as the ignition is on, even if This display shows no information. engine oil life system monitoring the
another display is being shown on oil life, additional maintenance is
the DIC. The timer will record up to Vehicle Information Menu recommended in the Maintenance
99 hours, 59 minutes and Items Schedule. See Maintenance
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which Schedule on page 11-2. Whenever
the display will return to zero. T (Vehicle Information): Press the oil is changed, the Oil Life
this button to scroll through the System will need to be reset. To
To stop the timer, press V briefly following menu items: reset the system through the DIC,
while ELAPSED TIME is displayed.
Oil Life press and hold V while this display
To reset the timer to zero, press and is shown. When the system is reset,
Press T until OIL LIFE
hold V while ELAPSED TIME is the display will show 100% OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display REMAINING.
displayed.
shows an estimate of the oil's
Instantaneous Fuel Economy remaining useful life. If you see Park Assist
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the If the vehicle has the Rear Parking
If the vehicle has this display, press
display, that means 99% of the
3 until INSTANT FUEL current oil life remains. The engine Assist (RPA) system, press T until
ECONOMY displays. This display PARK ASSIST displays. This
oil life system will alert you to
shows the approximate current fuel display allows the system to be
change the oil on a schedule
economy at a particular moment turned on or off. Once in this
consistent with the driving
and will change frequently as driving display, press V to select between
conditions.
conditions change. This display
When the remaining oil life is low, ON or OFF. The RPA system
shows the approximate automatically turns back on after
instantaneous fuel economy in liters the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display. each vehicle start. When the RPA
per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or
See Engine Oil Messages on system is turned off and the vehicle
miles per gallon (mpg). Unlike
page 5-30. You should change the is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC
average fuel economy, this display will display the PARK ASSIST OFF
cannot be reset. oil as soon as you can. See Engine
message as a reminder that the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
system has been turned off. See Battery Voltage display. See Tire Pressure on
Object Detection System Messages page 10-44 and Tire Messages on
on page 5-32 and Parking Assist on Press T until the battery voltage is page 5-33.
page 9-32. displayed.
If the tire pressure display shows
Units If the battery voltage display shows dashes instead of a value, there
dashes instead of a value, there may be a problem with the vehicle.
Press T until UNITS displays. This may be a problem with the vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see your
display allows you to select between If this happens often, see your dealer for service.
metric or English units of dealer for service.
measurement. Once in this display, For information on relearning tire
Tire Pressure positions see “TPMS Sensor
press V to select between METRIC Matching Process” under Tire
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure
or ENGLISH units. All of the vehicle Pressure Monitor Operation on
Monitor System (TPMS), the
information will then be displayed in page 10-47.
pressure for each tire can be viewed
the unit of measurement selected.
in the DIC. The tire pressure will be Compass Zone Setting
Coolant Temperature shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or
pounds per square inch (psi). Press This display allows for setting the
Press T until the coolant T until the DIC displays FRONT compass zone. See Compass on
temperature is displayed. The TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ## page 5-4.
temperature will be shown in °C or
RIGHT ##. Press T again until the Compass Recalibration
°F depending on the units selected.
DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa This display allows for calibrating
If the coolant temperature display (PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. the compass. See Compass on
shows dashes instead of a value,
If a low or high tire pressure page 5-4.
there may be a problem with the
vehicle. If this happens often, see condition is detected by the system
Blank Display
your dealer for service. while driving, a message advising
you to check the pressure in a This display shows no information.
specific tire will appear in the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Messages You will find the possible messages SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
that can be displayed and some
Messages are displayed on the DIC This message displays along with
information about them grouped by
to notify the driver that the status of the brake system warning light if
subject in the following information.
the vehicle has changed and that there is a problem with the brake
system or when the brake fluid level
some action may be needed by the Brake System Messages is low. See Brake System Warning
driver to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear one PARK BRAKE RELEASED Light on page 5-16. Have the brake
after another. system serviced by your dealer as
This message displays when the soon as possible.
Some messages may not require Electric Parking Brake (EPB) has
immediate action, but you can press been released from the set position. SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
any of the DIC buttons, or the trip See Parking Brake on page 9-26. This message displays if a problem
odometer reset stem on the is detected with the Electric Parking
instrument cluster, to acknowledge PARK BRAKE SET
Brake (EPB) system. See Parking
that you received the messages and This message displays when the Brake on page 9-26.
to clear them from the display. Electric Parking Brake (EPB) has
been applied to the set position. STEP ON BRAKE TO
Some messages cannot be cleared
from the DIC display because they See Parking Brake on page 9-26. RELEASE PARK BRAKE
are more urgent. These messages RELEASE PARK BRAKE This message displays if you try to
require action before they can be SWITCH release the Electric Parking Brake
cleared. Take any messages that (EPB) without first pressing the
appear on the display seriously and This message displays if the Electric brake pedal. See Parking Brake on
remember that clearing the Parking Brake (EPB) switch is page 9-26.
messages will only make the pulled while the vehicle is moving.
messages disappear, not correct the See Parking Brake on page 9-26.
problem.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Compass Messages Door Ajar Messages LIFTGATE OPEN

CALIBRATING COMPASS: DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message will display when the
liftgate is not closed properly. Close
TURN IN CIRCLES This message will display when the the liftgate completely.
This message displays when driver door is not closed properly.
calibrating the compass. Drive the Close the door completely. PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
vehicle in circles at less than This message will display when the
8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the
HOOD OPEN
passenger doors are not closed
calibration. See Compass on If the vehicle has the remote start properly. Close the door completely.
page 5-4. feature, this message displays
along with a chime when the hood is Engine Cooling System
COMPASS CALIBRATION not closed properly. Make sure that
COMPLETE the hood is closed completely. See Messages
This message displays when the Hood on page 10-3. This message ENGINE HOT A/C (Air
compass calibration is complete. displays while the ignition is in ON/ Conditioning) OFF
See Compass on page 5-4. RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and This message displays when the
to clear it from the screen. engine coolant becomes hotter than
Cruise Control Messages the normal operating temperature.
This message continues to display To avoid added strain on a hot
CRUISE SET TO XXX for two seconds if it has not been engine, the air conditioning
This message will display when the acknowledged when the engine is compressor is automatically turned
cruise control is set and it will show turned off. The message comes off. When the coolant temperature
the speed it was set to. See Cruise back on for two seconds if it has returns to normal, the A/C operation
Control on page 9-30 for more been acknowledged, but the automatically resumes. You can
information. condition still exists when the continue to drive the vehicle.
engine is turned off. If the condition
still exists, the message reappears
when the engine is turned on.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE dealer. See Engine Oil on page 10-8 ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL
ENGINE and Maintenance Schedule on
On some vehicles, this message
page 11-2.
This message displays when the displays when the engine oil level
engine coolant temperature is too Acknowledging this message will may be too low. Check the oil level
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING before filling to the recommended
idle until it cools down. display. That must be done at the level. If the oil is not low and this
OIL LIFE screen. See “Oil Life” message remains on, take the
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP under Driver Information Center vehicle to your dealer for service.
ENGINE (DIC) on page 5-23 and Engine Oil See Engine Oil on page 10-8.
This message displays along with a Life System on page 10-10.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
continuous chime when the engine CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON ENGINE
has overheated. Stop and turn the
engine off immediately to avoid This message displays when oil life
severe engine damage. See Engine remaining is between one and { Caution
Overheating on page 10-18. five percent and service is required
for the vehicle. See your dealer. See If you drive the vehicle while the
Engine Oil on page 10-8 and engine oil pressure is low, severe
Engine Oil Messages Maintenance Schedule on engine damage may occur. Stop
CHANGE ENGINE OIL NOW page 11-2. the vehicle as soon as possible.
Acknowledging this message will Do not drive the vehicle until the
This message displays when
not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING cause of the low oil pressure is
service is urgently required. This
indicates that the oil life remaining is display. That must be done at the corrected. See Engine Oil on
less than one percent and the oil OIL LIFE screen. See “Oil Life” page 10-8.
cannot work correctly to avoid under Driver Information Center
engine wear or damage. See your (DIC) on page 5-23 and Engine Oil This message displays when the
Life System on page 10-10. vehicle's engine oil pressure is low.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Stop the vehicle immediately, as Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages
engine damage can result from
driving a vehicle with low oil FUEL LEVEL LOW REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOB
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced This message displays when the BATTERY
by your dealer as soon as possible vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel This message displays if a Remote
when this message is displayed. tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
Gauge on page 5-10 and Filling the battery is low. The battery needs to
Engine Power Messages Tank on page 9-38 for more be replaced in the transmitter. See
information. “Battery Replacement” under
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the TIGHTEN GAS CAP System Operation on page 2-2.
vehicle's engine power is reduced. This message may display along
Reduced engine power can affect with the malfunction indicator lamp Lamp Messages
the vehicle's ability to accelerate. on the instrument cluster if the
If this message is on, but there is no vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened AUTOMATIC LIGHT
reduction in performance, proceed properly. See Malfunction Indicator CONTROL ON
to your destination. The Lamp on page 5-14. Reinstall the
performance may be reduced the This message displays when the
fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank automatic headlamp system is
next time the vehicle is driven. The on page 9-38. The diagnostic
vehicle may be driven at a reduced activated by turning the exterior
system can determine if the fuel cap lamps control to AUTO.
speed while this message is on, but has been left off or improperly
maximum acceleration and speed installed. A loose or missing fuel AUTOMATIC LIGHT
may be reduced. Anytime this cap allows fuel to evaporate into the CONTROL OFF
message stays on, the vehicle atmosphere. A few driving trips with
should be taken to your dealer for the cap properly installed should This message displays when the
service as soon as possible. turn this light and message off. automatic headlamp system has
been turned off.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Object Detection System this system to help you park. See SERVICE TRACTION
Parking Assist on page 9-32. See CONTROL
Messages your dealer for service.
This message displays when the
PARK ASST (Assist) Traction Control System (TCS) is
BLOCKED SEE OWNERS Ride Control System not functioning properly. A warning
MANUAL Messages light also appears on the instrument
This message displays if there is cluster. See Traction Control/
SERVICE STABILITRAK Electronic Stability Control on
something interfering with the Rear
Parking Assist (RPA) system. See This message displays if there is a page 9-28. Have the TCS serviced
Parking Assist on page 9-32. problem with the StabiliTrak® by your dealer as soon as possible.
system. A warning light also
PARK ASSIST OFF appears on the instrument cluster. STABILITRAK OFF
After the vehicle has been started, See Traction Control/Electronic If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
this message displays to remind the Stability Control on page 9-28. message displays when you turn off
driver that the Rear Parking Assist If this message turns on while you the StabiliTrak, or when the stability
(RPA) system has been turned off. are driving, pull off the road as soon control has been automatically
Press the set/reset button or the trip as possible and stop carefully. Try disabled. To limit wheel spin and
odometer reset stem to resetting the system by turning the realize the full benefits of the
acknowledge this message and ignition off and then back on. If this stability enhancement system, you
clear it from the DIC display. See message still stays on or turns back should normally leave StabiliTrak
Parking Assist on page 9-32. on again while you are driving, the on. However, you should turn
vehicle needs service. Have the StabiliTrak off if the vehicle gets
SERVICE PARK ASSIST system inspected by your dealer as stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow
This message displays if there is a soon as possible. and you want to rock the vehicle to
problem with the Rear Parking attempt to free it, or if you are
Assist (RPA) system. Do not use driving in extreme off-road
conditions and require more wheel
spin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
page 9-9. To turn the StabiliTrak TRACTION CONTROL ON SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
system on or off, see Traction
This message displays when the This message displays when a
Control/Electronic Stability Control
Traction Control System (TCS) turns non-emissions-related malfunction
on page 9-28.
on. See Traction Control/Electronic occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
TRACTION CONTROL OFF Stability Control on page 9-28 for by your dealer as soon as possible.
more information.
Traction Control System (TCS) turns Tire Messages
off. See Traction Control/Electronic Airbag System Messages
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
Stability Control on page 9-28. SERVICE AIR BAG On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
This message only displays while This message displays when there Monitor System (TPMS), this
the ignition is in ON/RUN and is a problem with the airbag system. message displays when the
disappears after 10 seconds, unless Have the vehicle serviced by your pressure in one or more of the
it is acknowledged or an urgent dealer immediately. See Airbag vehicle's tires needs to be checked.
warning appears. Readiness Light on page 5-12 for This message also displays LEFT
Any of the following conditions may more information. FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
cause the TCS to turn off: REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
. The TCS is turned off by Service Vehicle Messages which tire needs to be checked. You
can receive more than one tire
pressing the TCS/StabiliTrak SERVICE A/C (Air pressure message at a time. To
button. See Traction Control/ Conditioning) SYSTEM read the other messages that may
Electronic Stability Control on
This message displays when there have been sent at the same time,
page 9-28.
is a problem detected in the air press the set/reset button. If a tire
. The battery is low. pressure message appears on the
conditioning system. Have the
. There is a TCS failure. See your vehicle serviced by your dealer. DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have
dealer for service. the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Tires
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
on page 10-37, Vehicle Load Limits TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

on page 9-10, and Tire Pressure on Caution (Continued)
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
page 10-44. The DIC also shows
Monitor System (TPMS), this automatic transmission fluid listed
the tire pressure values. See Driver
message displays when the TPMS in Recommended Fluids and
Information Center (DIC) on
is re-learning the tire positions on Lubricants on page 11-12.
page 5-23. If the tire pressure is low,
the vehicle. The tire positions must
the low tire pressure warning light
be re-learned after rotating the tires
comes on. See Tire Pressure Light This message displays when the life
or after replacing a tire or sensor.
on page 5-20. of the transmission fluid has expired
See Tire Rotation on page 10-50,
SERVICE TIRE MONITORING Tire Pressure Monitor System on and it should be changed. See
page 10-46, and Tire Pressure on Maintenance Schedule on
SYSTEM page 11-2 and Recommended
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Fluids and Lubricants on page 11-12
Monitor System (TPMS), this for the proper fluid and change
message displays if a part on the
Transmission Messages intervals.
TPMS is not working properly. The CHANGE TRANSMISSION
tire pressure light also flashes and SERVICE TRANSMISSION
FLUID
then remains on during the same This message displays when there
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure is a problem with the transmission.
Light on page 5-20. Several { Caution See your dealer for service.
conditions may cause this message Use of the incorrect automatic
to appear. See Tire Pressure
transmission fluid may damage
Monitor Operation on page 10-47 for
the vehicle, and the damages
more information. If the warning
comes on and stays on, there may may not be covered by the
be a problem with the TPMS. See vehicle warranty. Always use the
your dealer. (Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Vehicle Reminder Vehicle

ENGINE Messages Personalization
{ Caution ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE The vehicle may have customization
WITH CARE capabilities that allow you to
Do not drive the vehicle while the program certain features to one
transmission fluid is overheating, preferred setting. Customization
outside air temperature is cold
or the transmission can be enough to create icy road features can only be programmed to
damaged. This could lead to conditions. Adjust your driving one setting on the vehicle and
costly repairs that would not be accordingly. cannot be programmed to a
covered by the warranty. preferred setting for two different
TURN SIGNAL ON drivers.
This message displays along with a This message displays and a chime All of the customization options may
chime if the transmission fluid in the sounds as a reminder to turn off the not be available on the vehicle. Only
vehicle gets hot. Driving with the turn signal if you drive the vehicle the options available will be
transmission fluid temperature high for more than about 1.2 km displayed on the DIC.
can cause damage to the vehicle. (0.75 mile) with a turn signal on. The default settings for the
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to See Turn and Lane-Change Signals customization features were set
allow the transmission to cool. This on page 6-3 for more information. when the vehicle left the factory, but
message clears and the chime may have been changed from their
stops when the fluid temperature default state since then.
reaches a safe level.
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
To change customization
preferences, use the following
procedure.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Entering the Feature DISPLAY LANGUAGE AUTO DOOR LOCK

Settings Menu This feature allows you to select the This feature allows you to select
1. Turn the ignition on and place language in which the DIC when the vehicle's doors will
the vehicle in P (Park). messages will appear. automatically lock. See Automatic
Door Locks on page 2-6.
To avoid excessive drain on the Press U until the PRESS V TO
battery, it is recommended that SET DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen Press U until PRESS V TO SET
the headlamps are turned off. appears on the DIC display. Press AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the
2. Press U to scroll through the
V once to access the settings for DIC display. Press V once to
available customizable options. this feature. Then press U to scroll access the settings for this feature.
through the following settings: Then press U to scroll through the
Feature Settings Menu Items ENGLISH (default): All messages following settings:
The following are customization will appear in English. SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
features that allow you to program FRANCAIS: All messages will The doors will automatically lock
settings to the vehicle: appear in French. when the vehicle is shifted out of
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH P (Park).
ESPANOL: All messages will
This feature will only display if a appear in Spanish. AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors
language other than English has will automatically lock when the
PORTUGUESE: All messages will vehicle speed is above 13 km/h
been set. This feature allows you to appear in Portuguese.
change the language in which the (8 mph) for three seconds.
DIC messages appear to English. NO CHANGE: No change will be NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current made to this feature. The current
Press U until the PRESS V TO setting will remain. setting will remain.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen
appears on the DIC display. Press To select a setting, press V while To select a setting, press V while
V once to display all DIC messages the desired setting is displayed on the desired setting is displayed on
in English. the DIC. the DIC.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL DOORS AT KEY OUT: All of Press U until PRESS V TO SET
This feature allows you to select the doors will unlock when the key REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on
is taken out of the ignition.
whether or not to turn off the the DIC display. Press V once to
automatic door unlocking feature. ALL DOORS IN PARK (default): access the settings for this feature.
It also allows you to select which All of the doors will unlock when the Then press U to scroll through the
doors and when the doors will vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
following settings:
automatically unlock. See Automatic NO CHANGE: No change will be
Door Locks on page 2-6. VERIFICATION OFF: There will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain. no feedback when you press Q on
Press U until PRESS V TO SET
the RKE transmitter.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on To select a setting, press V while
the DIC display. Press V once to VERIFICATION LIGHTS ONLY:
the desired setting is displayed on
access the settings for this feature. The exterior lamps will flash when
the DIC.
Then press U to scroll through the you press Q on the RKE transmitter.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
following settings: VERIFICATION HORN ONLY: The
This feature allows you to select the horn will sound on the second press
OFF: None of the doors will type of feedback you will receive
automatically unlock. of Q on the RKE transmitter.
when locking the vehicle with the
DRIVER DOOR AT KEY OUT: Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) VERIFICATION HORN & LIGHTS
Only the driver door will unlock transmitter. You will not receive (default): The exterior lamps will
when the key is taken out of the feedback when locking the vehicle flash when you press Q on the RKE
ignition. with the RKE transmitter if the doors transmitter, and the horn will sound
are open. See Remote Keyless
DRIVER DOOR IN PARK: Only the when Q is pressed again within
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
driver door will unlock when the five seconds of the previous
page 2-2.
vehicle is shifted into P (Park). command.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
VERIFICATION NO CHANGE: No Then press U to scroll through the The key must be out of the ignition
change will be made to this feature. following settings: for this feature to work. You can
The current setting will remain. temporarily override delayed locking
VERIF LIGHTS OFF: The exterior by pressing the power door lock
To select a setting, press V while lamps will not flash when you press switch twice or the lock button on
the desired setting is displayed on K on the RKE transmitter. the RKE transmitter twice. See
the DIC. VERIF LIGHTS ON (default): The Delayed Locking on page 2-6.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK exterior lamps will flash when you
This feature allows you to select the press K on the RKE transmitter. DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on
type of feedback you will receive VERIF NO CHANGE: No change the DIC display. Press V once to
when unlocking the vehicle with the will be made to this feature. The access the settings for this feature.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) current setting will remain. Then press U to scroll through the
transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the To select a setting, press V while following settings:
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the desired setting is displayed on OFF: There will be no delayed
the doors are open. See Remote the DIC. locking of the vehicle's doors.
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
DELAY DOOR LOCK ON (default): The doors will not
Operation on page 2-2.
This feature allows you to select lock until five seconds after the last
Press U until PRESS V TO SET whether or not the locking of the door is closed.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears vehicle's doors will be delayed. NO CHANGE: No change will be
on the DIC display. Press V once to When locking the doors with the made to this feature. The current
access the settings for this feature. power door lock switch and a door setting will remain.
is open, this feature will delay
locking the doors until five seconds To select a setting, press V while
after the last door is closed. You will the desired setting is displayed on
hear three chimes to signal that the the DIC.
delayed locking feature is in use.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
EXIT LIGHTING To select a setting, press V while The lamps will remain on for
This feature allows you to select the the desired setting is displayed on 20 seconds or until Q on the RKE
amount of time you want the the DIC. transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle
exterior lamps to remain on when it is no longer off. See Remote
APPROACH LIGHTING Keyless Entry (RKE) System
is dark enough outside. This
happens after the key is turned from This feature allows you to select Operation on page 2-2.
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. whether or not to have the exterior NO CHANGE: No change will be
lamps turn on briefly during low light made to this feature. The current
Press U until PRESS V TO SET periods after unlocking the vehicle
EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC setting will remain.
using the Remote Keyless Entry
display. Press V once to access the (RKE) transmitter. To select a setting, press V while
settings for this feature. Then press the desired setting is displayed on
U to scroll through the following APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
the DIC.
settings:
the DIC display. Press V once to CHIME VOLUME
OFF: The exterior lamps will not access the settings for this feature.
turn on. This feature allows you to select the
Then press U to scroll through the volume level of the chime.
10 SECONDS (default): The following settings:
exterior lamps will stay on for Press U until PRESS V TO SET
10 seconds. OFF: The exterior lamps will not CHIME VOLUME appears on the
turn on when you unlock the vehicle DIC display. Press V once to
30 SECONDS: The exterior lamps with the RKE transmitter.
will stay on for 30 seconds. access the settings for this feature.
ON (default): If it is dark enough Then press U to scroll through the
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will outside, the exterior lamps will turn
stay on for two minutes. following settings:
on briefly when you unlock the
NO CHANGE: No change will be vehicle with the RKE transmitter. NORMAL: The chime volume will
made to this feature. The current be set to a normal level.
setting will remain.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
LOUD: The chime volume will be Press U until PRESS V TO SET Press U until PRESS V TO
set to a loud level. REMOTE START appears on the RESTORE DEFAULTS appears on
NO CHANGE: No change will be DIC display. Press V once to the DIC display. Press V once to
made to this feature. The current access the settings for this feature. access the settings for this feature.
setting will remain. Then press U to scroll through the Then press U to scroll through the
There is no default for chime following settings: following settings:
volume. The volume will stay at the
OFF: The remote start feature will RESTORE (default): The
last known setting.
be disabled. customization features will be set to
To select a setting, press V while ON (default): The remote start their factory default settings.
the desired setting is displayed on feature will be enabled. NO CHANGE: The customization
the DIC. features will not be set to their
NO CHANGE: No change will be
REMOTE START made to this feature. The current factory default settings.
If the vehicle has this feature, it setting will remain. To select a setting, press V while
allows you to turn the remote start To select a setting, press V while the desired setting is displayed on
off or on. The remote start feature the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
allows you to start the engine from the DIC. EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
outside of the vehicle using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle This feature allows you to set all of feature settings menu.
Start on page 2-4. the customization features back to Press U until PRESS V TO EXIT
their factory default settings. FEATURE SETTINGS appears in
the DIC display. Press V once to
exit the menu.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
If you do not exit, pressing U again Universal Remote Do not use the Universal Remote
will return you to the beginning of system with any garage door opener
the feature settings menu. System that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any
See Radio Frequency Statement on
Exiting the Feature garage door opener model
page 13-12.
Settings Menu manufactured before April 1, 1982.
The feature settings menu will be Universal Remote System Read these instructions completely
exited when any of the following before programming the Universal
occurs:
Programming Remote system. It may help to have
another person assist with the
. The vehicle is no longer in
programming process.
ON/RUN.
Keep the original hand-held
. The 3 or T DIC buttons are transmitter for use in other vehicles
pressed. as well as for future programming.
. The end of the feature settings Erase the programming when
menu is reached and exited. vehicle ownership is terminated.
If equipped, these buttons are in the See “Erasing Universal Remote
. A 40-second time period has overhead console. System Buttons” later in this
elapsed with no selection made. section.
This system can replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to To program a garage door opener,
activate devices such as garage park outside directly in line with and
door openers, security systems, and facing the garage door opener
home automation devices. These receiver. Clear all people and
instructions refer to a garage door objects near the garage door.
opener, but can be used for other
devices.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Make sure the hand-held transmitter 2. At the same time, press and programming is complete.
has a new battery for quicker and hold both the hand-held There is no need to
more accurate transmission of the transmitter button and one of the complete Steps 4–6.
radio-frequency signal. three Universal Remote system . If the indicator light does
buttons to be used to operate not come on or the garage
Programming the Universal the garage door. Do not release
Remote System door does not move, a
either button until the indicator second button press may
For questions or help programming light changes from a slow to a be required. For a second
the Universal Remote system, call rapid flash. Then release both time, press and hold the
1-800-355-3515 or see buttons. newly programmed button
www.homelink.com. Some garage door openers may for five seconds. If the light
Programming involves require substitution of Step 2 stays on or the garage door
time-sensitive actions, and may time with the procedure under “Radio moves, programming is
out causing the procedure to be Signals for Canada and Some complete.
repeated. Gate Operators” later in this . If the indicator light blinks
section. rapidly for two seconds,
To program up to three devices:
3. Press and hold the newly then changes to a solid light
1. Hold the end of the hand-held programmed Universal Remote and the garage door does
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to system button for five seconds not move, continue with
3 in) away from the Universal while watching the indicator light programming Steps 4–6.
Remote system buttons with the and garage door activation.
indicator light in view. The
hand-held transmitter was . If the indicator light stays on
supplied by the manufacturer of continuously or the garage
the garage door opener receiver. door moves when the
button is pressed, then
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
flash, press and hold the same enough for the Universal Remote
button a second time for system to pick up the signal during
two seconds, then release it. programming.
Again, if the door does not move If the programming did not work,
or the garage door lamp does replace Step 2 under “Programming
not flash, press and hold the the Universal Remote System” with
same button a third time for the following:
two seconds, then release it.
Press and hold the Universal
The Universal Remote system Remote system button while
Learn or Smart Button
should now activate the pressing and releasing the
4. After completing Steps 1–3, garage door. hand-held transmitter button every
locate the Learn or Smart button
Repeat the process for two seconds until the signal has
inside the garage on the garage
programming the two remaining been successfully accepted by the
door opener receiver. The name
buttons. Universal Remote system. The
and color of the button may vary
Universal Remote system indicator
by manufacturer. Radio Signals for Canada and light will flash slowly at first and then
5. Press and release the Learn or Some Gate Operators rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
Smart button. Step 6 must be For questions or programming help, “Programming the Universal Remote
completed within 30 seconds of call 1-800-355-3515 or see System” to complete.
pressing this button. www.homelink.com.
6. Inside the vehicle, press and Canadian radio-frequency laws and
hold the newly programmed some U.S. gate operators require
Universal Remote system button transmitter signals to time out or quit
for two seconds, then release it. after several seconds of
If the garage door does not transmission. This may not be long
move or the lamp on the garage
door opener receiver does not
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Universal Remote System 1. Press and hold down the two

outside buttons until the
Operation indicator light begins to flash,
Using the Universal Home after 20 seconds.
Remote 2. Release both buttons.
Press and hold the appropriate Reprogramming a Single
Universal Home Remote button for Universal Home Remote
at least half of a second. The Button
indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted. To reprogram any of the three
Universal Home Remote buttons,
Erasing Universal Home repeat the programming instructions
Remote Buttons earlier in this section, beginning with
The programmed buttons should be Step 2.
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
To erase all programmed buttons on
the Universal Home Remote device:
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting The current status of the AUTO

system is displayed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display.
Exterior Lamp Controls See Vehicle Reminder Messages on
Exterior Lighting
page 5-35.
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 parking lamps including all lamps,
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 except the headlamps.
Daytime Running 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 headlamps together with the parking
Automatic Headlamp lamps and instrument panel lights.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 Lamps On Reminder
Turn and Lane-Change A warning chime sounds, if the
The exterior lamp control is on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 driver door is opened while the
instrument panel to the left of the
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 ignition is off and the lamps are on.
steering wheel.
Interior Lighting Turn the control to the following Wiper-Activated Headlamps
Instrument Panel Illumination positions:
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 The headlamps and parking lamps
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 9 (Off): Turns off the exterior turn on automatically if the exterior
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 lamps. The knob returns to the lamp control is set in the AUTO
AUTO position after it is released. position and the windshield wipers
Lighting Features are turned on and have completed
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 eight wipe cycles.
turns the exterior lamps on and off,
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6
depending on outside lighting.
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
6-2 Lighting
When the ignition is turned off, the Flash-to-Pass When the exterior lamp control is
wiper-activated headlamps turned to the headlamp position, the
immediately turn off. They also turn To flash the high beams, pull the regular headlamps will come on.
off if the windshield wiper control is turn signal lever toward you, and The other lamps that come on with
turned off. release. the headlamps will also come on.
Daytime Running When the headlamps are turned off,

Headlamp High/ the regular lamps also turn off, and
Low-Beam Changer Lamps (DRL) the low-beam headlamps turn on.
2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam On vehicles equipped with DRL, the The regular headlamp system
Changer): Push the turn signal low-beam headlamps come on in should be used when needed.
lever away from you to turn the high daylight when all the following
beams on. conditions are met: Automatic Headlamp
Pull the lever toward you to return to
. The engine is running, System
low beams. . The exterior lamp control is in When it is dark enough outside, the
AUTO, and headlamps come on automatically.
. The light sensor determines it is
daytime.
Fully functional DRL are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
When the DRL are on, the
This indicator light turns on in the low-beam headlamps will be on.
instrument cluster when the The taillamps, sidemarker lamps,
high-beam headlamps are on. instrument panel lights, and other
lamps will not be on.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Lighting 6-3
lamps coming on varies based on Press | again to turn the

wiper speed. When the wipers are flashers off.
not operating, these lamps turn off.
Move the exterior lamp control to 9 Turn and Lane-Change
or ; to disable this feature. Signals
Hazard Warning Flashers
Do not cover the light sensor on top

of the instrument panel or the Move the lever all the way up or
headlamps will come on when they down to signal a turn.
are not needed. An arrow on the instrument cluster
The system may also turn on the flashes in the direction of the turn or
headlamps when driving through a lane change.
parking garage or tunnel. Raise or lower the lever until the
Lights On with Wipers arrow starts to flash and then
release, to signal a lane change.
If the windshield wipers are | (Hazard Warning Flasher): The turn signal flashes
activated in daylight with the engine Press this button to make the front automatically three times.
on, and the exterior lamp control is and rear turn signal lamps flash on
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking and off. This warns others that you The lever returns to its starting
lamps, and other exterior lamps are having trouble. position whenever it is released.
come on. The transition time for the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
6-4 Lighting
If after signaling a turn or lane The fog lamp indicator in the Interior Lighting
change the arrow flashes rapidly or instrument panel comes on when
does not come on, a signal bulb the fog lamps are in use.
may be burned out. Instrument Panel
The parking lamps or low-beam
Have any burned out bulbs headlamps must be on, before the
Illumination Control
replaced. If a bulb is not burned out, fog lamps can be turned on. The thumbwheel for this feature is
check the fuse. See Instrument If the exterior lamp control is set to on the left side of the steering wheel
Panel Fuse Block on page 10-34. AUTO mode, the parking lamps and next to the exterior lamp control.
low-beam headlamps come on
Fog Lamps simultaneously when the fog lamps
are turned on.
When the high-beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps turn off
automatically. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog
lamps come on again.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on with
the fog lamps.
For vehicles with fog lamps, the
button is on the instrument panel Turn the thumbwheel to the right or
next to the exterior lamp control. left to brighten or dim the instrument
# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the panel lights.
fog lamps on or off.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Lighting 6-5
Dome Lamps + (On/Off): Press the button (2) to

turn the dome lamps on and off
while the doors are closed.
Reading Lamps
The rear reading lamps are in the

headliner.
To turn the reading lamps on or off,
press the button next to each lamp.
There are front and rear dome

lamps in the overhead console and
the headliner.
* (Dome Lamp Override): Press
the button (1) on the overhead The front reading lamps are in the
console to keep the dome lamps overhead console.
and other interior lamps turned off
while any door is open. Press this
button again to return it to the out
position and the lamps automatically
come on when any door is opened.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
6-6 Lighting
Lighting Features When the battery's state of charge

is low, the voltage is raised slightly
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
to quickly bring the charge back up. by balancing the generator's output
Entry Lighting When the state of charge is high, and the vehicle's electrical needs.
If the dome lamp override button is the voltage is lowered slightly to It can increase engine idle speed to
in the out position, the lamps inside prevent overcharging. The voltage generate more power, whenever
the vehicle automatically come on may move up or down on the needed. It can temporarily reduce
when any door is opened, or when voltmeter gauge or the voltage the power demands of some
K is pressed on the Remote display on vehicles with the Driver accessories. Normally, these actions
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Information Center. This is normal. occur in steps or levels, without
After the door is opened, the lamps If there is a problem, an alert will be being noticeable.
remain on and stay on for displayed.
20 seconds after the doors are The battery can be discharged at Battery Power Protection
closed, or until the key is put into idle if the electrical loads are very The battery saver feature is
the ignition and turned to the ACC/ high. This is true for all vehicles. designed to protect the vehicle's
ACCESSORY position. The lamps This is because the generator battery.
will then gradually dim until they are (alternator) may not be spinning fast
no longer lit. enough at idle to produce all the If any interior or exterior lamp is left
power that is needed for very high on and the ignition is turned off, the
Battery Load electrical loads. battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after
Management A high electrical load occurs when 10 minutes.
The vehicle has Electric Power several of the following are on, such
Management (EPM) that estimates as: headlamps, high beams, fog
the battery's temperature and state lamps, rear window defogger,
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage climate control fan at high speed,
for best performance and extended heated seats, engine cooling fans,
life of the battery. trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Introduction The infotainment system has built-in

features intended to help avoid
System Infotainment
distraction by disabling some
functions when driving. These
Base radio information is included in functions may gray out when they
Introduction this manual. See the infotainment are unavailable. Many infotainment
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 manual for information on other features are also available through
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 available infotainment systems. the instrument cluster and steering
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 wheel controls.
Read the following pages to
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 become familiar with these features. Before driving:
Radio . Become familiar with the
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 { Warning operation, faceplate buttons, and
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 screen buttons.
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Taking your eyes off the road for
too long or too often while using
. Set up the audio by presetting
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 favorite stations, setting the
Satellite Radio Antenna (If any infotainment feature can
tone, and adjusting the
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 cause a crash. You or others speakers.
could be injured or killed. Do not
Audio Players give extended attention to
. Set up phone numbers in
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 advance so they can be called
infotainment tasks while driving.
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 easily by pressing a single
Limit your glances at the vehicle
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 button or by using a single voice
displays and focus your attention
Phone on driving. Use voice commands command if equipped with
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Bluetooth phone capability.
whenever possible.
See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
7-2 Infotainment System
To play the infotainment system with Overview

the ignition off, see Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9-17.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
1. 4 (Information) 3. MENU
. Press to show information
. Press to open the tone
on the current station or menu to adjust the bass,
track. midrange, treble, fade, and
balance.
2. FAV (Favorites Pages)
. Press to scroll through the
favorite pages.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
4. Buttons 1 - 6 10. © SEEK 17. Z EJECT

. Save and select favorite . Seeks the previous . Press to eject the
stations. station. loaded CD.
5. EQ (Equalizer)
11. ¨ SEEK Operation
. Press to adjust the
equalizer settings.
. Seeks the next station.
Playing the Radio
6. CAT (Category) 12. DVD Slot
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
. Press to display a list of XM 13. O (Power/Volume) the system on and off.
categories, if equipped. . Press to turn the Turn to increase or decrease the
7. f (Tone) infotainment system on volume.
or off. 4 (Information): Press to display
. Press to set the bass or
treble.
. Turn to adjust the volume. additional text information related to
the current FM-RDS, CD, MP3,
. Turn to select radio 14. s REV (Reverse) WMA, or SiriusXM, if equipped.
stations. . Press and hold to go If information is available during
backward fast through a SiriusXM, FM-RDS, CD, MP3,
8. H (Clock) or WMA playback, the song title
track.
. Press to set the clock. information displays on the top line
15. \ FWD (Forward) of the display and artist information
9. BAND
. Press and hold to fast displays on the bottom line. When
. Press to scroll through the information is not available, NO
forward through a track.
available bands AM, FM, INFO displays.
or XM, if equipped. 16. CD/AUX
. Press to scroll through
selecting the CD or an
auxiliary device.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Setting the Tone (Bass/ than two seconds. A beep sounds 3. To adjust the highlighted setting,
Midrange/Treble) and the level adjusts to the middle do one of the following until the
position. desired levels are obtained:
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust bass, To quickly adjust all speaker and . Turn the f knob clockwise
midrange, or treble: tone controls to the middle position, or counterclockwise.
press the f knob for more than
1. Press the f knob until the tone two seconds until a beep sounds.
. Press the \ FWD, or s
control labels display. REV button.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select
2. Continue pressing the f knob to preset equalization settings. To quickly adjust balance or fade to
highlight the desired label, the middle position, press the
To return to the manual mode, press pushbutton under the BAL or FADE
or press the pushbutton under
the EQ button until Manual displays label for more than two seconds.
the desired label.
or manually adjust the bass, A beep sounds and the level adjusts
3. To adjust the highlighted setting, midrange, or treble by pressing the to the middle position.
do one of the following: f knob.
To quickly adjust all speaker and
. Turn the f knob clockwise Adjusting the Speakers tone controls to the middle position,
or counterclockwise. (Balance/Fade) press the f knob for more than
. Press the \ FWD, or s BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To two seconds until a beep sounds.
REV button. adjust the balance or fade:
Chime Volume
If a station's frequency is weak or if 1. Press the f knob until the The radio may be used to adjust the
there is static, decrease the treble. speaker control labels display. vehicle's chime level. If the radio
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, 2. Continue pressing the f knob to can be used to change the volume
or treble to the middle position, level of the chime, press and hold
highlight the desired label,
press the pushbutton under the the sixth FAV pushbutton with the
or press the pushbutton under
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more ignition on and the radio power off.
the desired label.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
The volume level changes between Radio To scan stations, press and hold
Normal and Loud. The selected either button for a few seconds until
volume level appears on the radio a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
display. AM-FM Radio station, plays for a few seconds,
Removing the radio and not Radio Data System (RDS) then goes to the next station. Press
replacing it with a factory radio or either button again to stop scanning.
The RDS feature is available for use
chime module will disable vehicle only on FM stations that broadcast The radio only seeks and scans
chimes. RDS information. This system relies stations with a strong signal that are
upon receiving specific information in the selected band.
Radio Messages
from these stations and only works Storing a Radio Station as a
Calibration Error: The audio when the information is available.
system has been calibrated for the Favorite
While the radio is tuned to an
vehicle from the factory. FM-RDS station, the station name Drivers are encouraged to set up
If Calibration Error displays, it or call letters display. In rare cases, their radio station favorites while the
means that the radio has not been a radio station could broadcast vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
configured properly for the vehicle incorrect information that causes the favorite stations using the presets,
and it must be returned to your radio features to work improperly. favorites button, and steering wheel
dealer for service. If this happens, contact the radio controls. See Steering Wheel
Locked: This message displays station. Controls on page 5-2.
when the TheftLock system has FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
locked up the radio. Take the
Finding a Station
36 stations can be stored as
vehicle to your dealer for service. BAND: Press to switch between favorites using the six softkeys
AM or FM. below the radio station frequency
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected, f (Tune): Turn to select radio tabs and by using the radio FAV
contact your dealer. stations. button. Press FAV to go through up
to six pages of favorites, each
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press to go to having six favorite stations available
the previous or to the next station. per page. Each page of favorites
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
can contain any combination of AM, 3. Select the desired number of coast, and in digital-quality sound.
FM, or SiriusXM stations (if favorites pages by pressing the A service fee is required to receive
equipped). pushbutton below the displayed the SiriusXM service. For more
The balance/fade and tone settings page numbers. information, contact SiriusXM at
that were previously adjusted, are 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time www.siriusxm.com or
stored with the favorite stations. out, to return to the original main 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
radio screen showing the radio www.xmradio.ca or call
To store a station as a favorite: 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
station frequency labels and to
1. Tune to a radio station. begin the process of Finding a Station
2. Press FAV to display the page programming favorites for the
chosen number of numbered BAND: Press to switch between
where to store the station. AM, FM, or SiriusXM. The selection
pages.
3. Press and hold one of the displays.
six pushbuttons until a beep Satellite Radio f (Tune): Turn to select radio
sounds. When that pushbutton is stations.
®
pressed and released, the If equipped with a SiriusXM
station that was set returns. Satellite Radio tuner and a valid © SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press to go to
SiriusXM Satellite subscription can the previous or to the next station
4. Repeat the steps for each radio and stay there.
receive SiriusXM programming.
station to be stored as a favorite.
To set up the number of favorites SiriusXM Satellite Radio To scan stations, press and hold ©
pages: Service SEEK or ¨ SEEK until a beep
1. Press MENU to display the radio SiriusXM is a satellite radio service sounds. The radio goes to a station,
setup menu. based in the 48 contiguous United plays for a few seconds, then goes
States and 10 Canadian provinces. to the next station. Press either
2. Press the pushbutton below the SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide arrow again to stop scanning.
FAV 1-6 label. variety of programming and
commercial-free music, coast to
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Finding a Category (CAT)

. Press the pushbutton below 4. Press the pushbutton under the
Station the right or left arrows on Remove tab until the category
the display. name along with the word
CAT (Category): The CAT button is Removed displays.
used to find SiriusXM stations when . Press the © SEEK or ¨
the radio is in the XM mode. To find SEEK button. 5. Repeat the steps to remove
SiriusXM channels within a desired more categories.
5. To exit the category search
category: mode, press the FAV button or Removed categories can be
1. Press BAND until the XM the BAND button to display the restored by pressing the pushbutton
frequency displays. favorites again. under the Add label when a
removed category is displayed or by
2. Press CAT to display the Removing SiriusXM Categories pressing the pushbutton under the
category tabs. Undesired SiriusXM categories can Restore All label.
3. To navigate through the be removed through the setup Categories cannot be removed or
categories, do one of the menu. To remove an undesired added while the vehicle is moving
following: category: faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
. Press the CAT button. 1. Press the MENU button.
Storing a Radio Station as a
. Press the s REV or \ 2. Press the pushbutton below the Favorite
FWD button. XM CAT label.
Drivers are encouraged to set up
. Turn the f knob. 3. Turn the f knob, then press the their radio station favorites while the
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK button or the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
4. To tune to a station in the s REV or \ FWD button to favorite stations using the presets,
selected category, do one of the display the category to be favorites button, and steering wheel
following: removed. controls. See Steering Wheel
. Turn the f knob. Controls on page 5-2.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of To set up the number of favorites accessory power outlet. If there is
36 stations can be programmed as pages: interference or static, unplug the
favorites using the six pushbuttons 1. Press MENU to display the radio item from the accessory power
below the radio station frequency setup menu. outlet.
labels and by using the radio
favorites page button (FAV button). 2. Press the pushbutton below the AM
Press to go through up to six pages FAV 1-6 label. The range for most AM stations is
of favorites, each having six favorite 3. Select the desired number of greater than for FM, especially at
stations available per page. Each favorites pages by pressing the night. The longer range can cause
page of favorites can contain any pushbutton below the displayed station frequencies to interfere with
combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM page numbers. each other. For better radio
stations. reception, most AM radio stations
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time boost the power levels during the
The balance/fade and tone settings out, to return to the original main
that were previously adjusted, are day, and then reduce these levels
radio screen showing the radio during the night. Static can also
stored with the favorite stations. station frequency labels and to occur when things like storms and
To store a station as a favorite: begin the process of power lines interfere with radio
programming favorites for the reception. When this happens, try
1. Tune to a radio station. chosen number of favorites reducing the treble on the radio.
2. Press FAV to display the page pages.
where to store the station. FM Stereo
3. Press and hold one of the Radio Reception FM signals only reach about
six pushbuttons until a beep Frequency interference and static 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles).
sounds. When that pushbutton is can occur during normal radio Although the radio has a built-in
pressed and released, the reception if items such as cell phone electronic circuit that automatically
station that was set returns. chargers, vehicle convenience works to reduce interference, some
4. Repeat the steps for each radio accessories, and external electronic
station to be stored as a favorite. devices are plugged into the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
static can occur, especially around Occasionally check to make sure Audio Players
tall buildings or hills, causing the the antenna is tightened to its base.
sound to fade in and out. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand. CD Player
Cellular Phone Usage
Playing a CD
Cellular phone usage may cause Satellite Radio Antenna
interference with the vehicle's radio. Insert a CD partway into the slot,
(If Equipped) label side up. The player pulls it in
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, The SiriusXM Satellite Radio and the CD should begin playing.
charging the phone's battery, antenna is on the roof of the vehicle. Z EJECT: Press and release to
or simply having the phone on. This Keep the antenna clear of eject the disc that is currently
interference causes an increased obstructions for clear radio playing. A beep sounds and
level of static while listening to the reception. Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
radio. If static is received while Tall buildings or hills can interfere disc is ejected, Remove Disc
listening to the radio, unplug the with satellite radio signals, causing displays. The disc can be removed.
cellular phone and turn it off. the sound to fade in and out. In If the disc is not removed, after
addition, traveling or standing under several seconds, the disc
Fixed Mast Antenna heavy foliage, bridges, garages, automatically pulls back into the
or tunnels may cause loss of the player.
The fixed mast antenna can
withstand most car washes without SiriusXM signal for a period of time. f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
being damaged as long as it is If the vehicle has a sunroof, the the CD that is currently playing.
securely attached to the base. If the performance of the SiriusXM system © SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press ©
mast becomes slightly bent, may be affected if the sunroof SEEK to go to the start of the
straighten it out by hand. If the mast is open. current track, if more than
is badly bent, replace it. 10 seconds on the track have
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
played, otherwise goes to the BAND: Press to listen to the radio and dust. The CD player scans the
previous track. Press ¨ SEEK to go when a CD is playing. The CD bottom surface of the disc. If the
to the next track. remains inside the radio for future surface of a CD is damaged, such
listening. as cracked, broken, or scratched,
If either arrow is held, or pressed the CD does not play properly or not
multiple times, the player continues CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
select between CD, Auxiliary, at all. Do not touch the bottom side
moving backward or forward of a CD while handling it; this could
through the tracks on the CD. or USB.
damage the surface. Pick up CDs
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
. When a CD is in the player, the by grasping the outer edges or the
and hold to reverse playback quickly CD icon and a message edge of the hole and the outer edge.
within a track. Sound will be heard showing the disc and/or track
number display. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take
at a reduced volume. Release to a soft, lint-free cloth or dampen a
resume playing the track. The . If an auxiliary input device is not clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
elapsed time of the track displays. connected or a CD is not detergent solution mixed with water,
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press installed an error message will and clean it. Make sure the wiping
and hold to advance playback display. process starts from the center to
quickly within a track. Sound will be Care of CDs the edge.
heard at a reduced volume. Release Care of the CD Player
to resume playing the track. The If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
elapsed time of the track displays. can be reduced due to CD-R or Do not add any label to a CD; it
CD-RW quality, the method of could get caught in the CD player.
RDM (Random): CD tracks can be recording, the quality of the music If a CD is recorded on a personal
listened to in random, rather than that has been recorded, and the computer and a description label is
sequential order with the random way the CD-R or CD-RW has been needed, try labeling the top of the
setting. To use random, press the handled. Handle them carefully. recorded CD with a marking pen.
softkey under the RDM label until Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
Random Current Disc displays. original cases or other protective The use of CD lens cleaners for
Press the softkey again to turn off cases and away from direct sunlight CDs is not advised.
random play.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
CD Messages
. The label is caught in the CD
{ Caution Check Disc: Radios with a single
player.
If a label is added to a CD, more CD player display Check Disc If the CD is not playing correctly for
and/or eject the CD if an error any other reason, try a known
than one CD is inserted into the
occurs. good CD.
slot at a time, or an attempt is
made to play scratched or Optical Error: The disc was If any error occurs repeatedly or if
damaged CDs, the CD player inserted upside down. an error cannot be corrected,
could be damaged. While using contact your dealer. If the radio
Disk Read Error: A disc was displays an error message, write it
the CD player, use only CDs in
inserted with an invalid or unknown down and provide it to your dealer
good condition without any label, format.
load one CD at a time, and keep when reporting the problem.
the CD player and the loading slot Player Error: There are disc LOAD
free of foreign materials, liquids, or disc EJECT problems. MP3
and debris. . It is very hot. When the MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
temperature returns to normal,
the CD should play. The radio plays MP3 files that were
If an error displays, see “CD recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
Messages” later in this section. . The road is very rough. When The files can be recorded with the
the road becomes smoother, the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD should play. 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,
CD-RW Disc . The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
The radio has the capability of or upside down. 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a
CD-RW disc. For more information
. The air is very humid. If so, wait variable bit rate. Song title, artist
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R about an hour and try again. name, and album are available for
or CD-RW disc, see MP3 on . There was a problem while display by the radio when recorded
page 7-11. burning the CD. using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Playing an MP3 reduced volume. Release to resume tag information. It can take several
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files playing the file. The elapsed time of minutes to scan the disc depending
on the CD-R or CD-RW currently the file displays. on the number of MP3 files
playing. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
and hold to advance playback The radio can begin playing while it
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is is scanning the disc in the
the current track, if more than background. When the scan is
10 seconds on the CD has played, heard at a reduced volume. Release
to resume playing the file. The finished, the CD-R or CD-RW
otherwise goes to the previous begins playing again.
track. Press and hold or press elapsed time of the file displays.
multiple times to continue moving RDM (Random): With the random Once the disc has been scanned,
backward through tracks. setting, the MP3 files on the CD-R the player defaults to playing MP3
or CD-RW can be listened to in files in order by artist. The current
¨ SEEK: Press ¨ SEEK to go to
random, rather than sequential artist playing is shown on the
the next track. Press ¨ SEEK and order, on one CD-R/CD-RW. To play second line of the display between
hold or press multiple times to MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW the arrows. Once all songs by that
continue moving forward through in random order, press the softkey artist are played, the player moves
tracks. under the RDM label until Random to the next artist in alphabetical
order on the CD-R/CD-RW and
S c (Previous Folder): Press Current Disc displays. Press the
begins playing MP3 files by that
the softkey under the Folder label to same softkey again to turn off
random play. artist. To listen to MP3 files by
go to the first track in the previous another artist, press the softkey
folder. h (Music Navigator): Use the below either arrow button. The disc
c T (Next Folder): Press the music navigator feature to play MP3 goes to the next or previous artist in
softkey under the Folder label to go files on the CD-R or CD-RW in alphabetical order. Continue
to the first track in the next folder. order by artist or album. Press the pressing either softkey until the
softkey below the music navigator desired artist is displayed.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold label. The player scans the disc to
to reverse playback quickly within sort the files by artist and album ID3
an MP3 file. Sound is heard at a
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
To change from playback by artist to (category) button toggles between keep the total number of folders
playback by album, press the compressed and uncompressed to a minimum in order to reduce
softkey below the Sort label. From audio format. the complexity and confusion in
the sort screen, push one of the trying to locate a particular folder
softkeys below the album label. MP3 Supported File and Folder during playback.
Structure
Press the softkey below the Back . Make sure playlists have a .m3u
label to return to the main music To burn an MP3 disc on a personal
or .wpl extension; other file
navigator screen. Now the album computer:
extensions may not work.
name is displayed on the second . Make sure the MP3 files are
line between the arrows, and songs . Minimize the length of the file,
recorded on a CD-R or folder, or playlist names. Long
from the current album begin to CD-RW disc.
play. Once all songs from that file, folder, or playlist names,
album are played, the player moves . Do not mix standard audio and or a combination of a large
to the next album in alphabetical MP3 files on one disc. number of files, folders,
order on the CD-R/CD-RW and . The CD player is able to read or playlists can cause the player
begins playing MP3 files from that and play a maximum of to be unable to play up to the
album. 50 folders, 50 playlists, and maximum number of files,
255 files. folders, playlists, or sessions. To
To exit music navigator mode, press play a large number of files,
the softkey below the Back label to . Create a folder structure that folders, playlists or sessions,
return to normal MP3 playback. makes it easy to find songs minimize the length of the file,
Compressed Audio while driving. Organize songs by folder, or playlist name. Long
albums using one folder for each names also take up more space
The radio also plays discs that album. Each folder or album on the display, potentially getting
contain both uncompressed CD should contain 18 songs or less. cut off.
audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. By
default the radio reads only the
. Avoid subfolders. The system
uncompressed audio and ignores can support up to
the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT eight subfolders deep; however,
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14

. Finalize the audio disc before Empty Directory or Folder Order of Play
burning it. Trying to add music to
an existing disc can cause the If a root directory or a folder exists Tracks recorded to the CD-R or
disc not to function in the player. somewhere in the file structure that CD-RW are played in the following
contains only folders/subfolders and order:
Playlists can be changed by using no compressed files directly
S c and c T , the tune knob, . Play begins from the first track in
beneath them, the player advances the first playlist and continues
or the SEEK arrows. An MP3 CD-R to the next folder in the file structure
or CD-RW that was recorded using sequentially through all tracks in
that contains compressed audio each playlist. When the last
no file folders can also be played. files. The empty folder does not
If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more track of the last playlist has
display. played, play continues from the
than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, and 255 files, the No Folder first track of the first playlist.
player can access and navigate up When the CD contains only . Play begins from the first track in
to the maximum, but all items over compressed files, the files are under the first folder and continues
the maximum are not accessible. the root folder. The next and sequentially through all tracks in
previous folder functions do not each folder. When the last track
Root Directory
display on a CD that was recorded of the last folder has been
The root directory of the CD-R or without folders or playlists. When played, play continues from the
CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the displaying the name of the folder, first track of the first folder.
root directory has compressed audio the radio displays ROOT. When play enters a new folder, the
files, the directory displays as F1
When the CD contains only playlists display does not automatically show
ROOT. All files contained directly
and compressed audio files, but no the new folder name unless the
under the root directory are
folders, all files are under the root folder mode is chosen as the default
accessed prior to any root directory
folder. The folder down and up display. The new track name
folders. However, playlists (Px) are
buttons search playlists (Px) first displays.
always accessed before root folders
or files. and then go to the root folder. When
the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio displays ROOT.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
File System and Naming Auxiliary Devices O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise

The song name displayed is the or counterclockwise to increase or
song name contained in the ID3 tag.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack decrease the volume of the portable
If the song name is not present in Radios with an auxiliary input jack player. Additional volume
the ID3 tag, then the radio displays on the lower right side of the adjustments might have to be made
the file name without the extension faceplate can connect to an external from the portable device if the
(such as .mp3) as the track name. audio device such as an iPod®, volume is not loud or soft enough.
Track names longer than MP3 player, or CD player, for use as BAND: Press to listen to the radio
32 characters or four pages are another source for audio listening. when a portable audio device is
shortened. Parts of words on the This input jack is not an audio playing. The portable audio device
last page of text and the extension output; do not plug headphones into continues playing.
of the file name do not display. the front auxiliary input jack.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
To use a portable audio player, play a CD when a portable audio
Preprogrammed Playlists connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to device is playing. Press again and
Preprogrammed playlists created by the radio's front auxiliary input jack. the system begins playing audio
WinAmp, MusicMatch, or Real When a device is connected, press from the connected portable audio
Jukebox software can be accessed; the radio CD/AUX button to begin player. If a portable audio player is
however, they cannot be edited playing audio from the device over not connected, No Input Device
using the radio. These playlists are the vehicle speakers. Found displays.
treated as special folders containing For optimal sound quality, increase
compressed audio song files. the portable audio device's volume
to the loudest level.
It is always best to power the
portable audio device through its
own battery while playing.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Using the USB Port

. Portable USB Hard Drives . Up to 65,535 files.
. Fifth generation or later iPod . Folder and file names up to
. iPod nano ® 64 bytes.
. iPod touch®
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file
extension.
. iPod classic® . AAC files stored on an iPod.
Not all iPods and USB drives are
compatible with the USB port.
. FAT16.
Make sure the iPod has the latest

. FAT32.
firmware from Apple® for proper Connecting a USB Storage
operation. iPod firmware Device or iPod
can be updated using the latest
iTunes® application. See The USB port can be used to
www.apple.com/itunes. control an iPod or a USB storage
Radios with a USB port can control device.
a USB storage device or an iPod For help with identifying your iPod,
using the radio buttons and knobs. go to www.apple.com/support. To connect a USB storage device,
The USB port is in the center connect the device to the USB port
Radios that have a USB port can in the center console or on the
console.
play .mp3 and .wma files stored on a instrument panel.
USB Support USB storage device as well as AAC
files stored on an iPod. To connect an iPod, connect one
The USB connector is in the center end of the USB cable that came
console, and uses the USB 2.0 USB Supported File and Folder with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
standard. Structure connector and connect the other
USB Supported Devices The radio supports: end to the USB port in the center
console. If the vehicle is on and the
. USB Flash Drives . Up to 700 folders. USB connection works, OK to
. Up to eight folders in depth. disconnect and a GM logo may
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
appear on the iPod and iPod f (Tune): Turn to select files. Using Softkeys to Control a
appears on the radio display. The USB Storage Device or iPod
iPod music appears on the radio’s © SEEK: Press to go to the start of
display and begins playing. the track, if more than 10 seconds The six softkeys below the radio
have played. Press and hold or display are used to control the
The iPod charges while it is press multiple times to continue functions listed below.
connected to the vehicle if the moving backward through tracks.
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY To use the softkeys:
or ON/RUN position. When the ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next 1. Press the first or fifth softkey
vehicle is turned off, the iPod track. Press and hold or press below the radio display to
automatically powers off and will not multiple times to continue moving display the functions listed
charge or draw power from the forward through tracks. below, or press the softkey
vehicle's battery. s REV (Reverse): Press and hold below the function if it is
If you have an older iPod model that to reverse playback quickly. Sound currently displayed.
is not supported, it can still be used is heard at a reduced volume. 2. Press the softkey below the tab
by connecting it to the auxiliary Release s REV to resume playing. with the function on it to use that
input jack using a standard 3.5 mm The elapsed time of the file function.
(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the displays.
Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
j (Pause): Press the softkey below
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press j to pause the track. The tab
information. and hold to advance playback appears raised when pause is being
Using the Radio to Control a quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced used. Press the softkey below j
USB Storage Device or iPod volume. Release \ FWD to again to resume playback.
resume playing. The elapsed time of
The radio can control a USB Back: Press the softkey below the
the file displays.
storage device or an iPod using the radio display to go back to the main
radio buttons and knobs, and 4 (Information): Press to display display screen on an iPod, or the
display song information on the additional information about the root directory on a USB storage
radio’s display. selected track. device.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14

. Third softkey, 5% through the list
c (Folder View): Press the each time the softkey is pressed.
3. Press f to select the
softkey below c to view the desired menu.
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
contents of the current folder on the 4. Turn f to scroll through the
USB drive. To browse and select list each time the softkey is
pressed. folders or files in the
files:
selected menu.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
1. Press the softkey below c. 5. Press f to select the desired file
h (Music Navigator): Press the
2. Turn f to scroll through the list softkey below h to view and
to be played.
of folders. select a file on an iPod, using the To skip through large lists, the five
3. Press f to select the desired iPod's menu system. Files are softkeys can be used to navigate in
sorted by: the following order:
folder. If there is more then one
folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until . Playlists . First softkey, first item in the list.
the desired folder is reached. . . Second softkey, 1% through the
Artists
4. Turn f to scroll through the files list each time the softkey is
. Albums pressed.
in the selected folder. . Genres . Third softkey, 5% through the list
5. Press f to select the desired file . Songs each time the softkey is pressed.
to be played.
. Composers . Fourth softkey, 10% through the
To skip through large lists, the five list each time the softkey is
softkeys can be used to navigate in To select files:
pressed.
the following order: 1. Press the softkey below h. . Fifth softkey, end of the list.
. First softkey, first item in the list.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list
. Second softkey, 1% through the of menus.
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Repeat Functionality > (Shuffle Off): Press the Phone

To use Repeat: softkey below 2 to turn shuffle
Press the softkey below " or '
off. This is the default mode when a Bluetooth
USB storage device or iPod is first
to select between Repeat All and connected. For vehicles equipped with
Repeat Track. Bluetooth capability, the system can
2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle interact with many cell phones,
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey Songs): Press the softkey below allowing:
below " to repeat all tracks. The = or C to shuffle all songs on
tab appears lowered when Repeat the USB storage device or iPod.
. Placement and receipt of calls in
All is being used. This is the default a hands-free mode.
mode when a USB storage device
C (Shuffle Album): Press the . Sharing of the cell phone’s
or iPod is first connected. softkey below > to shuffle all address book or contact list with
songs in the current album on the vehicle.
' (Repeat Track): Press the an iPod.
softkey below ' to repeat one To minimize driver distraction,
track. The tab appears raised when
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the before driving, and with the vehicle
Repeat Track is being used. softkey below > to shuffle all parked:
songs in the current folder on a USB
Shuffle Functionality
. Become familiar with the
storage device.
features of the cell phone.
To use Shuffle: Organize the phone book and
Press the softkey below >, 2, contact lists clearly and delete
duplicate or rarely used entries.
C, or = to select between If possible, program speed dial
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/
or other shortcuts.
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,
or Shuffle Folder. . Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
system.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. Not all phones support all functions, Audio System
The system may not work with and not all phones work with the
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
this section for more information. system, sound comes through the
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
vehicle's front audio system
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone information on compatible phones.
speakers and overrides the audio
Numbers” in this section for Voice Recognition system. Use the audio system
more information. volume knob, during a call, to
The Bluetooth system uses voice change the volume level. The
{ Warning recognition to interpret voice
commands to dial phone numbers
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent
When using a cell phone, it can and name tags. missed calls, a minimum volume
be distracting to look too long or For additional information, say level is used if the volume is turned
too often at the screen of the “Help” while you are in a voice down too low.
phone or the infotainment system. recognition menu.
Taking your eyes off the road too Bluetooth Controls
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
long or too often could cause a a minimum. The system may not Use the buttons on the steering
crash resulting in injury or death. recognize voice commands if there wheel to operate the in-vehicle
Focus your attention on driving. is too much background noise. Bluetooth system. See Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5-2.
When to Speak: A short tone
A Bluetooth system can use a sounds after the system responds J / 0 (Call/Mute): Press to answer
Bluetooth-capable cell phone with a indicating when it is waiting for a incoming calls, confirm system
Hands-Free Profile to make and voice command. Wait until the tone information, and start speech
receive phone calls. The system and then speak. recognition.
can be used while the key is in the K (End Call): Press to end a call,
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice. reject a call, or cancel an operation.
position. The range of the Bluetooth
system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Pairing
. Only one paired cell phone can 5. Locate the device named “Your
be connected to the Bluetooth Vehicle” in the list on the cell
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone system at a time. phone. Follow the instructions
must be paired to the Bluetooth . If multiple paired cell phones are on the cell phone to enter the
system and then connected to the
within range of the system, the PIN provided in Step 3. After the
vehicle before it can be used. See
system connects to the first PIN is successfully entered, the
the cell phone manufacturer's user
available paired cell phone in the system prompts you to provide a
guide for Bluetooth functions before
order that they were first paired name for the paired cell phone.
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
to the system. To connect to a This name will be used to
phone is not connected, calls will be
different paired phone, see indicate which phones are
made using OnStar Hands-Free
“Connecting to a Different paired and connected to the
Calling, if equipped. See OnStar (if
Phone” later in this section. vehicle. The system responds
equipped).
with “<phone name> has been
Pairing Information Pairing a Phone successfully paired” after the
1. Press and hold J / 0 for pairing process is complete.
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability cannot be paired to two seconds. 6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pair
the vehicle as a phone and an additional phones.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
MP3 player at the same time. can be skipped. Listing All Paired and Connected
. Up to five cell phones can be 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds Phones
paired to the Bluetooth system. with instructions and a four-digit The system can list all cell phones
. The pairing process is disabled Personal Identification Number paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
when the vehicle is moving. (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. also connected to the vehicle, the
. Pairing only needs to be 4. Start the pairing process on the system responds with “is connected”
completed once, unless the cell phone that you want to pair. after that phone name.
pairing information on the cell For help with this process, see 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
phone changes or the cell phone the cell phone manufacturer's two seconds.
is deleted from the system. user guide.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
2. Say “Bluetooth.” 1. Press and hold J / 0 for Digit Store: This command allows
3. Say “List.” two seconds. a phone number to be stored as a
name tag by entering the digits one
Deleting a Paired Phone 2. Say “Bluetooth.” at a time.
If the phone name you want to 3. Say “Change phone.” Delete: This command is used to
delete is unknown, see “Listing All . If another cell phone is delete individual name tags.
Paired and Connected Phones.” found, the response will be Delete All Name Tags: This
“<Phone name> is now
1. Press and hold J / 0 for connected.”
command deletes all stored name
two seconds. tags in the Hands-Free Calling
. If another cell phone is not Directory and the OnStar
2. Say “Bluetooth.” found, the original phone Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks remains connected. if equipped.
which phone to delete. Using the “Store” Command
Storing and Deleting Phone
4. Say the name of the phone you Numbers
want to delete. 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
The system can store up to two seconds.
Connecting to a Different Phone 30 phone numbers as name tags in 2. Say “Store.”
To connect to a different cell phone, the Hands-Free Directory that is
the Bluetooth system looks for the shared between the Bluetooth and 3. Say the phone number or group
next available cell phone in the OnStar systems, if equipped. of numbers you want to store all
order in which all available cell at once with no pauses, then
The following commands are used follow the directions given by the
phones were paired. Depending on to delete and store phone numbers.
which cell phone you want to system to save a name tag for
connect to, you may have to use Store: This command will store a this number.
this command several times. phone number, or a group of
numbers as a name tag.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Using the “Digit Store” Command 3. Say the name tag you want to Making a Call
If an unwanted number is delete.
Calls can be made using the
recognized by the system, say Using the “Delete All Name Tags” following commands.
“Clear” at any time to clear the last Command Dial or Call: The dial or call
number.
This command deletes all stored command can be used
To hear all of the numbers name tags in the Hands-Free interchangeably to dial a phone
recognized by the system, say Calling Directory and the OnStar number or a stored name tag.
“Verify” at any time. Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory, Digit Dial: This command allows a
if equipped.
1. Press and hold J / 0 for phone number to be dialed by
two seconds. To delete all name tags: entering the digits one at a time.
2. Say “Digit Store.” 1. Press and hold J / 0 for Re-dial: This command is used to
two seconds. dial the last number used on the cell
3. Say each digit, one at a time, phone.
that you want to store. After 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
each digit is entered, the system Using the “Dial” or “Call”
repeats back the digit it heard Listing Stored Numbers Command
followed by a tone. After the last The list command will list all stored
digit has been entered, say 1. Press and hold J / 0 for
numbers and name tags. two seconds.
“Store,” and then follow the
directions given by the system to Using the “List” Command 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
save a name tag for this number. 1. Press and hold J / 0 for 3. Say the entire number without
Using the “Delete” Command two seconds. pausing, or say the name tag.
1. Press and hold J / 0 for 2. Say “Directory.” Once connected, the person called
two seconds. 3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.” will be heard through the audio
speakers.
2. Say “Delete.” 4. Say “List.”
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Calling 911 Emergency To hear all of the numbers Receiving a Call

recognized by the system, say
1. Press and hold J / 0 for “Verify” at any time.
When an incoming call is received,
two seconds. the audio system mutes and a ring
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
1. Press and hold J / 0 for tone is heard in the vehicle.
two seconds.
3. Say “911.”
. Press J / 0 to answer the call.
2. Say “Digit Dial.”
4. Say “Dial” or “Call.” . Press K to ignore a call.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
Once connected, the person called that you want to dial. After each Call Waiting
will be heard through the audio digit is entered, the system
speakers. Call waiting must be supported on
repeats back the digit it heard
the cell phone and enabled by the
Using the “Digit Dial” Command followed by a tone. After the last
wireless service carrier.
digit has been entered,
The digit dial command allows a say “Dial.” . Press J / 0 to answer an
phone number to be dialed by incoming call when another call
entering the digits one at a time. Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio is active. The original call is
After each digit is entered, the placed on hold.
system repeats back the digit it speakers.
heard followed by a tone. Using the “Re-dial” Command . Press J / 0 again to return to
If an unwanted number is the original call.
1. Press and hold J / 0 for
recognized by the system, say two seconds.
. To ignore the incoming call, no
“Clear” at any time to clear the last action is required.
number. 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”
. Press K to disconnect the
Once connected, the person called
current call and switch to the call
will be heard through the audio
on hold.
speakers.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Three-Way Calling . To cancel mute, press J / 0, and does not transfer to the vehicle, use
then say “Un-mute call.” the audio transfer feature on the cell
Three-way calling must be
phone. See your cell phone
supported on the cell phone and Transferring a Call manufacturer's user guide for more
enabled by the wireless service
Audio can be transferred between information.
carrier.
the Bluetooth system and the cell
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
1. While on a call, press J / 0. phone.
(DTMF) Tones
2. Say “Three-way call.” The cell phone must be paired and
connected with the Bluetooth The Bluetooth system can send
3. Use the dial or call command to numbers and the numbers stored as
system before a call can be
dial the number of the third party name tags during a call. You can
transferred. The connection process
to be called. use this feature when calling a
can take up to two minutes after the
4. Once the call is connected, ignition is turned to ON/RUN. menu-driven phone system.
Account numbers can also be
press J / 0 to link all callers Transferring Audio from the stored for use.
together. Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Sending a Number or Name Tag
Ending a Call During a call with the audio in the During a Call
vehicle:
Press K to end a call. 1. Press J / 0. The system
1. Press J / 0. responds “Ready,” followed by
Muting a Call
2. Say “Transfer Call.” a tone.
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the Transferring Audio to the 2. Say “Dial.”
person on the other end of the call Bluetooth System from a Cell 3. Say the number or name tag
cannot hear them. Phone to send.
. To mute a call, press J / 0, and During a call with the audio on the
then say “Mute call.” cell phone, press J / 0. The audio
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Clearing the System Other Information

Unless information is deleted out of The Bluetooth® word mark and
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
will be retained indefinitely. This SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
includes all saved name tags in the by General Motors is under license.
phone book and phone pairing Other trademarks and trade names
information. For information on how are those of their respective owners.
to delete this information, see the See Radio Frequency Statement on
previous section “Deleting a Paired page 13-12.
Phone” and the previous sections
on deleting name tags.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate control
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 system functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless
Automatic Climate Control Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-2.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
1. Fan Control 7. Driver and Passenger Heated

2. Outside Air Seats (If Equipped)
3. Temperature Control 8. Rear Window Defogger
4. Recirculation 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise

or counterclockwise to increase or
5. Air Delivery Mode Control decrease the fan speed. To turn the
6. Air Conditioning fan off, turn the knob all the way
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
8-2 Climate Controls
counterclockwise. In any setting When this mode is selected, the For best results, clear all snow and
other than off, the fan runs system turns the recirculation mode ice from the windshield before
continuously with the ignition on. off. Recirculation mode cannot be defrosting.
There will be some airflow selected while in floor mode. This # (Air Conditioning): Press to
noticeable from the various outlets helps prevent window fogging. turn the air conditioning system on
when driving, even with the fan in - (Defog): Clears the windows of or off. An indicator light comes on to
the off position. To turn off the air fog or moisture. Air is directed to the show that the air conditioning is on.
completely, turn the fan to 9 and floor outlets, with some air directed The air conditioning can be selected
select the @ button. to the windshield and side window in any mode as long as the fan is on
Temperature Control: Turn outlets. In this mode, the system and the outside temperature is
clockwise or counterclockwise to turns the recirculation mode off and above freezing. A flashing indicator
increase or decrease the runs the air conditioning compressor light indicates that the air
temperature inside the vehicle. unless the outside air is at or below conditioning compressor is currently
freezing. Recirculation mode cannot not available.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn be selected while in defog mode.
clockwise or counterclockwise to On hot days, open the windows to
This helps prevent window fogging. let hot inside air escape; then close
change the current airflow mode.
0 (Defrost): Removes fog or frost them. This helps reduce the time it
Select from the following air delivery from the windshield more quickly. takes for the vehicle to cool down
modes: Air is directed to the windshield and and helps the system to operate
H (Vent): Air is directed to the the side window outlets. In this more efficiently.
instrument panel outlets. mode, the system turns the For quick cool down on hot days,
recirculation mode off automatically select the following settings
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided and runs the air conditioning
between the instrument panel and together:
compressor unless the outside air is
the floor outlets. at or below freezing. Recirculation 1. Select H mode.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the mode cannot be selected while in
floor outlets with some air directed defrost mode. This helps prevent 2. Select 8.
to the windshield. window fogging.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
3. Turn the # on. air mode can be used with all prevent window fogging and
modes, but it cannot be used with moisture building up inside the
4. Select the coolest temperature the recirculation mode. Pressing this vehicle.
and highest fan speed. button will cancel the
recirculation mode. Rear Window Defogger
5. Once the vehicle's interior
temperature is below the outside @ (Recirculation): Press to turn The rear window defogger uses a
temperature, select recirculation on the recirculation mode. An warming grid to remove fog from the
mode for enhanced cooling. indicator light comes on to show rear window.
Using these settings together for that recirculation is on. This mode The rear window defogger only
long periods of time may cause the recirculates and helps to quickly works when the ignition is in
air inside the vehicle to become too cool or heat the air inside the ON/RUN.
dry. To prevent this from happening, vehicle. It can be used to prevent
1 (Rear Window Defogger):
after the air inside of the vehicle has outside air and odors from entering
Press to turn the rear window
cooled, turn the recirculation the vehicle. Avoid using the
defogger on or off. An indicator light
mode off. recirculation mode during high
on the button comes on to show that
periods of humidity and cool outside
The air conditioning system the rear window is activated.
temperatures since this may result
removes moisture from the air, so a in increased window fogging. The rear window defogger stays on
small amount of water might drip If window fogging is experienced, for approximately 10 minutes after
under the vehicle while idling or select the defrost mode. the button is pressed, unless the
after turning off the engine. This is ignition is turned to ACC/
normal. Recirculation mode is not available
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
in floor, defog, or defrost modes and
8 (Outside Air): Press to turn will shut off automatically and
If turned on again, the defogger only
the outside air mode on. An runs for approximately five minutes
change to outside air. The indicator
indicator light comes on to show before turning off again. At higher
will flash if the button is selected in
that outside air is on. Air from vehicle speeds, the defogger may
any of these modes. This helps
outside the vehicle will circulate
throughout the vehicle. The outside
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
stay on continuously. The defogger Remote Start Climate Control

can also be turned off by turning off Operation
the engine. For vehicles with the remote start
feature, when it is activated, the
{ Caution climate control system heats and
cools the inside of the vehicle using
Using a razor blade or sharp the modes that were set before the
object on the inside rear window vehicle was turned off.
can damage the antenna or
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not stick anything to the rear
window.
L or M (Heated Front Seats, If

Equipped): Press to heat the driver
or passenger seat cushion and
seatback. To turn off, press the
button until the indicator lights turn
off. See Heated Front Seats on
page 3-6.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Automatic Climate Control System not cover the sensor on the top of
the instrument panel near the
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with windshield, or the sensor grille
this system. If equipped with remote start, the climate control system below the climate control faceplate.
functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote Keyless Entry These two sensors help regulate the
(RKE) System Operation on page 2-2. inside air temperature.
AUTO (Automatic Fan): Turn the
fan knob to AUTO for the system to
automatically adjust the fan speed
to reach the desired inside
temperature.
Temperature Control: Select the
desired cabin air temperature
between 16-32°C (60-90°F).
Choosing the coldest or warmest
temperature setting does not cause
the system to heat or cool any
faster.
AUTO (Automatic Air Delivery
1. Fan Control 7. Driver and Passenger Heated Mode): Turn the air delivery mode
2. Outside Air Seats (If Equipped) knob to AUTO for the system to
8. Rear Window Defogger automatically control the direction of
3. Temperature Control
the airflow to help reach the desired
4. Recirculation Automatic Operation inside temperature.
5. Air Delivery Mode Control This climate control system The system automatically controls
automatically maintains the desired the air inlet to supply the outside air
6. Air Conditioning temperature inside the vehicle. Do or recirculated inside air needed to
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
heat or cool the vehicle faster. The fan off, turn the left knob to the 9 Select from the following air delivery
@ button indicator light is lit position. In any setting other than modes:
whenever the recirculation mode off, the fan runs continuously with H (Vent): Air is directed to the
is on. the ignition on. The fan must be instrument panel outlets.
Press the 8 button to change to turned on to run the air conditioning
compressor. There will be some ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
outside air. However, the between the instrument panel
recirculation mode may turn back on airflow noticeable from the various
outlets when driving, even with the outlets and the floor outlets.
automatically.
fan in the off position. To turn off the 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
In cold weather, if the fan and air air completely, turn the fan to 9 floor outlets with some air directed
delivery modes are in automatic, the and select the @ button. to the windshield.
system starts at lower fan speeds to
avoid directing cold air into the Temperature Control: Turn When this mode is selected, the
vehicle until warmer air is available. clockwise or counterclockwise to system turns the recirculation mode
increase or decrease the off. Recirculation mode cannot be
The climate control system directs
temperature. Select the desired selected while in floor mode. This is
air to the floor, but may
automatically change modes as the cabin air temperature between to help prevent window fogging.
vehicle warms up to maintain the 16-32°C (60-90°F). Typically, the - (Defog): Clears the windows of
chosen temperature setting. The best setting is near 23°C (75°F). fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
length of time needed to warm the Choosing the coldest or warmest floor outlets, with some air directed
interior depends on the outside temperature setting does not cause to the windshield and side window
temperature and inside temperature the system to heat or cool any outlets. In this mode, the system
of the vehicle. faster. turns the recirculation mode off and
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn runs the air conditioning compressor
Manual Operation unless the outside air is at or below
clockwise or counterclockwise to
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise change the current airflow mode. freezing. Recirculation mode cannot
or counterclockwise to increase or be selected while in defog mode.
decrease the fan speed. To turn the This helps prevent window fogging.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
0 (Defrost): Removes fog or frost On hot days, use the automatic fan @ (Recirculation): Press to turn
from the windshield more quickly. and automatic air delivery mode on the recirculation mode. An
Air is directed to the windshield and settings and the vehicle will reach indicator light comes on to show
the side window outlets. In this the desired temperature more that recirculation is on. This mode
mode, the system turns the quickly. The desired fan and air recirculates and helps to quickly
recirculation mode off automatically delivery mode settings can still be cool or heat the air inside the
and runs the air conditioning adjusted manually. Open the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
compressor unless the outside air is windows to let the hot inside air outside air and odors from entering
at or below freezing. Recirculation escape, then close them. This helps the vehicle. Avoid using the
mode cannot be selected while in reduce the time it takes for the recirculation mode during high
defrost mode. This helps prevent vehicle to cool down and helps the periods of humidity and cool outside
window fogging. system to operate more efficiently. temperatures since this may result
For best results, clear all snow and The air conditioning system in increased window fogging.
ice from the windshield before removes moisture from the air, so a If window fogging is experienced,
defrosting. small amount of water might drip select the defrost mode.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to under the vehicle while idling or Recirculation mode is not available
turn the air conditioning system on after turning off the engine. in floor, defog, or defrost modes and
or off. An indicator light comes on to 8 (Outside Air): Press to turn will shut off automatically and
show that the air conditioning is on. the outside air mode on. An change to outside air. If the button is
The air conditioning can be selected indicator light comes on to show selected in any of these modes, the
in any mode as long as the fan is on that outside air is on. Air from indicator will flash. This helps
and the outside temperature is outside the vehicle will circulate prevent window fogging and
above freezing. A flashing indicator throughout the vehicle. The outside moisture building up inside the
light indicates that the air air mode can be used with all vehicle.
conditioning compressor is currently modes, but it cannot be used with
not available. the recirculation mode. Pressing this
button will cancel the
recirculation mode.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Rear Window Defogger Air Vents

The rear window defogger uses a
{ Caution
Move the louvers on the air outlets
warming grid to remove fog from the Using a razor blade or sharp up or down to change the direction
rear window. object on the inside rear window of the airflow. The louvers do
The rear window defogger only can damage the antenna or not turn.
works when the ignition is in defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use the thumbwheels near each
ON/RUN. vent to open and close off the
Do not stick anything to the rear
1 (Rear Window Defogger): airflow.
window.
Press to turn the rear window
Operation Tips
defogger on or off. An indicator light
on the button comes on to show that L or M (Heated Front Seats, If . Clear away any ice, snow,
it is activated. Equipped): Press to heat the driver or leaves from the air inlets at
or passenger seat cushion and the base of the vehicle that may
The rear window defogger stays on
seatback. To turn off, press the block the flow of air into the
for approximately 10 minutes after
button until the indicator lights turn vehicle.
the button is pressed, unless the
ignition is turned to ACC/ off. See Heated Front Seats on . Do not use any non-GM
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. page 3-6. approved hood deflectors that
If turned on again, the defogger only Remote Start Climate Control could adversely affect the
runs for approximately five minutes Operation performance of the system.
before turning off. At higher vehicle . Keep the path under the front
speeds, the defogger may stay on If equipped with the remote start
feature, when it is activated, the seats clear of objects to help
continuously. The defogger can also circulate the air inside of the
be turned off by turning off the climate control system heats and
cools the inside of the vehicle using vehicle more effectively.
engine.
the modes that were set before the . Do not insert objects into the air
vehicle was turned off. outlets. This may affect the
operation of the outlet.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-2 for replacement intervals. 1. Remove the four screws from 3. Unplug both wire cables and
To find out what type of filter to use, around the glove box and detach remove the glove box.
see Maintenance Replacement the three inner clips from the
Parts on page 11-13. glove box.
The passenger compartment air 2. Lower the loosened glove box
filter can be accessed by removing housing.
the entire glove box.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
4. Remove the air filter cover

screw.
5. Remove the filter cover and pull

out the old air filter.
6. Install the new air filter.
7. Reinstall the air filter cover.
Reconnect the wire cabling and
reinstall the glove box.
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Driver Assistance Systems

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Operating Parking over Things Rear Vision
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Driving Information Engine Exhaust Fuel
Driver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Driving Environment . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Running the Vehicle While California Fuel
Vehicle Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-37
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Automatic Transmission Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-21 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Filling a Portable Fuel
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Drive Systems Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Trailer Towing
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Brakes General Towing
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7 Antilock Brake Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Driving Characteristics and
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Ride Control Systems Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Starting and Operating Traction Control/Electronic
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Conversions and Add-Ons
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Add-On Electrical
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Cruise Control Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Retained Accessory Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
9-2 Driving and Operating
Driving Information Driving Environment A utility vehicle does not handle the
same as a vehicle with a lower
Be prepared for driving in inclement center of gravity, like a car, in similar
Driver Behavior weather, at night, or during other situations.
Driving is an important times where visibility or traction may
be limited, such as on curves, Safe driver behavior and
responsibility. Driver behavior, the understanding of the environment
driving environment, and the slippery roads, or hilly terrain.
Unfamiliar surroundings can also can help avoid a rollover crash in
vehicle's design all affect how well a any type of vehicle, including utility
vehicle performs. have hidden hazards.
vehicles.
Being aware of these factors can Learn more about driving in different
help in understanding how the conditions and off-road driving in Distracted Driving
vehicle handles and what can be this section.
Distraction comes in many forms
done to avoid many types of
Vehicle Design and can take your focus from the
crashes, including a rollover crash.
task of driving. Exercise good
Most serious injuries and fatalities to Utility vehicles have a significantly judgment and do not let other
unbelted occupants can be reduced higher rollover rate than other types activities divert your attention away
or prevented by the use of safety of vehicles. This is because they from the road. Many local
belts. In a rollover crash, an have a higher ground clearance and governments have enacted laws
unbelted person is significantly a narrower track or shorter regarding driver distraction. Become
more likely to die than a person wheelbase than passenger cars, familiar with the local laws in
wearing a safety belt. In addition, which makes them more capable for your area.
avoiding excessive speed, sudden off-road driving. While these design
or abrupt turns, and drunken or characteristics provide the driver
aggressive driving can help make with a better view of the road, these
trips safer and avoid the possibility vehicles do have a higher center of
of a crash. gravity than other types of vehicles.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14

. Wait until the vehicle is parked
To avoid distracted driving, always
to retrieve items that have fallen
Defensive Driving
keep your eyes on the road, hands
on the wheel, and mind on the drive. to the floor. Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
. Do not use a phone in
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend
step in driving defensively is to wear
demanding driving situations. to children.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
Use a hands-free method to . Keep pets in an appropriate page 3-9.
place or receive necessary carrier or restraint. . Assume that other road users
phone calls. . Avoid stressful conversations (pedestrians, bicyclists, and
. Watch the road. Do not read, while driving, whether with a other drivers) are going to be
take notes, or look up passenger or on a cell phone. careless and make mistakes.
information on phones or other Anticipate what they might do
electronic devices.
{ Warning and be ready.
. Designate a front seat . Allow enough following distance
passenger to handle potential Taking your eyes off the road too between you and the driver in
distractions. long or too often could cause a front of you.
. crash resulting in injury or death.
Become familiar with vehicle . Focus on the task of driving.
features before driving, such as Focus your attention on driving.
programming favorite radio Drunk Driving
stations and adjusting climate Refer to the Infotainment section for
control and seat settings. more information on using that Death and injury associated with
Program all trip information into system, including pairing and using drinking and driving is a global
any navigation device prior to a cell phone. tragedy.
driving.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Braking power brake assist but it will be

{ Warning used when the brake is applied.
Braking action involves perception Once the power assist is used up, it
Drinking and then driving is very time and reaction time. Deciding to can take longer to stop and the
dangerous. Your reflexes, push the brake pedal is perception brake pedal will be harder to push.
perceptions, attentiveness, and time. Actually doing it is
judgment can be affected by even reaction time. Steering
a small amount of alcohol. You Average driver reaction time is
can have a serious — or even about three-quarters of a second. In Hydraulic Power Steering
fatal — collision if you drive after that time, a vehicle moving at This vehicle has hydraulic power
drinking. 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m steering. It may require
Do not drink and drive or ride with (66 ft), which could be a lot of maintenance. See Power Steering
a driver who has been drinking. distance in an emergency. Fluid on page 10-20.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are Helpful braking tips to keep in mind If power steering assist is lost
with a group, designate a driver include: because the engine stops or
who will not drink. . Keep enough distance between because of a system malfunction,
you and the vehicle in front the vehicle can be steered but may
of you. require increased effort. See your
Control of a Vehicle dealer if there is a problem.
Braking, steering, and accelerating
. Avoid needless heavy braking.
are important factors in helping to . Keep pace with traffic. { Caution
control a vehicle while driving. If the engine ever stops while the
If the steering wheel is turned
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the until it reaches the end of its
brakes. Doing so could make the travel, and is held in that position
pedal harder to push down. If the for more than 15 seconds,
engine stops, there will be some (Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14

. Antilock Brake System (ABS) 2. Turn the steering wheel about
Caution (Continued) allows steering while braking. one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
damage may occur to the power Off-Road Recovery pavement edge.
steering system and there may be
loss of power steering assist. 3. Turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Curve Tips Loss of Control

. Take curves at a reasonable
speed. Skidding
. Reduce speed before entering a There are three types of skids that
curve. correspond to the vehicle's three
control systems:
. Maintain a reasonable steady
speed through the curve.
. Braking Skid — wheels are not
rolling.
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
. Steering or Cornering
gently into the straightaway. The vehicle's right wheels can drop Skid — too much speed or
off the edge of a road onto the steering in a curve causes tires
Steering in Emergencies shoulder while driving. Follow to slip and lose cornering force.
these tips: . Acceleration Skid — too much
. There are some situations when
steering around a problem may 1. Ease off the accelerator and throttle causes the driving
be more effective than braking. then, if there is nothing in the wheels to spin.
way, steer the vehicle so that it
. Holding both sides of the
straddles the edge of the
steering wheel allows you to turn
pavement.
180 degrees without removing
a hand.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Defensive drivers avoid most skids

. Try to avoid sudden steering,
by taking reasonable care suited to acceleration, or braking, Warning (Continued)
existing conditions, and by not including reducing vehicle speed
overdriving those conditions. But by shifting to a lower gear. Any After driving through a large
skids are always possible. sudden changes could cause puddle of water or a car/vehicle
the tires to slide. wash, lightly apply the brake
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow pedal until the brakes work
these suggestions: Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid. normally.
. Ease your foot off the Flowing or rushing water creates
accelerator pedal and steer the
way you want the vehicle to go.
Driving on Wet Roads strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause the
The vehicle may straighten out. Rain and wet roads can reduce
Be ready for a second skid if it vehicle traction and affect your vehicle to be carried away. If this
occurs. ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle
Always drive slower in these types occupants could drown. Do not
. Slow down and adjust your ignore police warnings and be
driving according to weather of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and very cautious about trying to drive
conditions. Stopping distance through flowing water.
can be longer and vehicle deep‐standing or flowing water.
control can be affected when
traction is reduced by water, { Warning Hydroplaning
snow, ice, gravel, or other Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
material on the road. Learn to Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a can build up under the vehicle's
recognize warning clues — such tires so they actually ride on the
as enough water, ice, or packed quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could water. This can happen if the road is
snow on the road to make a wet enough and you are going fast
mirrored surface — and slow lose control of the vehicle.
enough. When the vehicle is
down when you have any doubt. (Continued) hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
There is no hard and fast rule about

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,
hydroplaning. The best advice is to tires, cooling system, and Warning (Continued)
slow down when the road is wet. transmission.
loss of steering. Always have the
. Shift to a lower gear when going
Other Rainy Weather Tips engine running and the vehicle
down steep or long hills.
Besides slowing down, other wet in gear.
weather driving tips include:
.
{ Warning . Stay in your own lane. Do not
Allow extra following distance.
Using the brakes to slow the swing wide or cut across the
. Pass with caution. vehicle on a long downhill slope center of the road. Drive at
. Keep windshield wiping can cause brake overheating, can speeds that let you stay in your
equipment in good shape. reduce brake performance, and own lane.
. Keep the windshield washer fluid could result in a loss of braking. . Be alert on top of hills;
reservoir filled. Shift the transmission to a lower something could be in your lane
gear to let the engine assist the (stalled car, accident).
. Have good tires with proper brakes on a steep downhill slope. . Pay attention to special road
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10-37. signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
. Turn off cruise control.
{ Warning no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Hill and Mountain Roads Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
Driving on steep hills or through or with the ignition off is Winter Driving
mountains is different than driving dangerous. This can cause
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for overheating of the brakes and
Driving on Snow or Ice
driving in these conditions include: (Continued) Drive carefully when there is snow
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in or ice between the tires and the
good shape. road, creating less traction or grip.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C curve or an overpass can remain icy
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to when the surrounding roads are { Warning
fall, resulting in even less traction. clear. Avoid sudden steering
Avoid driving on wet ice or in maneuvers and braking while Snow can trap engine exhaust
freezing rain until roads can be on ice. under the vehicle. This may
treated with salt or sand. cause exhaust gases to get
Turn off cruise control on slippery inside. Engine exhaust contains
Drive with caution, whatever the surfaces. carbon monoxide (CO) which
condition. Accelerate gently so cannot be seen or smelled. It can
traction is not lost. Accelerating too Blizzard Conditions
cause unconsciousness and even
quickly causes the wheels to spin Being stuck in snow can be a death.
and makes the surface under the serious situation. Stay with the
tires slick, so there is even less vehicle unless there is help nearby. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
traction. If possible, use Roadside . Clear away snow from around
Traction Control should be turned Assistance. See Roadside the base of your vehicle,
on. See Traction Control/Electronic Assistance Program on page 13-5. especially any that is blocking
Stability Control on page 9-28. To get help and keep everyone in the exhaust pipe.
the vehicle safe:
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) . Check again from time to
improves vehicle stability during
. Turn on the hazard warning time to be sure snow does
hard stops on slippery roads, but flashers. not collect there.
apply the brakes sooner than when . Tie a red cloth to an outside . Open a window about 5 cm
on dry pavement. See Antilock mirror. (2 in) on the side of the
Brake System (ABS) on page 9-25. vehicle that is away from the
Allow greater following distance on wind to bring in fresh air.
any slippery road and watch for (Continued)
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
If it takes some time for help to

Warning (Continued) arrive, now and then when you run Warning (Continued)
the engine, push the accelerator
. Fully open the air outlets on pedal slightly so the engine runs vehicle can overheat, causing an
or under the instrument faster than the idle speed. This engine compartment fire or other
panel. keeps the battery charged to restart damage. Spin the wheels as little
. Adjust the climate control the vehicle and to signal for help as possible and avoid going
system to a setting that with the headlamps. Do this as little above 56 km/h (35 mph).
circulates the air inside the as possible to save fuel.
vehicle and set the fan speed Rocking the Vehicle to Get
to the highest setting. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck it Out
“Climate Control Systems”.
Slowly and cautiously spin the Turn the steering wheel left and
For more information about wheels to free the vehicle when right to clear the area around the
carbon monoxide, see Engine stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. front wheels. Turn off any traction
Exhaust on page 9-20. system. Shift back and forth
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the between R (Reverse) and a low
To save fuel, run the engine for only traction system off and use the forward gear, spinning the wheels
short periods as needed to warm rocking method. See Traction as little as possible. To prevent
the vehicle and then shut the engine Control/Electronic Stability Control transmission wear, wait until the
off and close the window most of on page 9-28. wheels stop spinning before shifting
the way to save heat. Repeat this gears. Release the accelerator
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
{ Warning pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
cold. Moving about to keep warm If the vehicle's tires spin at high when the transmission is in gear.
also helps. speed, they can explode, and you Slowly spinning the wheels in the
or others could be injured. The forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
(Continued) free the vehicle. If that does not get
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
the vehicle out after a few tries, it Tire and Loading Information
might need to be towed out. If the { Warning Label
vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing the Vehicle on Do not load the vehicle any
page 10-70. heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
Vehicle Load Limits (GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
It is very important to know how Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
much weight the vehicle can This can cause systems to
carry. This weight is called the break and change the way the
vehicle capacity weight and vehicle handles. This could
includes the weight of all cause loss of control and a
occupants, cargo and all crash. Overloading can also
nonfactory-installed options. shorten the life of the vehicle. Label Example
Two labels on the vehicle show
how much weight it may A vehicle specific Tire and
properly carry, the Tire and Loading Information label is
Loading Information label and attached to the vehicle's center
the Certification label. pillar (B-pillar). With the driver
door open, you will find the label
attached near the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
positions (1), and the maximum “Steps for Determining Correct and luggage load capacity is
vehicle capacity weight (2) in Load Limit– 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
kilograms and pounds. 1. Locate the statement "The = 650 lbs.)
The Tire and Loading combined weight of 5. Determine the combined
Information label also shows the occupants and cargo should weight of luggage and cargo
tire size of the original never exceed XXX kg or being loaded on the vehicle.
equipment tires (3) and the XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s That weight may not safely
recommended cold tire inflation placard. exceed the available cargo
pressures (4). For more 2. Determine the combined and luggage load capacity
information on tires and inflation, weight of the driver and calculated in Step 4.
see Tires on page 10-37 and passengers that will be riding 6. If your vehicle will be towing
Tire Pressure on page 10-44. in your vehicle. a trailer, load from your trailer
There is also important loading 3. Subtract the combined will be transferred to your
information on the Certification vehicle. Consult this manual
weight of the driver and
label. It tells you the Gross to determine how this
passengers from XXX kg or
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) reduces the available cargo
XXX lbs.
and the Gross Axle Weight and luggage load capacity of
Rating (GAWR) for the front and 4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle.”
rear axle. See “Certification the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity. See Trailer Towing on page 9-44
Label” later in this section. for important information on
For example, if the "XXX"
amount equals 1400 lbs. and towing a trailer, towing safety
there will be five 150 lb rules and trailering tips.
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight

for Example 1 = 453 kg for Example 2 = 453 kg for Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight 2. Subtract Occupant Weight 2. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
136 kg (300 lbs). 340 kg (750 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
3. Available Occupant and 3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight =
Cargo Weight = 317 kg 113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs).
(700 lbs). Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
seating positions. The combined the weight of the vehicle, all

weight of the driver, passengers, occupants, fuel, and cargo. Warning (Continued)
and cargo should never exceed Never exceed the GVWR for the cause loss of control and a
the vehicle's capacity weight. vehicle, or the Gross Axle crash. Overloading can also
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either shorten the life of the vehicle.
Certification Label
the front or rear axle.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy
load, it should be spread out. { Warning
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this Things inside the vehicle can
section. strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a
{ Warning crash.
Do not load the vehicle any
. Put things in the cargo
heavier than the Gross area of the vehicle. In the
Vehicle Weight Rating cargo area, put them as
Label Example (GVWR), or either the far forward as possible.
maximum front or rear Gross Try to spread the weight
A vehicle specific Certification
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). evenly.
label is attached to the lower
area of the center pillar (B-Pillar) This can cause systems to (Continued)
on the driver side of the vehicle. break and change the way the
The label tells the gross weight vehicle handles. This could
capacity of the vehicle, called (Continued)
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Warning (Continued) Starting and Caution (Continued)

Operating
. Never stack heavier breaking-in guideline every
things, like suitcases, time you get new brake
New Vehicle Break-In linings.
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above . Do not tow a trailer during
the tops of the seats. { Caution break-in. See Trailer Towing
The vehicle does not need an on page 9-44 for the trailer
. Do not leave an towing capabilities of the
unsecured child restraint elaborate break-in. But it will
vehicle and more information.
in the vehicle. perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines: Following break-in, engine speed
. Secure loose items in the and load can be gradually
. Do not drive at any one
vehicle. constant speed, fast or slow, increased.
. Do not leave a seat folded for the first 805 km (500 mi).
down unless needed. Do not make full-throttle
starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
. Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 mi) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Ignition Positions The steering can bind with the

{ Caution wheels turned off center. If this
happens, move the steering wheel
Using a tool to force the key to from right to left while turning the
turn in the ignition could cause key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
damage to the switch or break the does not work, the vehicle needs
key. Use the correct key, make service.
sure it is all the way in, and turn it
only with your hand. If the key Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
cannot be turned by hand, see
loss of power assist in the brake
your dealer.
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
LOCK (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ If the vehicle must be shut off in an
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is emergency:
stopped, turn the ignition switch to
The ignition switch has four different 1. Brake using a firm and steady
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
positions. pressure. Do not pump the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
To shift out of P (Park), turn the will remain active. See Retained brakes repeatedly. This may
ignition to ON/RUN or ACC/ Accessory Power (RAP) on deplete power assist, requiring
ACCESSORY and apply the regular page 9-17. increased brake pedal force.
brake pedal. 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
This position locks the ignition.
It also locks the steering wheel and This can be done while the
the transmission. The key can only vehicle is moving. After shifting
be removed in LOCK/OFF. The shift to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the brakes and steer the vehicle to a
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF. safe location.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
3. Come to a complete stop, shift ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is START: This is the position that
to P (Park), and turn the ignition the position in which you can starts the engine. When the engine
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with operate some electrical accessories starts, release the key. The ignition
an automatic transmission, the or items plugged into the accessory switch returns to ON/RUN for
shift lever must be in P (Park) to power outlets. driving.
turn the ignition switch to the Use this position if the vehicle must A warning tone will sound when the
LOCK/OFF position. be pushed or towed. driver door is opened, the ignition is
4. Set the parking brake. See ON (ON/RUN): This position can in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
Parking Brake on page 9-26 be used to operate the electrical OFF, and the key is in the ignition.
accessories and to display some
{ Warning instrument cluster warning and Starting the Engine
indicator lights. This position can Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
Turning off the vehicle while also be used for service and N (Neutral). To restart the engine
moving may cause loss of power diagnostics, and to verify the proper when the vehicle is already moving,
assist in the brake and steering operation of the malfunction use N (Neutral) only.
systems and disable the airbags. indicator lamp as may be required
While driving, only shut the for emission inspection purposes.
vehicle off in an emergency. The switch stays in this position { Caution
when the engine is running. The If you add electrical parts or
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, transmission is also unlocked in this accessories, you could change
and must be shut off while driving, position. If you leave the key in the the way the engine operates. Any
turn the ignition to ACC/ ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
resulting damage would not be
ACCESSORY. positions with the engine off, the
covered by the vehicle warranty.
battery could be drained. You may
not be able to start the vehicle if the See Add-On Electrical Equipment
battery is allowed to drain for an on page 9-47.
extended period of time.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
after starting it. Allow the oil to down. When the engine starts,
{ Caution warm up and lubricate all let go of the key and accelerator.
moving parts. If the vehicle starts briefly but
Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the then stops again, repeat these
vehicle is moving. If you do, you
could damage the transmission. { Caution steps. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not
Shift to P (Park) only when the Cranking the engine for long race the engine immediately
vehicle is stopped. periods of time, by returning the after starting it. Operate the
ignition to the START position engine and transmission gently
immediately after cranking has until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
{ Caution ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
If the steering wheel is turned battery. Wait at least 15 seconds Retained Accessory
until it reaches the end of its between each try, to let the Power (RAP)
travel, and is held in that position cranking motor cool down.
These vehicle accessories may be
while starting the vehicle, damage used for up to 10 minutes after the
may occur to the hydraulic power 2. If the engine does not start after ignition key is turned to the LOCK
steering system and there may be five to 10 seconds, especially in position:
loss of power steering assist. very cold weather (below −18°C . Outside Mirror
or 0°F), it could be flooded with
Starting Procedure too much gasoline. Try pushing . Power Windows
the accelerator pedal all the way . Sunroof (if equipped)
1. With your foot off the accelerator to the floor and holding it there
pedal, turn the ignition to START. as you hold the key in START
. Radio
When the engine starts, let go of for up to a maximum of The outside mirror, power windows
the key. The idle speed will slow 15 seconds. Wait at least and sunroof will function until a door
down as the engine warms. Do 15 seconds between each try, to is opened.
not race the engine immediately allow the cranking motor to cool
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
The radio will function until the P (Park), hold the brake pedal down.
driver door is opened. Warning (Continued) Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from P (Park) without
It is dangerous to get out of the
Shifting Into Park vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
first pushing the button. If you can, it
means that the shift lever was not
To shift into P (Park): in P (Park) with the parking brake fully locked into P (Park).
1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
set the parking brake. See Torque Lock
Do not leave the vehicle when the
Parking Brake on page 9-26 for engine is running. If you have left If you are parking on a hill and you
more information. the engine running, the vehicle do not shift into P (Park) properly,
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) can move suddenly. You or others the weight of the vehicle may put
by holding in the button on the could be injured. To be sure the too much force on the parking pawl
shift lever and pushing the lever vehicle will not move, even when in the transmission. You may find it
all the way toward the front of you are on fairly level ground, difficult to pull the shift lever out of
the vehicle. P (Park). This is called “torque lock.”
always set the parking brake and
To prevent torque lock, set the
3. Turn the ignition key to move the shift lever to P (Park).
parking brake and then shift into
LOCK/OFF. See Shifting Into Park on P (Park) properly before you leave
page 9-18. If you are towing a the driver seat. To find out how, see
Leaving the Vehicle With the trailer, see Driving Characteristics Shifting Into Park on page 9-18.
Engine Running and Towing Tips on page 9-40.
Move the shift lever out of P (Park)
{ Warning If you have to leave an automatic
before you release the parking
brake.
transmission vehicle with the engine
It can be dangerous to leave the If torque lock does occur, you may
running, be sure the vehicle is in
vehicle with the engine running. need to have another vehicle push
P (Park) and the parking brake is
It could overheat and catch fire. firmly set before you leave it. After yours a little uphill to take some of
(Continued) you have moved the shift lever into
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
the pressure from the parking pawl To shift out of P (Park): Parking over Things
in the transmission, so you can pull
the shift lever out of P (Park).
1. Apply the brake pedal. That Burn
2. Press the shift lever button.
Shifting out of Park 3. Move the shift lever to the { Warning
The vehicle has an electronic shift desired position. Things that can burn could touch
lock release system. The shift lock If you still are unable to shift out of hot exhaust parts under the
release is designed to: P (Park): vehicle and ignite. Do not park
. Prevent ignition key removal 1. Fully release the shift lever over papers, leaves, dry grass,
unless the shift lever is in button. or other things that can burn.
P (Park) with the shift lever
2. Hold the brake pedal down and
button fully released.
press the shift lever button
. Prevent movement of the shift again.
lever out of P (Park), unless the
3. Move the shift lever to the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
desired position.
ACCESSORY and the regular
brake pedal is applied. If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), consult your
The shift lock release is always
dealer or a professional towing
functional except in the case of an
service.
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Engine Exhaust Warning (Continued)

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
{ Warning . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
It is better not to park with the
engine running.
Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not If the vehicle is left with the engine
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed. running, follow the proper steps to
can cause unconsciousness and be sure the vehicle will not move.
If unusual fumes are detected or
even death. See Shifting Into Park on page 9-18
if it is suspected that exhaust is and Engine Exhaust on page 9-20.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
If parking on a hill and pulling a
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows trailer, see Driving Characteristics
with poor ventilation (parking completely down. and Towing Tips on page 9-40.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Automatic { Warning
the shift lever button before you can
shift from P (Park) when the ignition
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot
shift out of P (Park), ease pressure
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully on the shift lever and push the shift
in P (Park) with the parking brake lever all the way into P (Park) as
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. you maintain brake application.
Do not leave the vehicle when the Then press the shift lever button
engine is running. If you have left and move the shift lever into
the engine running, the vehicle another gear. See Shifting out of
can move suddenly. You or others Park on page 9-19.
could be injured. To be sure the R (Reverse): Use this gear to
vehicle will not move, even when back up.
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and { Caution
move the shift lever to P (Park).
There are several different positions See Shifting Into Park on Shifting to R (Reverse) while the
for the automatic transmission. page 9-18 and Driving vehicle is moving forward could
Characteristics and Towing Tips damage the transmission. The
P (Park): This position locks the
wheels. It is the best position to use on page 9-40. repairs would not be covered by
when starting the engine because the vehicle warranty. Shift to
the vehicle cannot move easily. R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
is stopped.
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. You have to fully apply the
regular brakes first and then press
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
To rock the vehicle back and forth to M (Manual): This position allows
get out of snow, ice, or sand without { Caution you to change gears similar to a
damaging the transmission, see If manual transmission. If equipped,
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-9. Shifting out of P (Park) or see Manual Mode on page 9-22.
N (Neutral) with the engine
N (Neutral): In this position, the running at high speed may
engine does not connect with the damage the transmission. The { Caution
wheels. To restart the engine when repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle is already moving, use Spinning the tires or holding the
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the vehicle in one place on a hill
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
engine is not running at high using only the accelerator pedal
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
speed when shifting the vehicle. may damage the transmission.
being towed.
The repair will not be covered by
{ Warning D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving with the automatic
the vehicle warranty. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When
Shifting into a drive gear while the transmission. It provides the best stopping on a hill, use the brakes
engine is running at high speed is fuel economy. If you need more to hold the vehicle in place.
dangerous. Unless your foot is power for passing, and you are:
firmly on the brake pedal, the . Going less than about 55 km/h
vehicle could move very rapidly.
Manual Mode
(35 mph), push the accelerator
You could lose control and hit pedal about halfway down. Electronic Range Select
people or objects. Do not shift (ERS) Mode
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph),
into a drive gear while the engine push the accelerator all the
is running at high speed. ERS mode allows you to choose the
way down. top-gear limit of the transmission
Downshifting the transmission in and the vehicle's speed while
slippery road conditions could result driving downhill or towing a trailer.
in skidding. See “Skidding” under The vehicle has an electronic shift
Loss of Control on page 9-5. position indicator within the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
instrument panel cluster. When When you shift from D (Drive) to the vehicle, then press the − (Minus)
using the ERS mode a number will M (Manual), the transmission will button to the desired lower gear
display in place of the D (Drive), shift to a pre-determined lower gear range.
indicating the current gear range range. The highest gear available Automatic Engine Grade Braking is
that has been selected. for this pre-determined range is not available when the ERS is
displayed in the DIC. See Driver active. It is available in D (Drive).
Information Center (DIC) on While using the ERS, cruise control
page 5-23. The number displayed in can be used.
the DIC is the highest gear that the
transmission will be allowed to
operate in. This means that all Fuel Economy Mode
gears below that number are The vehicle may have a fuel
available. For example, when economy mode. When engaged,
4 (Fourth) is shown, 1 (First) through fuel economy mode can improve the
4 (Fourth) gears are automatically vehicle's fuel economy.
shifted by the vehicle. The
transmission will not shift into
5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is
used or you shift back into D (Drive).
To use this feature:
While in M (Manual), the
1. Move the shift lever to transmission will prevent shifting to
M (Manual). a lower gear range if the engine
2. Press the plus/minus button speed is too high. You have a brief
located on the shift lever, to period of time to slow the vehicle.
increase or decrease the gear If vehicle speed is not reduced
range available. within the time allowed, the lower
gear range shift will not be
completed. You must further slow
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Pressing the eco button by the shift Do not use fuel economy mode Drive Systems
lever will engage fuel economy while towing.
mode. When activated, the eco light
in the instrument cluster will come All-Wheel Drive
on. See Fuel Economy Light on Vehicles with this feature always
page 5-21. Pressing the button a send engine power to all four
second time will turn fuel economy wheels. It is fully automatic, and
mode off. adjusts itself as needed for road
When fuel economy mode is on: conditions.
. The transmission will upshift When using a compact spare tire on
sooner, and downshift later. an AWD vehicle, the system
automatically detects the compact
. The torque converter will spare and disables AWD. To restore
lock–up sooner, and stay on AWD operation and prevent
longer. excessive wear on the system,
. The gas pedal will be less replace the compact spare with a
sensitive. full-size tire as soon as possible.
See Compact Spare Tire on
. The vehicle’s driving page 10-65.
performance will be more
conservative.
. The vehicle's computers will
more aggressively shut off fuel
to the engine under deceleration.
. The engine idle speed will be
lower.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses the wheels are Using ABS
slowing down. If one of the wheels Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
is about to stop rolling, the computer the brake pedal down firmly and let
electronic braking system that helps
will separately work the brakes at ABS work. You may hear the ABS
prevent a braking skid.
each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
When the vehicle begins to drive the brake pedal pulsate. This is
ABS can change the brake pressure
away, ABS checks itself. normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
A momentary motor or clicking noise
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
might be heard while this test is
you steer around the obstacle while
going on, and it might even be ABS allows you to steer and brake
braking hard.
noticed that the brake pedal moves at the same time. In many
a little. This is normal. As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
If there is a problem with ABS, this close to the vehicle in front of you,
warning light stays on. See Antilock there will not be enough time to
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light apply the brakes if that vehicle
on page 5-18.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Parking Brake Center (DIC) messages. See Brake If the EPB is applied while the
System Messages on page 5-28. In vehicle is in motion, a chime will
case of insufficient electrical power, sound, and the DIC message
the EPB cannot be applied or RELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCH
released. will be displayed. The vehicle will
Before leaving the vehicle, check decelerate as long as the switch is
the parking brake status light to held in the up position. Releasing
insure the parking brake is applied. the EPB switch during deceleration
will release the parking brake. If the
EPB Apply switch is held in the up position until
the vehicle comes to a stop, the
The EPB can be applied any time
EPB will remain applied.
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
applied by momentarily lifting up on If the parking brake status light
the EPB switch. Once fully applied, flashes continuously, the EPB is
the parking brake status light and only partially applied or released,
The vehicle has an Electric Parking
brake system warning light will be or there is a problem with the EPB.
Brake (EPB). The switch for the
on. While the brake is being applied, The DIC message SERVICE
EPB is in the center console. The
the status light will flash until full PARKING BRAKE will be displayed.
EPB can always be activated, even
apply is reached. Once fully applied, If this light flashes continuously,
if the ignition is OFF. To prevent
the DIC message PARK BRAKE release the EPB, and attempt to
draining the battery, avoid repeated
SET will be displayed. If the status apply it again. If this light continues
cycles of the EPB system when the
light does not come on, or remains to flash, do not drive the vehicle.
engine is not running.
flashing, have the vehicle serviced. See your dealer.
The system has a parking brake Do not drive the vehicle if the If the parking brake warning light is
status light and a parking brake parking brake status light is flashing. on, the EPB has detected an error
warning light. See Electric Parking See your dealer. See Electric in another system and is operating
Brake Light on page 5-17. There are Parking Brake Light on page 5-17. with reduced functionality. To apply
also several Driver Information
the EPB when this light is on, lift up
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
on the EPB switch and hold it in the If the parking brake warning light is Automatic EPB Release
up position. Full application of the on, the EPB has detected an error
The EPB will automatically release if
parking brake by the EPB system in another system and is operating
the vehicle is running, placed into
may take a longer period of time with reduced functionality. To
gear and an attempt is made to
than normal when this light is on. release the EPB when this light is
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
Continue to hold the switch until the on, push down on the EPB switch
when the EPB is applied, to
parking brake status light remains and hold it in the down position.
preserve parking brake lining life.
on. If the parking brake warning light EPB release may take a longer
is on, see your dealer. period of time than normal when this For maximum EPB force when
light is on. Continue to hold the towing a trailer or parking on a hill,
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear
switch until the parking brake status pull the EPB switch twice. If you are
wheels should be blocked to
light is off. If the light is on, see your towing a trailer and parking on a hill,
prevent vehicle movement.
dealer. see Driving Characteristics and
EPB Release Towing Tips on page 9-40.
To release the EPB, place the { Caution
ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position, apply and hold Driving with the parking brake on
the brake pedal, and push down can overheat the brake system
momentarily on the EPB switch. and cause premature wear or
If you attempt to release the EPB damage to brake system parts.
without the brake pedal applied, a Make sure that the parking brake
chime will sound, and the DIC is fully released and the brake
message STEP ON BRAKE TO warning light is off before driving.
RELEASE PARK BRAKE will be
displayed. The EPB is released
when the parking brake status light
is off.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Ride Control Systems vehicle wheel brakes to assist the

driver in keeping the vehicle on the
intended path.
Traction Control/
If cruise control is being used and
Electronic Stability traction control or StabiliTrak begins
Control to limit wheel spin, cruise control will
disengage. Cruise control may be The indicator light for both systems
System Operation turned back on when road is in the instrument cluster. This
The vehicle has a Traction Control conditions allow. light will:
System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an Both systems come on . Flash when TCS is limiting
electronic stability control system. automatically when the vehicle is wheel spin.
These systems help limit wheel slip started and begins to move. The
and assist the driver in maintaining
. Flash when StabiliTrak is
systems may be heard or felt while activated.
control, especially on slippery road they are operating or while
conditions. performing diagnostic checks. This
. Turn on and stay on when either
TCS activates if it senses that any is normal and does not mean there system is not working.
of the drive wheels are spinning or is a problem with the vehicle. If either system fails to turn on or to
beginning to lose traction. When this It is recommended to leave both activate, a message displays in the
happens, TCS applies the brakes to systems on for normal driving Driver Information Center (DIC), and
the spinning wheels and reduces conditions, but it may be necessary d comes on and stays on to
engine power to limit wheel spin. to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets indicate that the system is inactive
StabiliTrak activates when the stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. and is not assisting the driver in
vehicle senses a difference between See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on maintaining control. The vehicle is
the intended path and the direction page 9-9 and “Turning the Systems safe to drive, but driving should be
the vehicle is actually traveling. Off and On” later in this section. adjusted accordingly.
StabiliTrak selectively applies
braking pressure to any one of the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
If d comes on and stays on: button. The StabiliTrak Off light g in

{ Caution the instrument cluster turns off. The
1. Stop the vehicle.
Do not repeatedly brake or appropriate message displays in
2. Turn the engine off and wait the DIC.
accelerate heavily when TCS is
15 seconds.
off. The vehicle driveline could be Adding accessories can affect the
3. Start the engine. damaged. vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
Drive the vehicle. If d comes on
page 10-2.
and stays on, the vehicle may need To turn off only TCS, press and
more time to diagnose the problem. release the g button. The Brake Pedal Override
If the condition persists, see your appropriate message displays in the This vehicle has this feature that
dealer. DIC. To turn TCS on again, press limits engine torque when the brake
Turning the Systems Off and release the g button. The pedal is applied. If there is one foot
and On appropriate message displays in on the brake pedal and the other
the DIC. foot on the accelerator, the engine
rpm will only climb to slightly more
If TCS is limiting wheel spin when
than idle speed.
the g button is pressed, the system
will not turn off until the wheels stop This feature is enabled at vehicle
spinning. start. Press and release the TCS/
StabiliTrak button g to disable or
To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,
enable this feature and TCS. The
The button for TCS and StabiliTrak press and hold the g button until appropriate message will display on
is on the instrument panel. the StabiliTrak Off light g comes on the DIC. See Ride Control System
and stays on in the instrument Messages on page 5-32.
cluster. To turn TCS and StabiliTrak
on again, press and release the g
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Cruise Control cruise control will automatically

disengage. See Traction Control/
RES+ (Resume/Accel): If there is
a set speed in memory, move the
With cruise control, the vehicle can Electronic Stability Control on thumbwheel up briefly to resume
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h page 9-28. When road conditions that speed or hold upward to
(25 mph) or more without keeping allow you to safely use it again, accelerate. If cruise control is
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise cruise control can be turned already active, use to increase
control does not work at speeds back on. vehicle speed.
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
If the brakes are applied, the cruise −SET (Set/Coast): Move the
control shuts off. thumbwheel down briefly to set the
{ Warning speed and activate cruise control.
If cruise control is already active,
Cruise control can be dangerous use to decrease speed.
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. Do not use the Setting Cruise Control
cruise control on winding roads or
If the E button is on when not in
in heavy traffic.
use, −SET or RES+ could get
Cruise control can be dangerous bumped and go into cruise when not
on slippery roads. On such roads, desired. Keep the E button off
fast changes in tire traction can when cruise is not being used.
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use 1. Press E to turn the cruise
cruise control on slippery roads. system on. The indicator light on
the button comes on.
E (On/Off): Press to turn the 2. Get up to the speed desired.
If equipped with the StabiliTrak® cruise control on or off. The
feature, the system may begin to indicator light on the button turns on 3. Move the thumbwheel down and
limit wheel spin while you are using or off. release it.
cruise control. If this happens, the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
4. Remove foot from the Increasing Speed While Using Reducing Speed While Using
accelerator. Cruise Control Cruise Control
A green cruise control indicator If the cruise control system is If the cruise control system is
appears on the instrument cluster already activated: already activated:
after cruise control has been set to . Move the thumbwheel up toward . Move the thumbwheel toward
the desired speed. See Instrument RES+ and hold it until the −SET and hold until the desired
Cluster on page 5-9. vehicle accelerates to the lower speed is reached, then
Resuming a Set Speed desired speed, and then release it.
release it. . To slow down in small
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes . To increase vehicle speed in increments, move the
are applied, the cruise control is small increments, move the thumbwheel toward −SET briefly.
disengaged without erasing the set thumbwheel up toward RES+ Each time this is done, the
speed from memory. The indicator briefly and then release it. Each vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
light on the instrument cluster goes time this is done, the vehicle (1 mph) slower.
out when cruise control is no longer goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) The speedometer reading can be
engaged. faster. displayed in either English or metric
Once the vehicle reaches about The speedometer reading can be units. See Instrument Cluster on
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move the displayed in either English or metric page 5-9. The increment value used
thumbwheel up toward RES+ briefly. units. See Instrument Cluster on depends on the units displayed.
The vehicle returns to the previously page 5-9. The increment value used
depends on the units displayed. Passing Another Vehicle While
set speed. Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the
previous set cruise control speed.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
While pressing the accelerator pedal Ending Cruise Control Driver Assistance
or shortly following the release to There are three ways to disengage
override cruise control, briefly the cruise control:
Systems
moving the thumbwheel toward
–SET will result in cruise set to the . Step lightly on the brake pedal; Parking Assist
current vehicle speed. when cruise control disengages,
the indicator light on the If available, the Rear Parking Assist
Using Cruise Control on Hills instrument cluster goes out. (RPA) system assists the driver with
How well the cruise control works parking and avoiding objects while
. Press E to turn off the cruise in R (Reverse). RPA operates at
on hills depends upon the vehicle's
speed, load, and the steepness of control system. speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
the hills. When going up steep hills, . Shift the transmission to The sensors on the rear bumper are
you might have to step on the N (Neutral). used to detect objects up to
accelerator pedal to maintain the 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and
vehicle's speed. When going Erasing Speed Memory at least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground
downhill, you might have to brake or The cruise control set speed is and below liftgate level. Detection
shift to a lower gear to keep your distances may be less during
erased from memory if the E button
speed down. For some vehicles the warmer or humid weather.
is pressed or the ignition is
transmission may automatically turned off.
downshift when going down hills to { Warning
help maintain the vehicle's speed.
If the brake pedal is applied, cruise The parking assist system does
control will disengage. not detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, animals, or objects
below the bumper or that are too
close or too far from the vehicle.
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Turning the System On and Off

. The sensors are covered by
Warning (Continued) frost or ice. Frost or ice can form
The system can be disabled through around and behind the sensors
It is not available at speeds the Driver Information Center (DIC). and may not always be seen;
greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To See “Park Assist” under Driver this can occur after washing the
Information Center (DIC) on vehicle in cold weather. The
prevent injury, death, or vehicle
page 5-23. message may not clear until the
damage, even with parking assist,
always check the area around the Turn off RPA when towing a trailer. frost or ice has melted.
vehicle and check all mirrors RPA defaults to the on setting each . A trailer was attached to the
before backing. time the vehicle is started. vehicle, or an object was
hanging out of the liftgate during
When the System Does Not the last drive cycle. Once the
How the System Works Seem to Work Properly object is removed, RPA will
RPA comes on automatically when The following messages may be return to normal operation.
the shift lever is moved into displayed on the DIC: . A tow bar is attached to the
R (Reverse). A single beep sounds vehicle.
to indicate the system is working. SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this
message occurs, take the vehicle to . The bumper is damaged. Take
An obstacle is indicated by audible your dealer to repair the system. the vehicle to your dealer to
beeps. The interval between the repair the system.
beeps becomes shorter as the PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. OWNERS MANUAL: This . Other conditions, such as
When the distance is less than message can occur under the vibrations from a jackhammer or
30 cm (12 in) the beeping is following conditions: the compression of air brakes on
continuous for five seconds. . The sensors are not clean. Keep a very large truck, are affecting
the vehicle's rear bumper free of system performance.
mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush.
For cleaning instructions, see
Exterior Care on page 10-74.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Rear Vision An image appears on the Rear Vision Camera Location

infotainment screen with the
Camera (RVC) message Check Surroundings for
The vehicle may have an RVC Safety when the vehicle is shifted
system. Read this entire section into R (Reverse). The infotainment
before using it. screen goes to the previous screen
after approximately 10 seconds
The RVC can assist the driver when
once the vehicle is shifted out of
backing up by displaying a view of
R (Reverse).
the area behind the vehicle.
To see the previous screen sooner,
{ Warning do one of the following:
. Press a hard key on the
The RVC system does not display infotainment system.
children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
crossing traffic, animals, or any
. Shift into P (Park). The camera is above the license
other object located outside the . Reach a vehicle speed of plate.
camera's field of view, below the 8 km/h (5 mph). The area displayed by the camera is
bumper, or under the vehicle. limited.
Perceived distances may be
different from actual distances. It does not display objects that are
Do not back the vehicle using close to either corner or under the
only the RVC screen. Failure to bumper and can vary depending on
vehicle orientation or road
use proper care before backing
conditions. Displayed images may
may result in injury, death,
be farther or closer than they
or vehicle damage. Always check appear.
behind and around the vehicle
before backing.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
The following illustrations show the 1. View displayed by the

. The back of the vehicle is in an
field of view that the camera camera. accident. The position and
provides. 2. Corner of the rear bumper. mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
When the System Does Not be affected. Be sure to have the
Seem To Work Properly camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
The RVC system may not work
dealer.
properly or display a clear image if:
.
. There are extreme temperature
It is dark.
changes.
. The sun or the beam of
headamps is shining directly into
the camera lens.
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
1. View displayed by the water, and wipe it with a soft
camera. cloth.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Fuel If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap, available in some cities. If these
E85 or FlexFuel can be used in the gasolines comply with the
Use of the recommended fuel is an vehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel on previously described specification,
important part of the proper page 9-37. then they are acceptable to use.
maintenance of this vehicle. When However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
Use regular unleaded gasoline
driving in the U.S. and Canada, to other fuels containing more than
meeting ASTM specification D4814
help keep the engine clean and 15% ethanol must be used only in
with a posted octane rating of 87 or
maintain optimum vehicle FlexFuel vehicles.
higher. Do not use gasoline with an
performance, we recommend using
octane rating below 87, as it may
TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.
See www.toptiergas.com for a list of
cause engine damage and will lower { Caution
fuel economy.
TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines. Do not use fuel containing
Use of Seasonal Fuels methanol. It can corrode metal
Use summer and winter fuels in the parts in the fuel system and also
appropriate season. The fuels damage plastic and rubber parts.
industry automatically modifies the That damage would not be
fuel for the appropriate season. covered under the vehicle
If fuel is left in the vehicle tank for warranty.
long periods of time, driving or
starting could be affected. Drive the
Some gasolines, mainly high octane
vehicle until the fuel is at one-half
racing gasolines, can contain an
tank or less, then refuel with the
octane-enhancing additive called
current seasonal fuel.
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
Prohibited Fuels tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use
gasolines and/or fuel additives with
Gasolines containing oxygenates
MMT as they can reduce spark plug
such as ethers and ethanol, as well
life and affect emission control
as reformulated gasolines, are
system performance. The
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
malfunction indicator lamp may turn Fuels in Foreign gasoline additive recommended by
on. If this occurs, see your dealer General Motors. It is available at
for service.
Countries your dealer.
If planning to drive in countries Do not use additives with E85 or
California Fuel outside the U.S. or Canada, the FlexFuel.
Requirements proper fuel might be hard to find.
Check regional auto club or fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet retail brand websites for availability
E85 or FlexFuel
California Emissions Standards, it is in the country where driving. Never Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can
designed to operate on fuels that use leaded gasoline, fuel containing use either unleaded gasoline or fuel
meet California specifications. See methanol, manganese, or any other containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
the underhood emission control fuel not recommended. Costly All other vehicles should use only
label. If this fuel is not available in repairs caused by use of improper the unleaded gasoline as described
states adopting California Emissions fuel would not be covered by the in Fuel on page 9-36.
Standards, the vehicle will operate vehicle warranty. The use of E85 or FlexFuel is
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
encouraged when the vehicle is
federal specifications, but emission Fuel Additives designed to use it. E85 or FlexFuel
control system performance might
To keep fuel systems clean, TOP is made from renewable sources.
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the TIER Detergent Gasoline is To help locate fuel stations that
vehicle may not pass a smog-check recommended. See Fuel on carry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.
test. See Malfunction Indicator page 9-36. Department of Energy has an
Lamp on page 5-14. If this occurs, If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is alternative fuel website. See
return to your authorized dealer for not available, one bottle of Fuel www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/
diagnosis. If it is determined that the System Treatment PLUS added to stations.
condition is caused by the type of the fuel tank at every engine oil E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTM
fuel used, repairs may not be change can help. Fuel System Specification D 5798 or CAN/
covered by the vehicle warranty. Treatment PLUS is the only CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not use
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
the fuel if the ethanol content is

greater than 85%. Fuel mixtures that { Caution Warning (Continued)
do not meet ASTM or CGSB
specifications can affect driveability Do not use fuel containing . Keep sparks, flames, and
and could cause the malfunction methanol. It can corrode metal smoking materials away
indicator lamp to come on. parts in the fuel system and also from fuel.
damage plastic and rubber parts. . Do not leave the fuel pump
The starting characteristics of E85 That damage would not be
or FlexFuel make it unsuitable for unattended.
covered under the vehicle
use when temperatures fall below . Do not reenter the vehicle
warranty.
−18°C (0°F). Use gasoline or add while pumping fuel.
gasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel. . Keep children away from the
Because E85 or FlexFuel has less Filling the Tank fuel pump and never let
energy per liter (gallon) than children pump fuel.
gasoline, the vehicle will need to be
refilled more often. See Filling the
{ Warning . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
cap is opened too quickly.
Tank on page 9-38. Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn This spray can happen if the
violently and can cause injury or tank is nearly full, and is
{ Caution death. more likely in hot weather.
. To help avoid injuries to you Open the fuel cap slowly and
Some additives are not and others, read and follow wait for any hiss noise to stop
compatible with E85 or FlexFuel all the instructions on the fuel then unscrew the cap all
and can harm the vehicle's fuel pump island. the way.
system. Do not add anything to
E85 or FlexFuel. Damage caused
. Turn off the engine when
by additives would not be covered refueling.
by the vehicle warranty. (Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not

top off or overfill the tank and wait a { Caution
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the If a new fuel cap is needed, be
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted sure to get the right type of cap
surfaces as soon as possible. See from your dealer. The wrong type
Exterior Care on page 10-74. of fuel cap might not fit properly,
might cause the malfunction
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it indicator lamp to light, and could
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure
damage the fuel tank and
the cap is fully installed. The
emissions system. See
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
improperly installed. This would page 5-14.
The fuel cap is located behind a
hinged fuel door on the driver side allow fuel to evaporate into the
of the vehicle. If equipped, the fuel atmosphere. See Malfunction
door is locked when the vehicle Indicator Lamp on page 5-14.
doors are locked. Press K on the
RKE transmitter to unlock. { Warning
To remove the fuel cap, turn it If a fire starts while you are
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel refueling, do not remove the
cap has a spring in it; if the cap is nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
released too soon, it will spring back shutting off the pump or by
to the right. To avoid fuel contact on notifying the station attendant.
the painted surface of the vehicle Leave the area immediately.
when filling the fuel tank, place the
cap on the fuel filler door.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Filling a Portable Fuel Warning (Continued) Trailer Towing

Container
keep it in contact with the fill General Towing
{ Warning opening until filling is
complete.
Information
Filling a portable fuel container Only use towing equipment that has
. Fill the container no more
while it is in the vehicle can cause been designed for the vehicle.
than 95% full to allow for
fuel vapors that can ignite either Contact your dealer or trailering
expansion.
by static electricity or other dealer for assistance with preparing
. Do not smoke, light matches, the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read
means. You or others could be
or use lighters while the entire section before towing a
badly burned and the vehicle pumping fuel. trailer.
could be damaged. Always:
. Avoid using cell phones or For towing a disabled vehicle, see
. Use approved fuel other electronic devices. Towing the Vehicle on page 10-70.
containers. For towing the vehicle behind
. Remove the container from another vehicle such as a motor
the vehicle, trunk, or pickup home, see Recreational Vehicle
bed before filling. Towing on page 10-70.
. Place the container on the
ground. Driving Characteristics
. Place the nozzle inside the fill and Towing Tips
opening of the container Driving with a Trailer
before dispensing fuel, and
When towing a trailer:
(Continued)
. Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply
specifically to trailer towing.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14

. Do not tow a trailer during the Before starting, check all trailer hitch
first 800 km (500 mi), to prevent Warning (Continued) parts and attachments, safety
damage to the engine, axle or chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
other parts. tires and mirrors. If the trailer has
When towing a trailer:
. Then, during the first 800 km electric brakes, start the
(500 mi) trailer towing, do not
. Do not drive with the liftgate, combination moving and then apply
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and trunk/hatch, or rear-most the trailer brake controller by hand
do not make starts at full throttle. window open. to be sure the brakes work.
. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive)
. Fully open the air outlets on During the trip, check occasionally
but M (Manual Mode) is or under the instrument to be sure that the load is secure
recommended. See Manual panel. and the lamps and any trailer
Mode on page 9-22. Use a lower . Also adjust the Climate brakes still work.
gear if the transmission shifts Control system to a setting Towing with a Stability Control
too often. that brings in only outside air.
See “Climate Control
System
. Turn off Park Assist when
towing. Systems” in the Index. When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be
For more information about
heard. The system is reacting to the
{ Warning Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
vehicle movement caused by the
Exhaust on page 9-20. trailer, which mainly occurs during
When towing a trailer, exhaust
cornering. This is normal when
gases may collect at the rear of towing heavier trailers.
Towing a trailer requires a certain
the vehicle and enter if the
amount of experience. The
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most combination you are driving is Following Distance
window is open. longer and not as responsive as the Stay at least twice as far behind the
(Continued) vehicle itself. Get acquainted with vehicle ahead as you would when
the handling and braking of the rig driving the vehicle without a trailer.
before setting out for the open road.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
This can help to avoid situations Making Turns lamps also flash, telling other
that require heavy braking and drivers the vehicle is turning,
sudden turns. { Caution changing lanes or stopping.
Passing When towing a trailer, the arrows on
Making very sharp turns while the instrument cluster flash for turns
More passing distance is needed trailering could cause the trailer to even if the bulbs on the trailer are
when towing a trailer. Because the come in contact with the vehicle. burned out. Check occasionally to
rig is longer, it is necessary to go The vehicle could be damaged. be sure the trailer bulbs are still
farther beyond the passed vehicle Avoid making very sharp turns working.
before returning to the lane. while trailering.
Driving on Grades
Backing Up
When turning with a trailer, make Reduce speed and shift to a lower
Hold the bottom of the steering gear before starting down a long or
wheel with one hand. To move the wider turns than normal so the
trailer will not strike soft shoulders, steep downgrade. If the
trailer to the left, move your hand to transmission is not shifted down, the
the left. To move the trailer to the curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Use the turn signal well in brakes might have to be used so
right, move your hand to the right. much that they would get hot and no
Always back up slowly and, advance and avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. longer work well.
if possible, have someone
guide you. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
Turn Signals When Towing a Use a lower gear if the transmission
Trailer shifts too often.
The turn signal indicators on the When towing at high altitude on
instrument cluster flash whenever steep uphill grades, engine coolant
signaling a turn or lane change. boils at a lower temperature than at
Properly hooked up, the trailer normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing
at high altitude on steep uphill
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
grades, the vehicle could show If parking the rig on a hill: 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
signs similar to engine overheating. 1. Press the brake pedal, but do clear of the chocks.
To avoid this, let the engine run not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn 4. Stop and have someone pick up
while parked, preferably on level the wheels into the curb if facing and store the chocks.
ground, with the transmission in downhill or into traffic if facing
P (Park) for a few minutes before uphill. Maintenance When Trailer
turning the engine off. If the Towing
overheat warning comes on, see 2. Have someone place chocks
Engine Overheating on page 10-18. under the trailer wheels. The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See the
Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance Schedule on
place, release the brake pedal page 11-2. Things that are
until the chocks absorb the load.
{ Warning 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
especially important in trailer
operation are automatic
Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
the trailer attached can be into P (Park). lubricant, belts, cooling system and
dangerous. If something goes brake system. Inspect these before
5. Release the brake pedal.
wrong, the rig could start to move. and during the trip.
People can be injured, and both Leaving After Parking on a Hill Check periodically to see that all
the vehicle and the trailer can be 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
damaged. When possible, always while you:
park the rig on a flat surface. Engine Cooling When Trailer
. Start the engine. Towing
. Shift into a gear. The cooling system may temporarily
. Release the parking brake. overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
2. Let up on the brake pedal. on page 10-18.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Trailer Towing
Three important considerations
have to do with weight:
. The weight of the trailer
. The weight of the trailer tongue
. The total weight on the vehicle's
tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Speed, altitude, road grades,
outside temperature, special
equipment, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry
must be considered. See “Weight of
the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment. The
weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. *GCWR

2WD – 2.4L L4 Engine 3.23 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 650 kg (5,840 lbs)
AWD – 3.0L V6 Engine 3.23 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs)
2WD – 3.0L V6 Engine 3.23 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 549 kg (7,820 lbs)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our trailering If there are a lot of options,
information or advice. equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
Weight of the Trailer Tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is will also reduce the trailer weight the
an important weight to measure vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
because it affects the total gross the tongue load must be added to
weight of the vehicle. The Gross the GVW because the vehicle will
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the be carrying that weight, too. See
curb weight of the vehicle, any Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
If a weight-carrying hitch or a It is important that the vehicle Towing Equipment

weight-distributing hitch is being does not exceed any of its
used, the trailer tongue (1) should ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Hitches
weigh 10-15 percent of the total Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue It is important to have the correct
loaded trailer weight (2). Weight. The only way to be sure it is hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
After loading the trailer, weigh the not exceeding any of these ratings trucks going by, and rough roads
trailer and then the tongue, is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. are a few reasons why the right
separately, to see if the weights are Total Weight on the Vehicle's hitch is needed.
proper. If they are not, adjustments Tires . The rear bumper on the vehicle
might be made by moving some is not intended for hitches. Do
items around in the trailer. Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
upper limit for cold tires. These not attach rental hitches or other
Trailering may be limited by the numbers can be found on the bumper-type hitches to it. Use
vehicle's ability to carry tongue Certification label or see Vehicle only a frame-mounted hitch that
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause Load Limits on page 9-10 for more does not attach to the bumper.
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR information. Do not go over the . Will any holes be made in the
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or GVW limit for the vehicle, or the body of the vehicle when the
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle GAWR, including the weight of the trailer hitch is installed? If there
Weight Rating). The effect of trailer tongue. If using a weight are, then be sure to seal the
additional weight may reduce the distributing hitch, do not go over the holes when the hitch is removed.
trailering capacity more than the rear axle limit before applying the If the holes are not sealed, dirt,
total of the additional weight. weight distribution spring bars. water, and deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from the exhaust
may get into the vehicle. See
Engine Exhaust on page 9-20.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Safety Chains Conversions and

Always attach chains between the Add-Ons
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue Add-On Electrical
from contacting the road if it Equipment
becomes separated from the hitch.
Always leave just enough slack so
the rig can turn. Never allow safety
{ Caution
chains to drag on the ground. Some electrical equipment can
Trailer Brakes damage the vehicle or cause
components to not work and
A loaded trailer that weighs more would not be covered by the
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to warranty. Always check with your
have its own brake system that is dealer before adding electrical
adequate for the weight of the equipment.
trailer. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted and Add-on equipment can drain the
maintained properly. vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not try to tap into the The vehicle has an airbag system.
vehicle's hydraulic brake system. Before attempting to add anything
If you do, both brake systems will electrical to the vehicle, see
not work well, or at all. Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-28 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-28.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
2 NOTES
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-1
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24

Vehicle Care Automatic Transmission Shift
Electrical System
Electrical System
Lock Control Function Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Fuses and Circuit
General Information Ignition Transmission Lock Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Engine Compartment Fuse
Accessories and Park Brake and P (Park) Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25 Instrument Panel Fuse
Vehicle Checks Wiper Blade Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Doing Your Own Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Wheels and Tires
Headlamp Aiming Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Engine Compartment All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Bulb Replacement Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-39
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Tire Terminology and
Automatic Transmission Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Front Turn Signal and Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Stoplamps, and Back-Up Tire Pressure Monitor
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-20 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-29 Tire Pressure Monitor
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New General Information not covered under the terms of the
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 vehicle warranty and may affect
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 For service and parts needs, visit remaining warranty coverage for
Different Size Tires and your dealer. You will receive affected parts.
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 genuine parts and trained and
GM Accessories are designed to
Uniform Tire Quality supported service people.
complement and function with other
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
systems on the vehicle. See your
Wheel Alignment and Tire Accessories and dealer to accessorize the vehicle
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56
Modifications using genuine GM Accessories
installed by a dealer technician.
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Adding non‐dealer accessories or
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 making modifications to the vehicle Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 can affect vehicle performance and Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-65 safety, including such things as page 3-28.
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
Jump Starting handling, emissions systems,
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 aerodynamics, durability, and
Towing the Vehicle electronic systems like antilock
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-70 brakes, traction control, and stability
Recreational Vehicle control. These accessories or
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
Appearance Care by the vehicle warranty.
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Damage to vehicle components
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
resulting from modifications or the
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
installation or use of non‐GM
certified parts, including control
module or software modifications, is
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-3
Vehicle Checks Keep a record with all parts receipts

and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed.
Doing Your Own
Service Work { Caution
{ Warning Even small amounts of
contamination can cause damage
It can be dangerous to work on to vehicle systems. Do not allow
your vehicle if you do not have contaminants to contact the fluids,
the proper knowledge, service reservoir caps, or dipsticks.
manual, tools, or parts. Always
follow owner manual procedures 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
and consult the service manual Hood lift up on the secondary hood
for your vehicle before doing any To open the hood: release lever.
service work.
3. Lift the hood.
To close the hood:
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service 1. Before closing the hood, be sure
manual. It tells you much more that all the filler caps are
about how to service the vehicle properly installed.
than this manual can. 2. Lower the hood 20 cm (8 in)
1. Pull the handle with this symbol. above the vehicle and release it
This vehicle has an airbag system.
It is located below the instrument so it fully latches.
Before attempting to do your own
panel to the left of the steering
service work, see Airbag System 3. Check to make sure the hood is
wheel.
Check on page 3-29. firmly closed. Repeat the
process if necessary.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-4 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4L L4 Engine
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-5
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 10. Engine Coolant Surge Tank

page 10-12. and Pressure Cap. See
2. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. “Checking Coolant” under
See Power Steering Fluid on Engine Coolant on page 10-14.
page 10-20. 11. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.
3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of See Jump Starting on
View). See Cooling System on page 10-66.
page 10-13. 12. Engine Compartment Fuse
4. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Block on page 10-31.
View). See “Checking Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on
page 10-8.
5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
Oil on page 10-8.
6. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10-20.
7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
Brakes on page 10-21.
8. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10-66.
9. Battery on page 10-23.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-6 Vehicle Care
3.0L V6 Engine
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 9. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. Engine Cover

page 10-12. See Jump Starting on
2. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of page 10-66.
View). See “When to Add Engine 10. Battery on page 10-23.
Oil” under Engine Oil on 11. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.
page 10-8. See “Checking Coolant” under
3. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Engine Coolant on page 10-14.
(Out of View). See Power 12. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.
Steering Fluid on page 10-20. See Jump Starting on
4. Engine Cover. See Engine page 10-66.
Cover on page 10-7. 13. Engine Compartment Fuse
5. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Block on page 10-31.
View). See “Checking Engine Engine Cover (3.0L V6)
Oil” under Engine Oil on
page 10-8. 1. Oil Fill Cap
6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of 2. Engine Cover Bolt
View). See Cooling System on 3. Engine Cover
page 10-13. To remove:
7. Windshield Washer Fluid 1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on 2. Remove the engine cover
page 10-20. bolt (2).
8. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See 3. Raise the engine cover (3) to
Brakes on page 10-21. release it from the retainers.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-8 Vehicle Care
4. Lift and remove the engine

. Always dispose of engine oil
cover. properly. See “What to Do with { Warning
Used Oil” in this section.
5. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstall The engine oil dipstick handle
the engine cover. Checking Engine Oil may be hot; it could burn you.
It is a good idea to check the engine Use a towel or glove to touch the
Engine Oil oil level at each fuel fill. In order to dipstick handle.
To ensure proper engine get an accurate reading, the vehicle
performance and long life, careful must be on level ground. The 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
attention must be paid to engine oil. engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. with a paper towel or cloth, then
Following these simple, but See Engine Compartment Overview push it back in all the way.
important steps will help protect on page 10-4 for the location of the Remove it again, keeping the tip
your investment: engine oil dipstick. down, and check the level.
. Always use engine oil approved Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential: When to Add Engine Oil
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See 1. If the engine has been running
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” recently, turn off the engine and
in this section. allow several minutes for the oil
. Check the engine oil level to drain back into the oil pan.
regularly and maintain the Checking the oil level too soon
proper oil level. See “Checking after engine shutoff will not
Engine Oil” and “When to Add provide an accurate oil level
Engine Oil” in this section. reading. If the oil is below the MIN
(minimum) mark, add 1 L (1 qt) of
. Change the engine oil at the the recommended oil and then
appropriate time. See Engine Oil recheck the level. See “Selecting
Life System on page 10-10. the Right Engine Oil” in this section
for an explanation of what kind of oil
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-9
to use. For engine oil crankcase Add enough oil to put the level
capacity, see Capacities and somewhere in the proper operating
Specifications on page 12-2. range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
{ Caution Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Do not add too much oil. Oil Selecting the right engine oil
levels above or below the depends on both the proper oil { Caution
acceptable operating range specification and viscosity grade.
shown on the dipstick are harmful See Recommended Fluids and Failure to use the recommended
to the engine. If you find that you Lubricants on page 11-12. engine oil can result in engine
have an oil level above the damage not covered by the
Specification
operating range, i.e., the engine vehicle warranty. Check with your
has so much oil that the oil level Use and ask for licensed engine oils dealer or service provider on
gets above the upper mark that with the dexos1® approved whether the oil is approved to the
certification mark. Engine oils dexos1 specification.
shows the proper operating
meeting the requirements for the
range, the engine could be
vehicle should have the dexos1
damaged. You should drain out approved certification mark. Viscosity Grade
the excess oil or limit driving of This certification mark indicates that Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade
the vehicle and seek a service the oil has been approved to the engine oil.
professional to remove the dexos1 specification. See
excess amount of oil. www.gmdexos.com. Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
See Engine Compartment Overview (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
on page 10-4 for the location of the used. An oil of this viscosity grade
engine oil fill cap. will provide easier cold starting for
the engine at extremely low
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-10 Vehicle Care
temperatures. When selecting an oil properly dispose of clothing or rags the oil life system to work properly,
of the appropriate viscosity grade, containing used engine oil. See the the system must be reset every time
always select an oil of the correct manufacturer's warnings about the the oil is changed.
specification. See “Specification” use and disposal of oil products. When the system has calculated
earlier in this section for more Used oil can be a threat to the that oil life has been diminished, it
information. environment. If you change your indicates that an oil change is
Engine Oil Additives/Engine own oil, be sure to drain all the oil necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
Oil Flushes from the filter before disposal. Never OIL SOON message displays. See
dispose of oil by putting it in the Engine Oil Messages on page 5-30.
Do not add anything to the oil. The trash or pouring it on the ground, If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
recommended oils with the dexos into sewers, or into streams or message displays, change the oil as
specification and displaying the bodies of water. Recycle it by taking soon as possible within the next
dexos certification mark are all that it to a place that collects used oil. 1 000 km (600 mi). If the CHANGE
is needed for good performance and ENGINE OIL NOW message
engine protection. Engine Oil Life System displays, change the oil as soon as
Engine oil system flushes are not possible. It is possible that, if driving
recommended and could cause When to Change Engine Oil under the best conditions, the oil life
engine damage not covered by the This vehicle has a computer system system might indicate that an oil
vehicle warranty. that indicates when to change the change is not necessary for up to a
engine oil and filter. This is based year. The engine oil and filter must
What to Do with Used Oil on a combination of factors which be changed at least once a year
Used engine oil contains certain include engine revolutions, engine and, at this time, the system must
elements that can be unhealthy for temperature, and miles driven. be reset. Your dealer has trained
your skin and could even cause Based on driving conditions, the service people who will perform this
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on mileage at which an oil change is work and reset the system. It is also
your skin for very long. Clean your indicated can vary considerably. For important to check the oil regularly
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-11
over the course of an oil drain 2. Press V for five seconds to occurs, take the vehicle to the
interval and keep it at the proper reset the oil life at 100%. dealer and have it repaired as soon
level. as possible.
Be careful not to reset the oil life
If the system is ever reset display accidentally at any time Change the fluid at the intervals
accidentally, the oil must be other than after the oil is listed in Maintenance Schedule on
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) changed. It cannot be reset page 11-2, and be sure to use the
since the last oil change. accurately until the next oil transmission fluid listed in
Remember to reset the oil life change. Recommended Fluids and
system whenever the oil is changed. Lubricants on page 11-12.
The oil life system can also be reset
How to Reset the Engine Oil as follows:
Life System { Caution
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN
Reset the system whenever the with the engine off. Use of the incorrect automatic
engine oil is changed so that the 2. Fully press and release the transmission fluid may damage
system can calculate the next accelerator pedal three times the vehicle, and the damage may
engine oil change. To reset the within five seconds. not be covered by the vehicle
system: warranty. Always use the
If the OIL LIFE REMAINING value is automatic transmission fluid listed
1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING not 100%, the system needs to be
on the DIC. See Driver in Recommended Fluids and
reset again. Lubricants on page 11-12.
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5-23 and Engine Oil
Messages on page 5-30.
Automatic Transmission
For the 2.4L L4 and 3.0L
Fluid V6 engines, the transmission fluid
It is not necessary to check the will not reach the end of the dipstick
transmission fluid level. unless the transmission is at
A transmission fluid leak is the only operating temperature. If you need
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-12 Vehicle Care
to check the transmission fluid level, To inspect or replace: 3. Remove the screws (3) on the
please take the vehicle to your sides of the air cleaner cover
dealer. assembly.
4. Turn the cover upward to
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter disengage the cover hinges.
See Engine Compartment Overview 5. Lift and remove the air cleaner
on page 10-4 for the location of the cover assembly and air filter
engine air cleaner/filter. element.
When to Inspect the Engine Air 6. Inspect or replace the air filter
Cleaner/Filter element.
Inspect and replace the air cleaner/ If the air filter element is dirty,
filter at the scheduled maintenance you should replace it.
intervals. See the Maintenance 2.4L L4 Engine Shown, 3.0L Wipe all dust from inside of the
Schedule on page 11-2. If driving in V6 Engine Similar housing and inspect the air
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the cleaner and air outlet duct for
filter at each engine oil change. 1. Electrical Connector
cracks, cuts, and deterioration.
2. Air Duct Clamp The air outlet duct must be
How to Inspect the Engine Air 3. Screws
Cleaner/Filter replaced if damaged.
1. Disconnect the electrical 7. Reverse Steps 1–5 to reinstall
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, connector (1). the engine air cleaner/filter cover
remove the filter from the vehicle
2. Loosen the air duct clamp (2) on and air duct hose.
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter the air duct hose. Disconnect the
remains covered with dirt, a new air duct hose.
filter is required. Never use
compressed air to clean the filter.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-13
Cooling System
{ Warning
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
3.0L V6 Engine
{ Caution 2.4L L4 Engine 1. Engine Fans (Out of View)
If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt 2. Coolant Surge Tank and
1. Engine Fan (Out of View) Pressure Cap
can easily get into the engine, 2. Coolant Surge Tank and
which could damage it. Always Pressure Cap
have the air cleaner/filter in place { Warning
when you are driving.
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-14 Vehicle Care
If the coolant inside the coolant If the engine is overheating, the fan Engine Coolant
surge tank is hot, do not do anything should be running. If it is not, the
else until it cools down. The vehicle vehicle needs service. Turn off the The cooling system in the vehicle is
should be parked on a level surface. engine. filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
The coolant level should be remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
between the MIN and MAX lines. { Caution 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
If it is not, you may have a leak at occurs first, if only DEX-COOL
the radiator hoses, heater hoses, Running the engine without
coolant may cause damage or a extended life coolant is added.
radiator, water pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system. fire. Vehicle damage would not be The following explains the cooling
covered by the vehicle warranty. system and how to add coolant
when it is low. If there is a problem
{ Warning with engine overheating, see Engine
Heater and radiator hoses, and Overheating on page 10-18.
other engine parts, can be very
{ Caution A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, Using coolant other than water and DEX-COOL coolant will:
you can be burned. DEX-COOL® can cause . Give freezing protection down to
Do not run the engine if there is a premature engine, heater core, −37°C (−34°F).
leak. If you run the engine, it or radiator corrosion. In addition, . Give boiling protection up to
could lose all coolant. That could the engine coolant could require 129°C (265°F).
cause an engine fire, and you changing sooner. Any repairs
would not be covered by the
. Protect against rust and
could be burned. Get any leak
vehicle warranty. Always use corrosion.
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant . Help keep the proper engine
in the vehicle. temperature.
If there seems to be no leak, with
the engine on, check to see if the . Let the warning lights and
engine cooling fan(s) is running. gauges work as they should.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-15
{ Caution { Warning Caution (Continued)

Using coolant other than Adding only plain water or some damaged. Too much water in the
DEX-COOL® can cause other liquid to the cooling system mixture can freeze and crack
premature engine, heater core, can be dangerous. Plain water engine cooling parts. The repairs
or radiator corrosion. In addition, and other liquids, can boil before would not be covered by the
the engine coolant could require the proper coolant mixture will. vehicle warranty. Use only the
changing sooner. Any repairs The coolant warning system is set proper mixture of engine coolant
would not be covered by the for the proper coolant mixture. for the cooling system. See
vehicle warranty. Always use With plain water or the wrong Recommended Fluids and
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant mixture, the engine could get too Lubricants on page 11-12.
in the vehicle. hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine If coolant has to be added more
could catch fire and you or others than four times a year, have the
What to Use
could be burned. Use a 50/ dealer check the vehicle cooling
Use a mixture of one-half clean, 50 mixture of clean, drinkable system.
drinkable water and one-half water and DEX-COOL coolant.
DEX-COOL coolant which will not Never dispose of engine coolant by
damage aluminum parts. If you use putting it in the trash, pouring it on
this coolant mixture, you do not the ground, or into sewers, streams,
need to add anything else. { Caution or bodies of water. Have the coolant
changed by an authorized service
If improper coolant mixture, center, familiar with legal
inhibitors, or additives are used in requirements regarding used
the vehicle cooling system, the coolant disposal. This will help
engine could overheat and be protect the environment and your
(Continued) health.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-16 Vehicle Care
Checking Coolant Adding Coolant How to Add Coolant to the

The coolant surge tank is located on If more coolant is needed, add the Coolant Surge Tank
the driver side of the engine proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture
compartment. See Engine at the coolant surge tank, but only { Caution
Compartment Overview on when the engine is cool. See below
page 10-4 for more information on for instructions on “How to Add This vehicle has a specific
location. Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.” coolant fill procedure. Failure to
follow this procedure could cause
{ Warning { Warning the engine to overheat and be
severely damaged.
Turning the surge tank pressure You can be burned if you spill
cap when the engine and radiator coolant on hot engine parts. If a problem yet has not been found,
are hot can allow steam and Coolant contains ethylene glycol, check to see if coolant is visible in
scalding liquids to blow out and and it will burn if the engine parts the coolant surge tank. If coolant is
burn you badly. Never turn the are hot enough. Do not spill visible but the coolant level is not at
surge tank pressure cap — even a coolant on a hot engine. between the MIN and MAX lines,
little — when the engine and add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
radiator are hot. When replacing the pressure cap, drinkable water and DEX-COOL
make sure it is hand-tight and fully coolant at the coolant surge tank,
seated. but be sure the cooling system,
The vehicle must be on a level
including the coolant surge tank
surface. When the engine is cold,
pressure cap, is cool before doing it.
the coolant level should be between
See Engine Overheating on
the MIN and MAX lines.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-17
{ Warning Warning (Continued) { Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from a The coolant warning system is set You can be burned if you spill
hot cooling system can blow out for the proper coolant mixture. coolant on hot engine parts.
and burn you badly. They are With plain water or the wrong Coolant contains ethylene glycol
under pressure, and if you turn mixture, the engine could get too and it will burn if the engine parts
the coolant surge tank pressure hot but you would not get the are hot enough. Do not spill
cap — even a little — they can overheat warning. The engine coolant on a hot engine.
come out at high speed. Never could catch fire and you or
turn the cap when the cooling others could be burned. Use a
system, including the coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Wait for the cooling system and
coolant surge tank pressure cap
to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap. { Caution
In cold weather, water can freeze 1. Remove the coolant surge tank
and crack the engine, radiator, pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
{ Warning heater core, and other parts. Use
the recommended coolant and
surge tank pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no
Adding only plain water or some the proper coolant mixture. longer hot.
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water Turn the pressure cap slowly
and other liquids, can boil before counterclockwise about
the proper coolant mixture will. one-quarter of a turn. If a hiss is
heard, wait for that to stop. This
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-18 Vehicle Care
will allow any pressure still left to 4. With the coolant surge tank proper level, repeat Steps 1–3 and
be vented out the pressure cap off, start the reinstall the pressure cap. If the
discharge hose. engine and let it run until the coolant still is not at the proper level
2. Keep turning the pressure cap upper radiator hose can be felt when the system cools down again,
slowly, and remove it. getting hot. Watch out for the see the dealer.
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level Engine Overheating
inside the coolant surge tank There is a coolant temperature
may be lower. If the level is warning light on the instrument
lower, add more of the proper panel. See Engine Coolant
DEX-COOL coolant mixture to Temperature Warning Light on
the coolant surge tank until the page 5-20.
level reaches between the MIN
and MAX lines. If Steam is Coming from the
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.
Engine
{ Caution { Warning
If the pressure cap is not tightly Steam from an overheated engine
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
installed, coolant loss and can cause serious injury, even if
the proper DEX-COOL coolant
mixture, to between the MIN and possible engine damage may the hood is opened just a little.
MAX lines. occur. Be sure the cap is properly Stay away from the engine if
and tightly secured. steam is seen or heard coming
from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle
Check the level in the surge tank
(Continued)
when the cooling system has cooled
down. If the coolant is not at the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-19
If No Steam is Coming from If the overheat warning is no longer

Warning (Continued) the Engine on, the vehicle can be driven. Just
to be safe, drive slowly for about
until it cools down. Wait until there If there is an engine overheat 10 minutes. If the warning does not
is no sign of steam or coolant warning, but no steam can be seen come back on, drive normally and
before opening the hood. or heard, the problem may not be have the cooling system checked
too serious. Sometimes the engine for proper fill and function..
If driving continues when the can get a little too hot when the
engine is overheated, the liquids vehicle: If the warning continues and the
in it can catch fire. Someone vehicle is not stopped, pull over,
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
could get badly burned. Stop the stop, and park the vehicle
engine if it overheats, and get out . Stops after high-speed driving. right away.
of the vehicle until the engine has If there is still no sign of steam, idle
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
cooled. the engine for three minutes while
. Tows a trailer.
parked. If the warning continues,
If there is an overheat warning with turn off the engine and get everyone
no sign of steam, try this for a
{ Caution minute or so:
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
The decision may be made to not lift
Running the engine without 1. If equipped with air conditioning, the hood but to get service help
coolant may cause damage or a turn it off. right away.
fire. Vehicle damage would not be 2. Turn on the heater to full hot at
covered by the vehicle warranty. the highest fan speed and open
the windows as necessary.
3. When it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-20 Vehicle Care
Power Steering Fluid 2. Remove the engine cover,

if required. See Engine Cover on { Caution
page 10-7.
Use of the incorrect fluid may
3. Wipe the cap and the top of the damage the vehicle and the
reservoir clean. damages may not be covered by
4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the the vehicle warranty. Always use
dipstick with a clean rag. the correct fluid listed in
5. Replace the cap and completely Recommended Fluids and
See Engine Compartment Overview Lubricants on page 11-12.
on page 10-4 for reservoir location. tighten it.
6. Remove the cap again and look
When to Check Power Steering at the fluid level on the dipstick. Washer Fluid
Fluid
The fluid level should be within the What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly area indicated on the dipstick when
check power steering fluid unless a the engine is cold. If necessary, add When windshield washer fluid is
leak in the system is suspected or only enough fluid to bring the level needed, be sure to read the
an unusual noise is heard. A fluid within the area indicated. manufacturer instructions before
loss in this system could indicate a use. If operating the vehicle in an
problem. Have the system inspected What to Use area where the temperature can fall
and repaired. To determine what kind of fluid to below freezing, use a fluid that has
use, refer to Recommended Fluids sufficient protection against
How to Check Power Steering freezing.
Fluid and Lubricants on page 11-12.
Always use the proper fluid.
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the ignition off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-21
Adding Windshield Washer

Fluid Caution (Continued) { Warning
to freeze and damage the The brake wear warning sound
washer fluid tank and other means that soon the brakes will
parts of the washer system. not work well. That could lead to
. When using concentrated a crash. When the brake wear
washer fluid, follow the warning sound is heard, have the
manufacturer instructions for vehicle serviced.
adding water.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until . Fill the washer fluid tank only
the tank is full. See Engine three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for fluid
{ Caution
Compartment Overview on
page 10-4. expansion if freezing occurs, Continuing to drive with worn-out
which could damage the tank brake pads could result in costly
{ Caution if it is completely full. brake repair.
. Do not use engine coolant

(antifreeze) in the windshield
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
washer. It can damage the This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brakes are first applied or lightly
windshield washer system brake pads have built-in wear applied. This does not mean
and paint. indicators that make a high-pitched something is wrong with the brakes.
. Do not mix water with warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are
ready-to-use washer fluid. necessary to help prevent brake
Water can cause the solution The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time when the vehicle pulsation. When tires are rotated,
(Continued) is moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and
brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-22 Vehicle Care
proper sequence to torque new, approved replacement parts. There are only two reasons why the
specifications. See Capacities and If this is not done, the brakes might brake fluid level in the reservoir
Specifications on page 12-2. not work properly. For example, might go down:
Brake pads should be replaced as installing disc brake pads that are . The brake fluid level goes down
complete sets. wrong for the vehicle, can change because of normal brake lining
the balance between the front and wear. When new linings are
Brake Pedal Travel rear brakes — for the worse. The installed, the fluid level goes
braking performance expected can back up.
See your dealer if the brake pedal
change in many other ways if the
does not return to normal height, . A fluid leak in the brake
wrong replacement brake parts are
or if there is a rapid increase in hydraulic system can also cause
installed.
pedal travel. This could be a sign a low fluid level. Have the brake
that brake service might be hydraulic system fixed, since a
required. Brake Fluid
leak means that sooner or later
Brake Adjustment the brakes will not work well.
Every time the brakes are applied, Do not top off the brake fluid.
with or without the vehicle moving, Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
the brakes adjust for wear. If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
Replacing Brake System Parts when new brake linings are
The braking system on a vehicle is The brake master cylinder reservoir installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
complex. Its many parts have to be is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as as necessary, only when work is
of top quality and work well together indicated on the reservoir cap. See done on the brake hydraulic system.
if the vehicle is to have really good Engine Compartment Overview on
braking. The vehicle was designed page 10-4 for the location of the
and tested with top-quality brake reservoir.
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-23
{ Warning { Warning Caution (Continued)

If too much brake fluid is added, it With the wrong kind of fluid in the . If brake fluid is spilled on the
can spill on the engine and burn, brake hydraulic system, the vehicle's painted surfaces,
if the engine is hot enough. You brakes might not work well. This the paint finish can be
or others could be burned, and could cause a crash. Always use damaged. Be careful not to
the vehicle could be damaged. the proper brake fluid. spill brake fluid on the
Add brake fluid only when work is vehicle. If you do, wash it off
done on the brake hydraulic immediately.
system.
{ Caution Battery
. Using the wrong fluid can
When the brake fluid falls to a low Refer to the replacement number
level, the brake warning light comes badly damage brake shown on the original battery label
on. See Brake System Warning hydraulic system parts. For when a new battery is needed. See
Light on page 5-16. example, just a few drops of Engine Compartment Overview on
mineral-based oil, such as page 10-4 for battery location.
What to Add engine oil, in the brake
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid hydraulic system can damage
from a sealed container. brake hydraulic system parts { Warning
so badly that they will have to
Always clean the brake fluid Battery posts, terminals, and
be replaced. Do not let
reservoir cap and the area around related accessories contain lead
someone put in the wrong
the cap before removing it. This and lead compounds, chemicals
kind of fluid.
helps keep dirt from entering the known to the State of California to
reservoir. (Continued) cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-24 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage noise is heard. A fluid loss could If the vehicle starts in any other
indicate a problem. Have it position, contact your dealer for
{ Warning inspected and repaired. service.
Batteries have acid that can burn Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission
you and gas that can explode. Shift Lock Control
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
{ Warning Function Check
page 10-66 for tips on working When you are doing this
around a battery without inspection, the vehicle could { Warning
getting hurt. move suddenly. If the vehicle
When you are doing this
moves, you or others could be
inspection, the vehicle could
injured.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the move suddenly. If the vehicle
black, negative (−) cable from the moves, you or others could be
battery to keep the battery from 1. Before starting this check, be injured.
running down. sure there is enough room
Extended Storage: Remove the around the vehicle.
1. Before starting this check, be
black, negative (−) cable from the 2. Apply both the parking brake sure there is enough room
battery or use a battery trickle and the regular brake. around the vehicle. It should be
charger. Do not use the accelerator parked on a level surface.
pedal, and be ready to turn off 2. Apply the parking brake. Be
All-Wheel Drive the engine immediately if it ready to apply the regular brake
When to Check Lubricant starts. immediately if the vehicle begins
3. Try to start the engine in each to move.
It is not necessary to regularly
check the transfer case fluid unless gear. The vehicle should start
a leak is suspected or an unusual only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-25

. To check the P (Park)
3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to
regular brake, try to move the P (Park). Then release the
shift lever out of P (Park) with { Warning parking brake followed by the
normal effort. If the shift lever regular brake.
moves out of P (Park), contact When you are doing this check,
Contact your dealer if service is
your dealer for service. the vehicle could begin to move. required.
You or others could be injured
Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
Wiper Blade Replacement
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be
While parked and with the parking roll. Be ready to apply the regular inspected for wear and cracking.
brake set, try to turn the ignition to brake at once should the vehicle Replacement blades come in
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever begin to move. different types and are removed in
position. different ways. For proper type and
. The ignition should turn to Park on a fairly steep hill, with the length, see Maintenance
LOCK/OFF only when the shift vehicle facing downhill. Keeping Replacement Parts on page 11-13.
lever is in P (Park). your foot on the regular brake, set
. The ignition key should come the parking brake. { Caution
out only in LOCK/OFF. . To check the parking brake's Allowing the wiper arm to touch
Contact your dealer if service is holding ability: With the engine the windshield when no wiper
required. running and the transmission in blade is installed could damage
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
the windshield. Any damage that
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is (Continued)
held by the parking brake only.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-26 Vehicle Care
3. Push the new blade assembly 3. Apply downward pressure to the

Caution (Continued) securely on the wiper arm until blade assembly and remove
the release lever clicks into from the wiper arm.
occurs would not be covered by place.
your warranty. Do not allow the 4. Install the new wiper blade.
wiper arm to touch the windshield. 4. Lower the wiper arm. 5. Return the wiper arm and blade
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement assembly to the rest position on
Front Wiper Blade the window.
To replace the rear wiper blade:
Replacement
To replace the windshield wiper
blade:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
1. Lift the rear wiper arm (1) from

the window.
2. Push the release lever (2) to 2. Turn the bottom edge of the
disengage the hook and push blade assembly (2) slightly away
the wiper arm (1) out of the from the underside of the
blade assembly (3). wiper arm.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-27
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement 1. Open the hood. See Hood on

page 10-3.
Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement
should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, page 10-30.
the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulb‐changing procedure
If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact
necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ Warning
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or 2. Remove the filler panel
fasteners (1) and remove the
others could be injured. Be sure
filler panel.
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package. 3. Remove the three screws (2)
retaining the headlamp
assembly.
Headlamps 4. Pull the headlamp assembly
To replace one of the headlamp straight forward releasing the
bulbs, use the following procedure. retaining studs from the
To replace the parking/turn signal grommets.
lamp bulb, see Front Turn Signal
and Parking Lamps on page 10-28.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-28 Vehicle Care
2. Remove the bulb by turning it

counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out of the assembly.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb
assembly.
4. Install the new bulb by turning it
clockwise into the assembly.
5. Reconnect the electrical
connector.
5. Disconnect the electrical Front Turn Signal and 2. Turn the bulb to be replaced
connector from the bulb Parking Lamps counterclockwise to remove it
assembly. from the headlamp assembly.
To replace a front turn signal or
6. Turn the bulb assembly 3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb
parking lamp bulb:
counterclockwise to remove it socket assembly.
from the housing. 1. Follow Steps 1–4 under
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb
Headlamps on page 10-27 to
7. Replace the old bulb with a socket assembly.
access the front turn signal or
new one. 5. Insert the bulb assembly into the
parking lamp.
8. Reverse Steps 1–6 to reinstall. headlamp assembly.
6. Turn the bulb assembly
Fog Lamps clockwise until seated.
To replace the front fog lamp bulb: 7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the
1. Locate the fog lamp located headlamp assembly.
under the front fascia.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-29
Taillamps, Turn Signal, License Plate Lamp

Stoplamps, and Back-Up To replace one of these bulbs:
Lamps 1. Remove the two screws holding
To replace one of these bulbs: each of the license plate lamps
to the fascia.
2. Remove the two screws holding

in the taillamp assembly.
3. Slide the taillamp assembly
rearward and away from the
vehicle.
4. Turn the bulb socket being
1. Back-Up Lamp
replaced counterclockwise to 2. Turn and pull the license plate
2. Turn Signal Lamp disconnect it. lamp forward through the fascia
3. Stoplamp/Taillamp 5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb opening.
4. Taillamp socket. 3. Turn the bulb socket
6. Push the new bulb into the bulb counterclockwise and pull the
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
socket. bulb straight out of the socket.
on page 2-8.
7. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstall
the taillamp assembly.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-30 Vehicle Care
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb Exterior Lamp Bulb Electrical System
socket and turn it clockwise to Number
lock it into place.
Rear Stoplamp, and 7443 Electrical System
5. Push and turn the license plate
lamp back through the fascia
Taillamp Overload
opening. Rear Turn 3757 NAK The vehicle has fuses and circuit
Signal Lamp breakers to protect against an
6. Reinstall the two screws holding
the license plate lamp to the electrical system overload.
fascia. For replacement bulbs not listed
When the current electrical load is
here, contact your dealer.
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
Replacement Bulbs and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
Exterior Lamp Bulb normal or the problem is fixed. This
Number greatly reduces the chance of circuit
Back-Up Lamp 921 overload and fire caused by
electrical problems.
Front Fog Lamp H11
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
Front Turn Signal/ 3157K power devices in the vehicle.
Parking Lamp
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
Headlamps of the identical size and rating.
High-Beam 9005 If there is a problem on the road and
or HB3 a fuse needs to be replaced, the
Low-Beam/DRL 9006 same amperage fuse can be
or HB4 borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
License Plate Lamp 168LL and replace it as soon as possible.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-31
Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment

An electrical overload may cause Breakers Fuse Block
the lamps to go on and off, or in
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are The engine compartment fuse block
some cases to remain off. Have the
protected from short circuits by is on the right side of the engine
headlamp wiring checked right away
fuses. This greatly reduces the compartment, near the battery.
if the lamps go on and off or
chance of circuit overload and fire
remain off.
Windshield Wipers
caused by electrical problems. { Caution
There are two fuse blocks — the
engine compartment fuse block, and Spilling liquid on any electrical
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield the instrument panel fuse block. component on the vehicle may
wipers will stop until the motor cools damage it. Always keep the
To identify and check fuses and covers on any electrical
and will then restart. relays, refer to the Fuse Usage
component.
Although the circuit is protected Chart on the inside surface of the
from electrical overload, overload fuse panel door or cover.
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-32 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
BATT2 Instrument Panel
Fuse Block Main
Feed 2
BATT3 Instrument Panel
Fuse Block Main
Feed 3
BCM Body Control
Module
ECM Engine Control
Module
ECM Engine Control
PWR TRN Module/Powertrain
ENG SNSR Miscellaneous
Engine Sensors
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage EPB Electric Parking
with all of the fuses, relays, and Brake
features shown. A/C Heater, Ventilation,
and Air Conditioning FAN1 Cooling Fan 1
Fuses Usage
System FAN3 Cooling Fan 3
ABS Antilock Brake
BATT1 Instrument Panel FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps
System
Fuse Block Main
Feed 1 FRT WPR Front Wiper Motor
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-33
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage

FUEL/VAC Fuel Pump/ PRK Parking Lamps FRT Front Fog Lamps
Vacuum Pump LP RH* (Right) (Europe Park FOG RLY
Lamps)
HDLP Headlamp Washer FUEL/VAC Fuel Pump/Vacuum
WASHER PWM FAN Pulse Width PUMP RLY Pump Relay
Modulation Fan
HI High-Beam HDLP Headlamp Washer
BEAM LH Headlamp (Left) REAR Rear Window WSHR RLY
DEFOG Defogger
HI High-Beam HI High-Beam
BEAM RH Headlamp (Right) REAR WPR Rear Wiper Motor BEAM RLY Headlamps
HORN Horn SPARE Not Used LO Low-Beam
BEAM RLY Headlamps
HTD Heated Washer STOP Stoplamps
WASH/MIR Fluid/Heated Mirrors LAMP PWR/ Powertrain
TRN RLY
IGN COIL A Ignition Coil A STRTR Starter
REAR Rear Window
IGN COIL B Ignition Coil B TCM Transmission
DEFOG Defogger
Control Module
LO Low-Beam RLY
BEAM LH Headlamp (Left) TRLR Trailer Parking
STOP Stoplamps
PRK LP Lamps
LO Low-Beam LAMP RLY
BEAM RH Headlamp (Right)
Relays Usage STRTR RLY Starter
PRK LP LH Parking Lamps (Left)
FAN1 RLY Cooling Fan 1 WPR Wiper Control
PRK LP RH Parking Lamps CNTRL RLY
(Right) FAN2 RLY Cooling Fan 2
WPR Wiper Speed
FAN3 RLY Cooling Fan 3 SPD RLY
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-34 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel Fuse

Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
on the passenger side of the lower
console.
Pull the latch of the fuse box cover

straight back to access the fuses.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-35
The vehicle may not have all of the Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
fuses, relays, and features shown.
Fuses Usage BCM Body Control FSCM Fuel System
(TRN SIG) Module (Turn Control Module
AMP Amplifier Signal)
FSCM Fuel System
APO JACK Auxiliary Power BCM Body Control VENT SOL Control Module
(CONSOLE) Outlet Jack (VBATT) Module (Battery Vent Solenoid
APO JACK Auxiliary Power Voltage)
HEATING Heating Mat Switch
(REAR Outlet Jack Rear CIGAR Cigarette Lighter MAT SW
CARGO) Cargo
CIM Communications HTD Heated Seat
AWD/VENT All-Wheel Drive/ Integration Module SEAT PWR Power
Ventilation
CLSTR Instrument Cluster HVAC BLWR Heating,
BCM (CTSY) Body Control Ventilation, and Air
Module (Courtesy) DRL Daytime Running
Conditioning
Lamps
BCM Body Control Blower
(DIMMER) Module (Dimmer) DR/LCK Driver Door Lock
IPC Instrument Panel
BCM (INT Body Control DRVR Driver Power Seat Cluster
LIGHT) Module (Interior PWR SEAT
ISRVM/RCM Inside Rearview
Light) DRV/ Driver Power Mirror/Remote
BCM Body Control PWR WNDW Window Compass Module
(PRK/TN) Module (Parking/ F/DOOR Fuel Door Lock KEY Key Capture
Turn Signal) LOCK CAPTURE
BCM (STOP) Body Control FRT WSR Front Washer L/GATE Liftgate
Module (Stoplamp)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-36 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage

LOGISTIC Logistic Mode S/ROOF Sunroof Battery CIGAR Cigarette and
MODE BATT APO Auxiliary Power
JACK RLY Outlet
OSRVM Outside Rearview SSPS Speed Sensitive
Mirror Power Steering RUN/ Run/Crank
CRNK RLY
PASS Passenger Power STR/ Steering Wheel
PWR WNDW Window WHL SW Switch RUN RLY Run
PWR DIODE Power Diode TRLR Trailer
PWR/ Power Moding TRLR BATT Trailer Battery
MODING
XBCM Export Body
RADIO Radio Control Module
RR FOG Rear Defogger XM/ SiriusXM Satellite
HVAC/DLC Radio (If
RUN 2 Power Battery Key
Equipped)/Heating,
On Run
Ventilation, and Air
RUN/CRNK Run Crank Conditioning/Data
Link Connection
SDM (BATT) Safety Diagnosis
Module (Battery)
Relays Usage
SDM (IGN 1) Safety Diagnosis
Module (Ignition 1) ACC/ Accessory/Run
RAP RLY Accessory Power
SPARE Spare
S/ROOF Sunroof
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-37
Wheels and Tires Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

Tires and a serious crash. See . Worn or old tires can
Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on cause a crash. If the tread
high-quality tires made by a page 9-10. is badly worn,
leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose replace them.
the warranty manual for the same danger as . Replace any tires that
information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The have been damaged by
warranty and where to get resulting crash could impacts with potholes,
service. For additional cause serious injury. curbs, etc.
information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently . Improperly repaired tires
manufacturer. to maintain the can cause a crash. Only
recommended pressure. the dealer or an
{ Warning Tire pressure should be authorized tire service
checked when the tires center should repair,
. Poorly maintained and are cold.
improperly used tires are replace, dismount, and
dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more mount the tires.
likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in
. Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
cause overheating as a excess of 56 km/h
impact — such as when (35 mph) on slippery
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout surfaces such as snow,
tires at the recommended mud, ice, etc. Excessive
(Continued) pressure. spinning may cause the
(Continued) tires to explode.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-38 Vehicle Care
See Tire Pressure for traction or performance as winter

. Use only radial ply tires of the
High-Speed Operation on tires on snow or ice-covered roads. same size, load range, and
See Winter Tires on page 10-38. speed rating as the original
page 10-45 for inflation pressure equipment tires.
adjustment for high-speed
driving. Winter Tires Winter tires with the same speed
This vehicle was not originally rating as the original equipment tires
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
All-Season Tires equipped with winter tires. Winter
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
tires are designed for increased
This vehicle may come with tires with a lower speed rating are
traction on snow and ice-covered
all-season tires. These tires are chosen, never exceed the tire's
roads. Consider installing winter
designed to provide good overall maximum speed capability.
tires on the vehicle if frequent
performance on most road surfaces
driving on ice or snow covered
and weather conditions. Original
roads is expected. See your dealer Summer Tires
equipment tires designed to GM's
for details regarding winter tire This vehicle may come with high
specific tire performance criteria
availability and proper tire selection. performance summer tires. These
have a TPC specification code
Also, see Buying New Tires on tires have a special tread and
molded onto the sidewall. Original
page 10-52. compound that are optimized for
equipment all-season tires can be
identified by the last two characters With winter tires, there may be maximum dry and wet road
of this TPC code, which will decreased dry road traction, performance. This special tread and
be “MS.” increased road noise, and shorter compound will have decreased
tread life. After changing to winter performance in cold climates, and
Consider installing winter tires on on ice and snow. We recommend
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
the vehicle if frequent driving on installing winter tires on the vehicle
handling and braking.
snow or ice-covered roads is if frequent driving at temperatures
expected. All-season tires provide If using winter tires: below approximately 5°C (40°F) or
adequate performance for most . Use tires of the same brand and on ice or snow covered roads is
winter driving conditions, but they tread type on all four wheel expected. See Winter Tires on
may not offer the same level of positions. page 10-38.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-39
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the digits represent the week
“Tire Size” illustration later in this (01–52) and the last two digits,
Useful information about a tire is section. the year. For example, the third
molded into its sidewall. The week of the year 2010 would
examples show a typical (2) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date
passenger vehicle tire and a of 0310.
compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to (4) Tire Identification Number
GM's specific tire performance (TIN): The letters and numbers
criteria have a TPC specification following the DOT (Department
code molded onto the sidewall. of Transportation) code are the
GM's TPC specifications meet or Tire Identification Number (TIN).
exceed all federal safety The TIN shows the
guidelines. manufacturer and plant code,
(3) DOT (Department of tire size, and date the tire was
Transportation): The manufactured. The TIN is
Department of Transportation molded onto both sides of the
(DOT) code indicates that the tire, although only one side may
tire is in compliance with the have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
U.S. Department of (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
(1) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle of cord and number of plies in
combination of letters and Safety Standards. the sidewall and under the tread.
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height, DOT Tire Date of (6) Uniform Tire Quality
aspect ratio, construction type, Manufacture: The last four Grading (UTQG): Tire
digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufacturers are required to
manufactured date. The first two grade tires based on three
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-40 Vehicle Care
performance factors: treadwear, (2) Temporary Use Only: The (4) Maximum Cold Inflation
traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary Load Limit: Maximum load that
resistance. For more information use tire should not be driven at can be carried and the
see Uniform Tire Quality speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). maximum pressure needed to
Grading on page 10-54. The compact spare tire is for support that load.
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation emergency use when a regular (5) Tire Inflation: The
Load Limit: Maximum load that road tire has lost air and gone temporary use tire or compact
can be carried and the flat. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire should be inflated to
maximum pressure needed to spare tire, see Compact Spare 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
support that load. Tire on page 10-65 and If a Tire information on tire pressure and
Goes Flat on page 10-57. inflation see Tire Pressure on
(3) Tire Identification Number page 10-44.
(TIN): The letters and numbers (6) Tire Size: A combination of
following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a
of Transportation) code are the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
Tire Identification Number (TIN). construction type, and service
The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the
manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size
tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary
manufactured. The TIN is use only.
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may (7) TPC Spec (Tire
Compact Spare Tire Example Performance Criteria
have the date of manufacture.
(1) Tire Ply Material : The type Specification): Original
of cord and number of plies in equipment tires designed to
the sidewall and under the tread. GM's specific tire performance
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-41
criteria have a TPC specification vehicle tire engineered to (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
code molded onto the sidewall. standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches.
GM's TPC specifications meet or and Rim Association. (6) Service Description: These
exceed all federal safety (2) Tire Width: The three-digit characters represent the load
guidelines. number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents
Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire
Tire Size (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit is certified to carry. The speed
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a
The following is an example of a
height-to-width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load.
typical passenger vehicle
tire size. For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and
item 3 of the illustration, it would Definitions
mean that the tire's sidewall is Air Pressure: The amount of
60 percent as high as it is wide. air inside the tire pressing
(4) Construction Code: A letter outward on each square inch of
code is used to indicate the type the tire. Air pressure is
of ply construction in the tire. expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: or psi (pounds per square inch).
The United States version of a The letter R means radial ply
metric tire sizing system. The construction; the letter D means Accessory Weight: The
letter P as the first character in diagonal or bias ply combined weight of optional
the tire size means a passenger construction; and the letter B accessories. Some examples of
means belted-bias ply optional accessories are
construction.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-42 Vehicle Care
automatic transmission, power before a tire has built up heat GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure Rating for the front axle. See
conditioning. on page 10-44. Vehicle Load Limits on
Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a page 9-10.
of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the Rating for the rear axle. See
cords between the plies and the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, Vehicle Load Limits on
tread. Cords may be made from and coolant, but without page 9-10.
steel or other reinforcing passengers and cargo. Intended Outboard Sidewall :
materials. DOT Markings: A code molded The side of an asymmetrical tire
Bead: The tire bead contains into the sidewall of a tire that must always face outward
steel wires wrapped by steel signifying that the tire is in when mounted on a vehicle.
cords that hold the tire onto compliance with the U.S. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
the rim. Department of Transportation unit for air pressure.
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A
in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification tire used on light duty trucks and
alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric some multipurpose passenger
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also vehicles.
the tread. identify the tire manufacturer, Load Index: An assigned
Cold Tire Pressure: The production plant, brand, and number ranging from 1 to 279
amount of air pressure in a tire, date of production. that corresponds to the load
measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight carrying capacity of a tire.
or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-10.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-43
Maximum Inflation Pressure: outward when mounted on a Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
The maximum air pressure to vehicle. The side of the tire that tire in which the ply cords that
which a cold tire can be inflated. contains a whitewall, bears extend to the beads are laid at
The maximum air pressure is white lettering, or bears 90 degrees to the centerline of
molded onto the sidewall. manufacturer, brand, and/or the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is Rim: A metal support for a tire
load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same and upon which the tire beads
maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall are seated.
pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A between the tread and the bead.
Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and Speed Rating: An
weight, accessory weight, alphanumeric code assigned to
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
a tire indicating the maximum
production options weight. Recommended Inflation speed at which a tire can
Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle operate.
number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown Traction: The friction between
is designed to seat multiplied by the tire and the road surface.
68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 10-44 and The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Load Limits on Tread: The portion of a tire that
Occupant Distribution : page 9-10. comes into contact with
Designated seating positions. the road.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
side of an asymmetrical tire that bands, sometimes called wear
has a particular side that faces bars, that show across the tread
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-44 Vehicle Care
of a tire when only 1.6 mm Vehicle Maximum Load on the

(1/16 in) of tread remains. See Tire: Load on an individual tire { Caution
When It Is Time for New Tires due to curb weight, accessory Neither tire underinflation nor
on page 10-51. weight, occupant weight, and overinflation is good.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality cargo weight. Underinflated tires, or tires
Grading Standards): A tire Vehicle Placard: A label that do not have enough air,
information system that provides permanently attached to a can result in:
consumers with ratings for a vehicle showing the vehicle . Tire overloading and
tire's traction, temperature, and capacity weight and the original overheating which could
treadwear. Ratings are equipment tire size and lead to a blowout.
determined by tire recommended inflation pressure.
manufacturers using See “Tire and Loading
. Premature or
government testing procedures. Information Label” under Vehicle irregular wear.
The ratings are molded into the Load Limits on page 9-10. . Poor handling.
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on Tire Pressure
. Reduced fuel economy.
page 10-54. Overinflated tires, or tires that
Tires need the correct amount of
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The have too much air, can
air pressure to operate
result in:
number of designated seating effectively.
positions multiplied by . Unusual wear.
68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated . Poor handling.
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
. Rough ride.
. Needless damage from
road hazards.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-45
The Tire and Loading How to Check Recheck the tire pressure with
Information label on the vehicle Use a good quality pocket-type the tire gauge.
indicates the original equipment gauge to check tire pressure. Return the valve caps on the
tires and the correct cold tire Proper tire inflation cannot be valve stems to prevent leaks
inflation pressures. The determined by looking at the tire. and keep out dirt and moisture.
recommended pressure is the Check the tire inflation pressure
minimum air pressure needed to when the tires are cold, meaning Tire Pressure for
support the vehicle's maximum the vehicle has not been driven
load carrying capacity. See High-Speed Operation
for at least three hours or no
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-10.
more than 1.6 km (1 mi). { Warning
Remove the valve cap from the
How the vehicle is loaded tire valve stem. Press the tire Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
affects vehicle handling and ride (100 mph) or higher, puts an
gauge firmly onto the valve to
comfort. Never load the vehicle additional strain on tires.
get a pressure measurement. Sustained high-speed driving
with more weight than it was If the cold tire inflation pressure
designed to carry. causes excessive heat buildup
matches the recommended and can cause sudden tire failure.
When to Check pressure on the Tire and You could have a crash and you
Loading Information label, no or others could be killed. Some
Check the tires once a month or
further adjustment is necessary. high-speed rated tires require
more. Do not forget the compact
If the inflation pressure is low, inflation pressure adjustment for
spare, if the vehicle has one.
add air until the recommended high-speed operation. When
The cold compact spare tire
pressure is reached. If the speed limits and road conditions
pressure should be at 420 kPa
inflation pressure is high, press are such that a vehicle can be
(60 psi). See Compact Spare
on the metal stem in the center driven at high speeds, make sure
Tire on page 10-65.
of the tire valve to release air. (Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-46 Vehicle Care
Example: vehicle placard or tire inflation

Warning (Continued) pressure label. (If your vehicle has
The maximum load and inflation
pressure is molded on the tire tires of a different size than the size
the tires are rated for high-speed indicated on the vehicle placard or
operation, in excellent condition, sidewall, in small letters, near the
rim flange. It will read something like tire inflation pressure label, you
and set to the correct cold tire should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for the this: Maximum load 690 kg
(1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. inflation pressure for those tires.)
vehicle load.
Press. As an added safety feature, your
For this example, set the inflation vehicle has been equipped with a
Vehicles with P235/55R18 size tires tire pressure monitoring system
require inflation pressure adjustment pressure for high‐speed driving at
262 kPa (38 psi). (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
when driving the vehicle at speeds pressure telltale when one or more
of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. of your tires is significantly
Set the cold inflation pressure to the Tire Pressure Monitor under-inflated.
maximum inflation pressure shown System Accordingly, when the low tire
on the tire sidewall,
The Tire Pressure Monitor System pressure telltale illuminates, you
or 262 kPa (38 psi), whichever is
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor should stop and check your tires as
lower. See the example following.
technology to check tire pressure soon as possible, and inflate them
Return the tires to the
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor to the proper pressure. Driving on a
recommended cold tire inflation
the air pressure in your tires and significantly under-inflated tire
pressure when high-speed driving
transmit tire pressure readings to a causes the tire to overheat and can
has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits
receiver located in the vehicle. lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
on page 9-10 and Tire Pressure on
Each tire, including the spare (if also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
page 10-44.
provided), should be checked tread life, and may affect the
monthly when cold and inflated to vehicle's handling and stopping
the inflation pressure recommended ability.
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-47
Please note that the TPMS is not a wheels on the vehicle that prevent the tires and transmit the tire
substitute for proper tire the TPMS from functioning properly. pressure readings to a receiver
maintenance, and it is the driver's Always check the TPMS malfunction located in the vehicle.
responsibility to maintain correct tire telltale after replacing one or more
pressure, even if under-inflation has tires or wheels on your vehicle to
not reached the level to trigger ensure that the replacement or
illumination of the TPMS low tire alternate tires and wheels allow the
pressure telltale. TPMS to continue to function
Your vehicle has also been properly.
equipped with a TPMS malfunction See Tire Pressure Monitor
indicator to indicate when the Operation on page 10-47. When a low tire pressure condition
system is not operating properly. is detected, the TPMS illuminates
See Radio Frequency Statement on
The TPMS malfunction indicator is the low tire pressure warning light
page 13-12.
combined with the low tire pressure on the instrument cluster. If the
telltale. When the system detects a warning light comes on, stop as
malfunction, the telltale will flash for Tire Pressure Monitor soon as possible and inflate the
approximately one minute and then Operation tires to the recommended pressure
remain continuously illuminated. shown on the tire loading
This vehicle may have a Tire
This sequence will continue upon information label. See Vehicle Load
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
subsequent vehicle start-ups as Limits on page 9-10.
The TPMS is designed to warn the
long as the malfunction exists. driver when a low tire pressure The low tire pressure warning light
When the malfunction indicator is condition exists. TPMS sensors are comes on at each ignition cycle until
illuminated, the system may not be mounted onto each tire and wheel the tires are inflated to the correct
able to detect or signal low tire assembly, excluding the spare tire inflation pressure.
pressure as intended. TPMS and wheel assembly. The TPMS The low tire pressure warning light
malfunctions may occur for a variety sensors monitor the air pressure in may come on in cool weather when
of reasons, including the installation the vehicle is first started, and then
of replacement or alternate tires or
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-48 Vehicle Care
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This TPMS Malfunction Light

may be an early indicator that the { Caution The TPMS will not function properly
air pressure is getting low and
Tire sealant materials are not all if one or more of the TPMS sensors
needs to be inflated to the proper
the same. A non-approved tire are missing or inoperable. When the
pressure.
sealant could damage the TPMS system detects a malfunction, the
A Tire and Loading Information label sensors. TPMS sensor damage low tire pressure warning light
shows the size of the original caused by using an incorrect tire flashes for about one minute and
equipment tires and the correct sealant is not covered by the then stays on for the remainder of
inflation pressure for the tires when the ignition cycle. The malfunction
vehicle warranty. Always use only
they are cold. See Vehicle Load light comes on at each ignition cycle
the GM approved tire sealant
Limits on page 9-10, for an example until the problem is corrected. Some
of the Tire and Loading Information available through your dealer or
of the conditions that can cause the
label and its location. Also see Tire included in the vehicle.
malfunction light to come on are:
Pressure on page 10-44. . One of the road tires has been
The TPMS system can warn about replaced with the spare tire. The
a low tire pressure condition but it spare tire does not have a
does not replace normal tire TPMS sensor. The malfunction
maintenance. See Tire Inspection light should go off after the road
on page 10-50, Tire Rotation on tire is replaced and the sensor
page 10-50 and Tires on matching process is performed
page 10-37. successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Matching Process" later in this
section.
. The TPMS sensor matching
process was not done or not
completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle's tires. The
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-49
malfunction light should go off TPMS Sensor Matching There are two minutes to match the
once the TPMS sensor matching Process first tire/wheel position, and
process is performed five minutes overall to match all four
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Each TPMS sensor has a unique tire/wheel positions. If it takes
Matching Process” later in this identification code. The identification longer, the matching process stops
section. code needs to be matched to a new and must be restarted.
tire/wheel position after rotating the
. One or more TPMS sensors are vehicle’s tires or replacing one or The TPMS matching process is:
missing or damaged. The more of the TPMS sensors. Also, 1. Set the parking brake.
malfunction light should go off the TPMS sensor matching process
when the TPMS sensors are should be performed after replacing 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
installed and the sensor a spare tire with a road tire the engine off.
matching process is performed containing the TPMS sensor. The 3. Press and hold the RKE
successfully. See your dealer for malfunction light should go off at the transmitter's Q and K buttons at
service. next ignition cycle. The sensors are the same time, for about
. Replacement tires or wheels do matched to the tire/wheel positions, three seconds. The horn will
not match the original equipment using a TPMS relearn tool, in the sound twice to indicate the
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels following order: driver side front tire, receiver is ready for the sensor
other than those recommended passenger side front tire, passenger matching process to begin.
could prevent the TPMS from side rear tire, and driver side rear.
functioning properly. See Buying See your dealer for service or to 4. Start with the driver side front
New Tires on page 10-52. purchase a relearn tool. A TPMS tire. The driver side turn signal
relearn tool can also be purchased. lamp comes on.
. Operating electronic devices or See Tire Pressure Monitor
being near facilities using radio 5. Place the relearn tool against
Sensor Activation Tool at the tire sidewall, near the valve
wave frequencies similar to the www.gmtoolsandequipment.com or
TPMS could cause the TPMS stem. Then press the button to
call 1-800-GM TOOLS activate the TPMS sensor.
sensors to malfunction. (1-800-468-6657). A horn chirp confirms that the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-50 Vehicle Care
sensor identification code has Tire Inspection

. The tire has a puncture, cut,
been matched to this tire and or other damage that cannot
wheel position. We recommend that the tires, be repaired well because of
including the spare tire, if the the size or location of the
6. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire. The passenger side vehicle has one, be inspected damage.
front turn signal lamp comes on. for signs of wear or damage at
Repeat the procedure in Step 5. least once a month. Tire Rotation
7. Proceed to the passenger side Replace the tire if: Tires should be rotated every
rear tire. The passenger side . The indicators at three or 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
rear turn signal lamp comes on. Maintenance Schedule on
Repeat the procedure in Step 5.
more places around the tire
can be seen. page 11-2.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire. The driver side rear turn
. There is cord or fabric Tires are rotated to achieve a
signal lamp comes on. Repeat showing through the tire's uniform wear for all tires. The
the procedure in Step 5. The rubber. first rotation is the most
horn sounds two times to important.
. The tread or sidewall is
indicate the sensor identification Anytime unusual wear is
code has been matched to the cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or noticed, rotate the tires as soon
driver side rear tire, and the
TPMS sensor matching process fabric. as possible, check for proper tire
is no longer active. inflation pressure, and check for
. The tire has a bump, bulge, damaged tires or wheels. If the
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. or split. unusual wear continues after the
10. Set all four tires to the rotation, check the wheel
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-51
alignment. See When It Is Time Loading Information label after

for New Tires on page 10-51 the tires have been rotated. See Warning (Continued)
and Wheel Replacement on Tire Pressure on page 10-44 wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
page 10-56. and Vehicle Load Limits on an emergency, a cloth or a paper
page 9-10. towel can be used; however, use
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor a scraper or wire brush later to
System. See Tire Pressure remove all rust or dirt.
Monitor Operation on
page 10-47. Lightly coat the center of the
Check that all wheel nuts are wheel hub with wheel bearing
properly tightened. See “Wheel grease after a wheel change or
Nut Torque” under Capacities tire rotation to prevent corrosion
and Specifications on or rust build-up. Do not get
page 12-2. grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
Use this rotation pattern when
{ Warning
rotating the tires. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the When It Is Time for New
Do not include the compact parts to which it is fastened, can Tires
spare tire in the tire rotation. make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come Factors such as maintenance,
Adjust the front and rear tires to temperatures, driving speeds,
off and cause an accident. When
the recommended inflation vehicle loading, and road conditions
changing a wheel, remove any
affect the wear rate of the tires.
pressure on the Tire and rust or dirt from places where the
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-52 Vehicle Care
equipped, be replaced after six at least a month, remove the tires or

years, regardless of tread wear. The raise the vehicle to reduce the
tire manufacture date is the last four weight from the tires.
digits of the DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN) which is molded into Buying New Tires
one side of the tire sidewall. The
first two digits represent the week GM has developed and matched
(01–52) and the last two digits, the specific tires for the vehicle. The
year. For example, the third week of original equipment tires installed
the year 2010 would have a were designed to meet General
four-digit DOT date of 0310. Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Vehicle Storage Specification (TPC Spec)
Treadwear indicators are one way to system rating. When
Tires age when stored normally replacement tires are needed,
tell when it is time for new tires.
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park GM strongly recommends
Treadwear indicators appear when
a vehicle that will be stored for at
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
buying tires with the same TPC
or less of tread remaining. See Tire Spec rating.
area away from direct sunlight to
Inspection on page 10-50 and Tire
slow aging. This area should be free GM's exclusive TPC Spec
Rotation on page 10-50.
of grease, gasoline, or other system considers over a dozen
The rubber in tires ages over time. substances that can deteriorate critical specifications that impact
This also applies to the spare tire, rubber.
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
the overall performance of the
Parking for an extended period can vehicle, including brake system
never used. Multiple factors
cause flat spots on the tires that performance, ride and handling,
including temperatures, loading
may result in vibrations while traction control, and tire
conditions, and inflation pressure
driving. When storing a vehicle for pressure monitoring
maintenance affect how fast aging
takes place. GM recommends that performance. GM's TPC Spec
tires, including the spare if
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-53
number is molded onto the tire's Winter tires with the same speed
sidewall near the tire size. If the rating as the original equipment { Warning
tires have an all-season tread tires may not be available for H, Mixing tires of different sizes,
design, the TPC Spec number V, W, Y and ZR speed rated brands, or types may cause
will be followed by MS for mud tires. Never exceed the winter loss of control of the vehicle,
and snow. See Tire Sidewall tires’ maximum speed capability resulting in a crash or other
Labeling on page 10-39. when using winter tires with a vehicle damage. Use the
GM recommends replacing worn lower speed rating. correct size, brand, and type
tires in complete sets of four. of tires on all wheels.
Uniform tread depth on all tires { Warning
will help to maintain the Tires could explode during
performance of the vehicle. improper service. Attempting { Warning
Braking and handling to mount or dismount a tire
performance may be adversely could cause injury or death. Using bias-ply tires on the
affected if all the tires are not Only your dealer or authorized vehicle may cause the wheel
replaced at the same time. tire service center should rim flanges to develop cracks
If proper rotation and mount or dismount the tires. after many miles of driving.
maintenance have been done, A tire and/or wheel could fail
all four tires should wear out at suddenly and cause a crash.
about the same time. See Tire Use only radial-ply tires with
Rotation on page 10-50. the wheels on the vehicle.
However, if it is necessary to
replace only one axle set of If the vehicle tires must be
worn tires, place the new tires replaced with a tire that does not
on the rear axle. have a TPC Spec number, make
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-54 Vehicle Care
sure they are the same size, may be affected. If the vehicle has Uniform Tire Quality
load range, speed rating, and electronic systems such as antilock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
Grading
construction (radial) as the
original tires. control, electronic stability control, Quality grades can be found
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance where applicable on the tire
Vehicles that have a tire of these systems can also be sidewall between tread shoulder
pressure monitoring system affected. and maximum section width. For
could give an inaccurate example:
low-pressure warning if non-TPC { Warning
Spec rated tires are installed. Treadwear 200 Traction AA
See Tire Pressure Monitor If different sized wheels are used, Temperature A
System on page 10-46. there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety if The following information relates
The Tire and Loading tires not recommended for those to the system developed by the
Information label indicates the wheels are selected. This United States National Highway
original equipment tires on the increases the chance of a crash Traffic Safety Administration
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits and serious injury. Only use GM (NHTSA), which grades tires by
on page 9-10. specific wheel and tire systems treadwear, traction, and
developed for the vehicle, and temperature performance. This
Different Size Tires and have them properly installed by a applies only to vehicles sold in
Wheels GM certified technician. the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of
If wheels or tires are installed that most passenger car tires. The
are a different size than the original See Buying New Tires on
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle page 10-52 and Accessories and Uniform Tire Quality Grading
performance, including its braking, Modifications on page 10-2. (UTQG) system does not apply
ride and handling characteristics, to deep tread, winter tires,
stability, and resistance to rollover compact spare tires, tires with
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-55
nominal rim diameters of graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include
or to some limited-production the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
tires. graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
While the tires available on performance of tires depends characteristics.
General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of
Temperature
and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A
respect to these grades, they
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C,
must also conform to federal
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance
safety requirements and
differences in road to the generation of heat and its
additional General Motors Tire
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
Performance Criteria (TPC)
tested under controlled
standards. Traction conditions on a specified indoor
All Passenger Car Tires Must The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Conform to Federal Safety highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
Requirements In Addition To and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
These Grades. the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
Treadwear pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade
The treadwear grade is a specified government test C corresponds to a level of
comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and performance which all
wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet
under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety
specified government test Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and
course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-56 Vehicle Care
performance on the laboratory surface variations such as troughs Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
test wheel than the minimum or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
required by law. Warning: The vibrating when driving on a smooth System (TPMS) sensors with new
temperature grade for this tire is road, the tires and wheels may need GM original equipment parts.
to be rebalanced. See your dealer
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
for proper diagnosis. { Warning
overloaded. Excessive speed, Wheel Replacement Using the wrong replacement
underinflation, or excessive wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
loading, either separately or in Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or nuts can be dangerous. It could
combination, can cause heat affect the braking and handling of
buildup and possible tire failure. corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
wheel nuts should be replaced. and cause loss of control, causing
Wheel Alignment and Tire If the wheel leaks air, replace it. a crash. Always use the correct
Balance Some aluminum wheels can be wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
repaired. See your dealer if any of nuts for replacement.
The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to these conditions exist.
provide the longest tire life and best Your dealer will know the kind of
overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing
wheel that is needed. { Caution
Each new wheel should have the
are not necessary on a regular same load-carrying capacity, The wrong wheel can also cause
basis. Consider an alignment check diameter, width, offset, and be problems with bearing life, brake
if there is unusual tire wear or the mounted the same way as the one it cooling, speedometer or
vehicle is significantly pulling to one replaces. odometer calibration, headlamp
side or the other. Some slight pull to aim, bumper height, vehicle
the left or right, depending on the
(Continued)
crown of the road and/or other road
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-57
Caution (Continued)
Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
ground clearance, and tire or tire { Warning while driving, especially if the tires
chain clearance to the body and are maintained properly. See Tires
chassis. Do not use tire chains. There is on page 10-37. If air goes out of a
not enough clearance. Tire chains tire, it is much more likely to leak
used on a vehicle without the out slowly. But if there ever is a
Used Replacement Wheels proper amount of clearance can blowout, here are a few tips about
cause damage to the brakes, what to expect and what to do:
{ Warning suspension, or other vehicle
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
parts. The area damaged by the
Replacing a wheel with a used creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
tire chains could cause loss of toward that side. Take your foot off
one is dangerous. How it has control and a crash.
been used or how far it has been the accelerator pedal and grip the
driven may be unknown. It could Use another type of traction steering wheel firmly. Steer to
device only if its manufacturer maintain lane position, and then
fail suddenly and cause a crash.
recommends it for the vehicle's gently brake to a stop, well off the
When replacing wheels, use a
tire size combination and road road, if possible.
new GM original equipment
wheel. conditions. Follow that A rear blowout, particularly on a
manufacturer's instructions. To curve, acts much like a skid and
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow may require the same correction as
and readjust or remove the used in a skid. Stop pressing the
traction device if it contacts the accelerator pedal and steer to
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. straighten the vehicle. It may be
If traction devices are used, install very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
them on the front tires. to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-58 Vehicle Care
{ Warning Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

Driving on a flat tire will cause changing a flat tire. If it is used for 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
permanent damage to the tire. anything else, you or others could 2. Put an automatic
Re-inflating a tire after it has been be badly injured or killed if the transmission in P (Park) or a
driven on while severely vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack manual transmission in
underinflated or flat may cause a is provided with the vehicle, only 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
blowout and a serious crash. use it for changing a flat tire.
3. Turn off the engine and do
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
not restart while the vehicle
that has been driven on while If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire is raised.
severely underinflated or flat. and wheel damage by driving slowly
Have your dealer or an authorized 4. Do not allow passengers to
to a level place, well off the road,
tire service center repair or remain in the vehicle.
if possible. Turn on the hazard
replace the flat tire as soon as warning flashers. See Hazard 5. Place wheel blocks on both
possible. Warning Flashers on page 6-3. sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
{ Warning being changed.
{ Warning Changing a tire can be When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
Lifting a vehicle and getting under dangerous. The vehicle can slip use the following example as a
it to do maintenance or repairs is off the jack and roll over or fall guide to assist in the placement of
dangerous without the causing injury or death. Find a the wheel blocks (1).
appropriate safety equipment and level place to change the tire. To
training. If a jack is provided with help prevent the vehicle from
the vehicle, it is designed only for moving:
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-59
1. Wheel Block
2. Flat Tire
The following information explains
2. Push the levers on the load floor. 4. Remove the tire protector foam.
how to repair or change a tire.
3. Lift the load floor and hang the
Tire Changing hook to the tailgate opening.
The lip of the cargo cover will
Removing the Spare Tire and need to be flipped back for the
Tools load floor to reach the tailgate
To access the spare tire: opening.
1. Open the liftgate.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-60 Vehicle Care
5. Remove the wheel retainer bolt 1. Remove the wing-bolt (2) from
holding down the spare tire by the jack.
turning it counterclockwise. 2. Remove the jack (3) and
6. Remove the compact spare tire. tool bag (1).
See Compact Spare Tire on 3. Remove the straps holding the
page 10-65. bag containing the wheel wrench
The tools are located between the and extension jack handle,
compact spare tire and the liftgate. if equipped.
To access the tools: Remove the wheel wrench and
extension jack handle,
if equipped, from the bag.
Removing the Flat Tire and 2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen
Installing the Spare Tire all the wheel nuts. Do not
remove them yet.
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10-57.
1. Tool Bag
2. Wing-bolt
3. Jack
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-61
{ Warning { Warning
Getting under a vehicle when it is Lifting a vehicle and getting under
lifted on a jack is dangerous. it to do maintenance or repairs is
If the vehicle slips off the jack, dangerous without the
you could be badly injured or appropriate safety equipment and
killed. Never get under a vehicle training. If a jack is provided with
when it is supported only by the vehicle, it is designed only for
a jack. changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
3. Position the lift head at the jack { Warning is provided with the vehicle, only
location nearest the flat tire.
Make sure all of the jack lift Raising the vehicle with the jack use it for changing a flat tire.
head is touching the jacking improperly positioned can
flange under the body. Do not damage the vehicle and even
place the jack under a body
panel. The lower body panel has
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
{ Caution
an arrow to aid in locating the damage, be sure to fit the jack lift Make sure that the jack lift head
jacking location. head into the proper location is in the correct position or you
before raising the vehicle. may damage your vehicle. The
repairs would not be covered by
your warranty.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-62 Vehicle Care
4. If you have a coin/pierce jack,

attach the jack handle extension { Warning
to the jack by sliding the hook
through the end of the jack and Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
insert the other end of the jack parts to which it is fastened, can
handle into the wrench. make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
If you have a hex-head jack, off and cause an accident. When
attach the jack lift-assist tool by changing a wheel, remove any
placing the hex of the jack
rust or dirt from places where the
lift-assist tool over the hex head
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
of the jack.
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Hex Head Jack and Wrench towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the remove all rust or dirt.
jack handle clockwise. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room 9. Place the compact spare tire on
for the road tire to be removed. the wheel-mounting surface.
6. Remove all of the wheel nuts. 10. Reinstall the wheel nuts.
Tighten each nut by hand until
7. Remove the flat tire. the wheel is held against
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the the hub.
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces,
Coin/Pierce Jack and Wrench and spare wheel.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-63
{ Warning { Warning Caution (Continued)

Never use oil or grease on bolts Wheel nuts that are improperly or sequence and to the proper
or nuts because the nuts might incorrectly tightened can cause torque specification. See
come loose. The vehicle's wheel the wheels to become loose or Capacities and Specifications for
could fall off, causing a crash. come off. The wheel nuts should the wheel nut torque specification.
be tightened with a torque wrench
11. Lower the vehicle by turning to the proper torque specification 13. Lower the jack all the way and
the jack handle after replacing. Follow the torque remove the jack from under the
counterclockwise. specification supplied by the vehicle.
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel 14. Tighten the bolts firmly with the
nuts. See Capacities and wheel wrench.
Specifications on page 12-2 for When reinstalling full plastic covers
original equipment wheel nut or center caps, tighten all the plastic
torque specifications. caps hand snug, then tighten with
the wheel wrench an additional
one-quarter of a turn.
{ Caution { Caution
Improperly tightened wheel nuts Wheel covers will not fit on the
can lead to brake pulsation and vehicle's compact spare. If you try
rotor damage. To avoid expensive to put a wheel cover on the
12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in brake repairs, evenly tighten the compact spare, the cover or the
a crisscross sequence, as wheel nuts in the proper spare could be damaged.
shown.
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-64 Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire To store the flat or spare tire and 3. Reverse Steps 1–3 under
and Tools tools: “Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools” to replace the floor and
lock in place.
{ Warning
4. Place the flat, or damaged tire,
Storing a jack, a tire, or other face down on the bottom of the
equipment in the passenger spare tire compartment.
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
1. Tool Bag
2. Wing-bolt
3. Jack
1. Place the wheel wrench and
extension, if equipped, into the Before
tool bag (1) and use the straps
to secure the tool bag (1) to the
fully collapsed jack (3).
2. Install the jack (3) between the
back of the trunk and the
compact spare tire and secure
with the wing-bolt (2).
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-65
Compact Spare Tire
{ Warning
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
After 6. Place the wheel retainer bolt
onto the wheel stow rod and If this vehicle has a compact spare
5. Remove the disk from the tire, it was fully inflated when new;
retainer bolt. Turn the disk over tighten by turning it clockwise.
however, it can lose air over time.
and place it back on the The compact spare is for temporary Check the inflation pressure
retainer bolt. use only. Replace the compact regularly. It should be 420 kPa
Return the disk back to its spare tire with a full-size tire as (60 psi).
original position after removing soon as possible.
Stop as soon as possible and check
the flat tire from the spare tire that the spare tire is correctly
compartment and before storing inflated after being installed on the
the spare tire. vehicle. The compact spare tire is
designed for temporary use only.
The vehicle will perform differently
with the spare tire installed and it is
recommended that the vehicle
speed be limited to 80 km/h
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-66 Vehicle Care
(50 mph). To conserve the tread of Do not mix the compact spare tire or Jump Starting
the spare tire, have the standard tire wheel with other wheels or tires.
repaired or replaced as soon as They will not fit. Keep the spare tire For more information about the
convenient and return the spare tire and its wheel together. vehicle battery, see Battery on
to the storage area. page 10-23.
When using a compact spare tire, { Caution If the vehicle battery has run down,
the ABS and Traction Control you may want to use another
systems may engage until the spare Tire chains will not fit the compact vehicle and some jumper cables to
tire is recognized by the vehicle, spare. Using them can damage start your vehicle. Be sure to use
especially on slippery roads. Adjust the vehicle and the chains. Do not the following steps to do it safely.
driving to reduce possible use tire chains on the compact
wheel slip. spare. { Warning
{ Caution Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
When the compact spare is . They contain acid that can
installed, do not take the vehicle burn you.
through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact
. They contain gas that can
spare can get caught on the rails explode or ignite.
which can damage the tire, wheel, . They contain enough
and other parts of the vehicle. electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
Do not use the compact spare on exactly, some or all of these
other vehicles. things can hurt you.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-67
2. Get the vehicles close enough

{ Caution so the jumper cables can reach, Caution (Continued)
but be sure the vehicles are not
Ignoring these steps could result touching each other. If they are, warranty. Whenever possible, turn
in costly damage to the vehicle it could cause a ground off or unplug all accessories on
that would not be covered by the connection you do not want. You either vehicle when jump starting.
vehicle warranty. Trying to start would not be able to start your
the vehicle by pushing or pulling it vehicle, and the bad grounding 3. Turn off the ignition on both
will not work, and it could damage could damage the electrical vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
the vehicle. systems. accessories plugged into the
To avoid the possibility of the cigarette lighter or the accessory
1. Check the other vehicle. It must vehicles rolling, set the parking power outlet. Turn off the radio
have a 12-volt battery with a brake firmly on both vehicles and all lamps that are not
negative ground system. involved in the jump start needed. This will avoid sparks,
procedure. Put the transmission helping save both batteries and
the radio.
{ Caution in P (Park) before setting the
parking brake. 4. Open the hood on the other
If the other vehicle does not have vehicle and locate the
a 12-volt system with a negative { Caution positive (+) and negative (−)
ground, both vehicles can be terminal locations on that
damaged. Only use a vehicle that If any accessories are left on or vehicle.
has a 12-volt system with a plugged in during the jump
Open the hood on your vehicle
negative ground for jump starting. starting procedure, they could be and find the remote positive (+)
damaged. The repairs would not and remote negative (−) jump
be covered by the vehicle starting terminals.
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-68 Vehicle Care
{ Warning
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ Warning
Your vehicle is equipped with a Your vehicle is equipped with a Using an open flame near a
remote positive (+) terminal. This remote negative (−) terminal. battery can cause battery gas to
is located in the engine This is a stud next to the engine explode. People have been hurt
compartment on the driver side coolant surge tank, located at doing this, and some have been
of the vehicle, on the underhood the back of the engine blinded. Use a flashlight if you
fuse block. See Engine compartment on the driver side need more light.
Compartment Overview on of the vehicle. See Engine
Be sure the battery has enough
page 10-4 for more information Compartment Overview on
on location. page 10-4 for more information water. You do not need to add
on location. water to the battery installed in
To uncover the remote your new vehicle. But if a battery
positive (+) terminal, press the has filler caps, be sure the right
tab on the bottom of the fuse amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
block and lift the cover up.
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-69
5. Check that the jumper cables do battery. Use a remote

Warning (Continued) not have loose or missing positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
insulation. If they do, you could has one.
add water to take care of that get a shock. The vehicles could
first. If you do not, explosive gas 7. Do not let the other end touch
also be damaged. metal. Connect it to the
could be present.
Before you connect the cables, positive (+) terminal of the good
Battery fluid contains acid that here are some basic things you battery. Use a remote
can burn you. Do not get it on should know. Positive (+) will go positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
you. If you accidentally get it in to positive (+) or to a remote has one.
your eyes or on your skin, flush positive (+) terminal if the vehicle 8. Now connect the black
the place with water and get has one. Negative (−) will go to a negative (−) cable to the
medical help immediately. heavy, unpainted metal engine negative (−) terminal of the good
part or to a remote negative (−) battery. Use a remote
terminal if the vehicle has one. negative (−) terminal if the
{ Warning Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch
Fans or other moving engine short that would damage the anything until the next step. The
parts can injure you badly. Keep battery and maybe other parts. other end of the negative (−)
your hands away from moving Do not connect the negative (−) cable does not go to the dead
parts once the engine is running. cable to the negative (−) terminal battery. It goes to a heavy,
on the dead battery because this unpainted metal engine part or
can cause sparks. to a remote negative (−) terminal
6. Connect the red positive (+) on the vehicle with the dead
cable to the positive (+) terminal battery.
on the vehicle with the dead 9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable away from the
dead battery, but not near
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-70 Vehicle Care
engine parts that move. The Towing the Vehicle

electrical connection is just as Caution (Continued)
good there, and the chance of
sparks getting back to the Always connect and remove the { Caution
battery is much less. jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do Incorrectly towing a disabled
10. Now start the vehicle with the not touch each other or other vehicle may cause damage. The
good battery and run the metal. damage would not be covered by
engine for a while. the vehicle warranty.
11. Press the unlock symbol on the Jumper Cable Removal
remote keyless entry Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed
transmitter to disarm your Reverse the sequence exactly when
car carrier. A wheel lift tow truck
security system, if equipped. removing the jumper cables.
could damage the vehicle.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had Consult your dealer or a
the dead battery. If it will not professional towing service if the
start after a few tries, it disabled vehicle must be towed.
probably needs service.
Recreational Vehicle
{ Caution Towing
If the jumper cables are Recreational vehicle towing means
connected or removed in the towing the vehicle behind another
wrong order, electrical shorting vehicle, such as behind a motor
may occur and damage the home. The two most common types
vehicle. The repairs would not be of recreational vehicle towing are
covered by the vehicle warranty. known as dinghy towing and dolly
(Continued) towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-71
ground. Dolly towing is towing the Dinghy Towing

vehicle with two wheels on the
Front-wheel-drive and
ground and two wheels up on a
all-wheel-drive vehicles may be
device known as a dolly.
dinghy towed from the front. These
Here are some important things to vehicles can also be towed by
consider before recreational vehicle placing them on a platform trailer
towing: with all four wheels off of the
. What is the towing capacity of ground. For other towing options,
the towing vehicle? Be sure to see “Dolly Towing” following in this
read the tow vehicle section.
manufacturer's For vehicles being dinghy towed,
recommendations. the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each To tow the vehicle from the front
. What is the distance that will be with all four wheels on the ground:
traveled? Some vehicles have RV fuel stop for about five minutes.
restrictions on how far and how This will ensure proper lubrication of 1. Position the vehicle that will be
long they can tow. transmission components. towed and secure it to the
towing vehicle.
. Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your 2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
dealer or trailering professional ACCESSORY.
for additional advice and 3. Shift the transmission to
equipment recommendations. N (Neutral).
. Is the vehicle ready to be 4. Turn fog lamps and all
towed? Just as preparing the accessories off.
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be 5. To prevent the battery from
towed. draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove the 2 amp
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-72 Vehicle Care
PWR/MODING fuse from the Once the destination has been Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive
instrument panel fuse block and reached: Vehicles)
store it in a safe location. See 1. Set the parking brake.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on All-wheel-drive vehicles should not
page 10-34. 2. Shift the transmission to be towed with two wheels on the
P (Park). ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on
{ Caution 3. Reinstall the 2 amp PWR/ a platform trailer with all four wheels
MODING fuse to the instrument off of the ground or dinghy towed
If the vehicle is towed without panel fuse block. from the front. See “Dinghy Towing”
performing each of the steps
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/ earlier in this section.
listed under “Dinghy Towing,” the
OFF and remove the key from
automatic transmission could be
the ignition. Dolly Towing
damaged. Be sure to follow all (Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
steps of the dinghy towing
procedure prior to and after { Caution
towing the vehicle. Do not tow a vehicle with the front
drive wheels on the ground if one
of the front tires is a compact
{ Caution spare tire. Towing with two
different tire sizes on the front of
If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceeded the vehicle can cause severe
while towing the vehicle, it could damage to the transmission.
be damaged. Never exceed
105 km/h (65 mph) while towing
the vehicle.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-73
To tow the vehicle from the front Towing the Vehicle from
with the rear wheels on the ground: the Rear { Caution
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. Towing the vehicle from the rear
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park). could damage it. Also, repairs
would not be covered by the
3. Set the parking brake.
vehicle warranty. Never have the
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a vehicle towed from the rear.
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
5. Remove the key from the
ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-74 Vehicle Care
Appearance Care Caution (Continued)

washed. This could cause damage
that would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Exterior Care products can be obtained from
your dealer. Follow all If using an automatic car wash,
Locks manufacturer directions regarding follow the car wash instructions. The
Locks are lubricated at the factory. correct product usage, necessary windshield wiper and rear window
Use a de-icing agent only when safety precautions, and wiper, if equipped, must be off.
absolutely necessary, and have the appropriate disposal of any Remove any accessories that may
locks greased after using. See be damaged or interfere with the car
vehicle care product.
Recommended Fluids and wash equipment.
Lubricants on page 11-12. Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
Washing the Vehicle { Caution cleaning agents completely. If they
To preserve the vehicle's finish, are allowed to dry on the surface,
wash it often and out of direct Avoid using high-pressure they could stain.
sunlight. washes closer than 30 cm (12 in)
to the surface of the vehicle. Use Dry the finish with a soft, clean
of power washers exceeding chamois or an all-cotton towel to
{ Caution 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
Do not use petroleum-based, in damage or removal of paint
acidic, or abrasive cleaning and decals. Finish Care
agents as they can damage the Application of aftermarket clearcoat
vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic The e symbol is on any sealant/wax materials is not
parts. If damage occurs, it would underhood compartment electrical recommended. If painted surfaces
not be covered by the vehicle center that should not be power are damaged, see your dealer to
warranty. Approved cleaning have the damage assessed and
(Continued) repaired. Foreign materials such as
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-75
calcium chloride and other salts, ice The bright metal moldings on the
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree Caution (Continued) vehicle are aluminum or stainless
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from steel. To prevent damage always
industrial chimneys, etc., can may damage it. Use only follow these cleaning instructions:
damage the vehicle's finish if they non-abrasive waxes and polishes
. Be sure the molding is cool to
remain on painted surfaces. Wash that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the the touch before applying any
the vehicle as soon as possible. cleaning solution.
If necessary, use non-abrasive vehicle.
cleaners that are marked safe for . Use a cleaning solution
painted surfaces to remove foreign approved for aluminum or
To keep the paint finish looking new,
matter. keep the vehicle garaged or stainless steel. Some cleaners
covered whenever possible. are highly acidic or contain
Occasional hand waxing or mild alkaline substances and can
polishing should be done to remove Protecting Exterior Bright Metal damage the moldings.
residue from the paint finish. See Moldings
your dealer for approved cleaning . Always dilute a concentrated
products. cleaner according to the
Do not apply waxes or polishes to
{ Caution manufacturer’s instructions.
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, Failure to clean and protect the
. Do not use chrome cleaners.
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint bright metal moldings can result . Do not use cleaners that are not
as damage can occur. in a hazy white finish or pitting. intended for automotive use.
This damage would not be . Use a nonabrasive wax on the
{ Caution covered by the vehicle warranty. vehicle after washing to protect
Machine compounding or and extend the molding finish.
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
(Continued)
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-76 Vehicle Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

. Aftermarket appearance caps or Windshield and Wiper Blades
Lenses, Emblems, Decals and covers while the lamps are
illuminated, due to excessive Clean the outside of the windshield
Stripes heat generated. with glass cleaner.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps, lenses,
{ Caution cloth or paper towel soaked with
windshield washer fluid or a mild
emblems, decals and stripes. Follow Failure to clean lamps properly detergent. Wash the windshield
instructions under "Washing the can cause damage to the lamp thoroughly when cleaning the
Vehicle" previously in this section. cover that would not be covered blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
Lamp covers are made of plastic, by the vehicle warranty. a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
and some have a UV protective treatments may cause wiper
coating. Do not clean or wipe them streaking.
when dry.
Do not use any of the following on
{ Caution Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged. Damage can be
lamp covers: Using wax on low gloss black caused by extreme dusty
finish stripes can increase the conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
. Abrasive or caustic agents. snow, and ice.
gloss level and create a
. Washer fluids and other cleaning non-uniform finish. Clean low
agents in higher concentrations Weatherstrips
gloss stripes with soap and
than suggested by the water only. Apply Dielectric silicone grease on
manufacturer. weatherstrips to make them last
. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, longer, seal better, and not stick or
or other harsh cleaners. Air Intakes squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at
Clear debris from the air intakes, least once a year. Hot, dry climates
. Ice scrapers or other hard items. may require more frequent
between the hood and windshield
when washing the vehicle. application. Black marks from
rubber material on painted surfaces
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-77
can be removed by rubbing with a

clean cloth. See Recommended { Caution Caution (Continued)
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11-12. Chrome wheels and other chrome automatic car wash that uses
trim may be damaged if the silicone carbide tire cleaning
Tires vehicle is not washed after driving brushes. Damage could occur
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to on roads that have been sprayed and the repairs would not be
clean the tires. with magnesium, calcium, covered by the vehicle warranty.
or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for
{ Caution conditions such as ice and dust.
Steering, Suspension, and
Chassis Components
Using petroleum-based tire Always wash the chrome with
dressing products on the vehicle soap and water after exposure. Visually inspect steering,
may damage the paint finish and/ suspension, and chassis
or tires. When applying a tire components for damaged, loose,
or missing parts or signs of wear at
dressing, always wipe off any
overspray from all painted
{ Caution least once a year.
surfaces on the vehicle. To avoid surface damage, do not Inspect power steering for proper
use strong soaps, chemicals, hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, chafing, etc.
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome brushes, or cleaners that contain Visually check constant velocity joint
acid on aluminum or boots and axle seals for leaks.
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild chrome-plated wheels. Use only
soap and water to clean the wheels. Body Component Lubrication
approved cleaners. Also, never
After rinsing thoroughly with clean drive a vehicle with aluminum or Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
water, dry with a soft, clean towel. chrome-plated wheels through an hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steel
A wax may then be applied. fuel door hinge, unless the
(Continued)
components are plastic. Applying
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-78 Vehicle Care
silicone grease on weatherstrips Finish Damage Use a soft bristle brush to remove
with a clean cloth will make them dust from knobs and crevices on the
Quickly repair minor chips and
last longer, seal better, and not stick instrument cluster. Using a mild
scratches with touch-up materials
or squeak. soap solution, immediately remove
available from your dealer to avoid
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
Underbody Maintenance corrosion. Larger areas of finish
repellent from all interior surfaces or
damage can be corrected in your
At least twice a year, spring and fall permanent damage may result.
dealer's body and paint shop.
use plain water to flush any Your dealer may have products for
corrosive materials from the Chemical Paint Spotting cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
underbody. Take care to thoroughly specifically designed for the
Airborne pollutants can fall upon
clean any areas where mud and surfaces being cleaned to prevent
and attack painted vehicle surfaces
other debris can collect. permanent damage. Apply all
causing blotchy, ring-shaped
Sheet Metal Damage discolorations, and small, irregular cleaners directly to the cleaning
dark spots etched into the paint cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
If the vehicle is damaged and surface. See “Finish Care” on any switches or controls.
requires sheet metal repair or previously in this section. Cleaners should be removed
replacement, make sure the body quickly. Never allow cleaners to
repair shop applies anti-corrosion remain on the surface being
material to parts repaired or Interior Care
cleaned for extended periods
replaced to restore corrosion To prevent dirt particle abrasions, of time.
protection. regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Immediately remove any soils. Note Cleaners may contain solvents that
Original manufacturer replacement can become concentrated in the
parts will provide the corrosion that newspapers or dark garments
that can transfer color to home interior. Before using cleaners, read
protection while maintaining the and adhere to all safety instructions
vehicle warranty. furnishings can also permanently
transfer color to the vehicle's on the label. While cleaning the
interior. interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening the doors and
windows.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-79
To prevent damage, do not clean Interior Glass Coated Moldings

the interior using the following
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric Coated moldings should be cleaned.
cleaners or techniques:
dampened with water. Wipe droplets . When lightly soiled, wipe with a
. Never use a razor or any other left behind with a clean dry cloth. sponge or soft lint-free cloth
sharp object to remove a soil Commercial glass cleaners may be dampened with water.
from any interior surface. used, if necessary, after cleaning
the interior glass with plain water. . When heavily soiled, use warm
. Never use a brush with stiff
soapy water.
bristles.
. Never rub any surface { Caution Fabric/Carpet/Suede
aggressively or with excessive To prevent scratching, never use Start by vacuuming the surface
pressure. abrasive cleaners on automotive using a soft brush attachment. If a
. Do not use laundry detergents or glass. Abrasive cleaners or rotating brush attachment is being
dishwashing soaps with aggressive cleaning may damage used during vacuuming, only use it
degreasers. For liquid cleaners, the rear window defogger. on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
use approximately 20 drops per gently remove as much of the soil
3.8 L (1 gal) of water. as possible using one of the
A concentrated soap solution will Cleaning the windshield with water following techniques:
leave a residue that creates during the first three to six months
of ownership will reduce tendency
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not towel. Continue blotting until no
use solutions that contain strong to fog.
more soil can be removed.
or caustic soap. Speaker Covers . For solid soils, remove as much
. Do not heavily saturate the Vacuum around a speaker cover as possible prior to vacuuming.
upholstery when cleaning. gently, so that the speaker will not
. Do not use solvents or cleaners be damaged. Clean spots with just
containing solvents. water and mild soap.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-80 Vehicle Care
To clean: cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small

1. Saturate a clean lint-free hidden area for colorfastness before { Caution
colorfast cloth with water. using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring Do not attach a device with a
Microfiber cloth is recommended suction cup to the display. This
to prevent lint transfer to the formation occurs, clean the entire
fabric or carpet. may cause damage and would
fabric or carpet. not be covered by the warranty.
2. Remove excess moisture by Following the cleaning process, a
gently wringing until water does paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture. Instrument Panel, Leather,
not drip from the cleaning cloth.
Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,
3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces Low Gloss Paint Surfaces and
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and Natural Open Pore Wood
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to Radio Displays Surfaces
a clean area frequently to For vehicles with high gloss
prevent forcing the soil in to the Use a soft microfiber cloth
surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
fabric. dampened with water to remove
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
dust and loose dirt. For a more
4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the
thorough cleaning, use a soft
soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
microfiber cloth dampened with a
longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
mild soap solution.
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the
microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners { Caution
solution followed only by plain or solvents. Periodically hand wash
the microfiber cloth separately, Soaking or saturating leather,
water. especially perforated leather, as
using mild soap. Do not use bleach
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly well as other interior surfaces,
removed, it may be necessary to and air dry before next use. (Continued)
use a commercial upholstery
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Vehicle Care 10-81
Care of Safety Belts

Caution (Continued) { Caution Keep belts clean and dry.
may cause permanent damage. Use of air fresheners may cause
Wipe excess moisture from these permanent damage to plastics { Warning
surfaces after cleaning and allow and painted surfaces. If an air
them to dry naturally. Never use freshener comes in contact with Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
heat, steam, spot lifters, or spot any plastic or painted surface in It may severely weaken them. In
removers. Do not use cleaners the vehicle, blot immediately and a crash, they might not be able to
that contain silicone or wax-based clean with a soft cloth dampened provide adequate protection.
products. Cleaners containing with a mild soap solution. Clean safety belts only with mild
these solvents can permanently Damage caused by air fresheners soap and lukewarm water.
change the appearance and feel would not be covered by the
of leather or soft trim and are not vehicle warranty.
recommended.
Floor Mats
Do not use cleaners that increase

Cargo Cover and
Convenience Net
{ Warning
gloss, especially on the instrument If a floor mat is the wrong size or
panel. Reflected glare can decrease Wash with warm water and mild
detergent. Do not use chlorine is not properly installed, it can
visibility through the windshield interfere with the pedals.
under certain conditions. bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
then dry completely. Interference with the pedals can
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
pedals.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
10-82 Vehicle Care
Use the following guidelines for

proper floor mat usage.
. The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator or
brake pedal. Always check that
the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals. Removing and Replacing the
. Use the floor mat with the Floor Mats
correct side up. Do not turn 1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
it over. remove it from the hooks.
. Do not place anything on top of 2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
the driver side floor mat. mat retainer openings over the
. Use only a single floor mat on carpet retainers and hook into
the driver side. position.
. Do not place one floor mat on 3. Make sure the floor mat is
top of another. properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
The driver side floor mat is held in pedals.
place by two hook-type retainers.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Maintenance Schedule
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance. It may
{ Caution
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 also help to maintain the value of Damage caused by improper
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the maintenance can lead to costly
Special Application Services responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application repairs and may not be covered
all required maintenance performed. by the vehicle warranty.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Your dealer has trained technicians Maintenance intervals, checks,
Additional Maintenance who can perform required inspections, recommended fluids,
and Care maintenance using genuine and lubricants are important to
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have keep the vehicle in good working
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 up-to-date tools and equipment for condition.
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids dealers have extended evening and
Recommended Fluids and Saturday hours, courtesy The Tire Rotation and Required
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 transportation, and online Services are the responsibility of the
Maintenance Replacement scheduling to assist with service vehicle owner. It is recommended to
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 needs. have your dealer perform these
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Maintenance Records Your dealer recognizes the Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15 importance of providing keep the vehicle in good working
competitively priced maintenance condition, improves fuel economy,
and repair services. With trained and reduces vehicle emissions.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use

. Mainly driven in hilly or
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. mountainous terrain. Maintenance
There may need to be more . Frequently towing a trailer. Schedule
frequent checks and services.
The Additional Required
. Used for high speed or Owner Checks and Services
Services - Normal are for competitive driving.
At Each Fuel Stop
vehicles that: . Used for taxi, police, or delivery
service.
. Check the engine oil level. See
. Carry passengers and cargo Engine Oil on page 10-8.
within recommended limits on Refer to the information in the
the Tire and Loading Information Maintenance Schedule Additional Once a Month
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Required Services - Severe chart. . Check the tire inflation
on page 9-10. pressures. See Tire Pressure on
. Are driven on reasonable road { Warning page 10-44.
surfaces within legal driving . Inspect the tires for wear. See
limits. Performing maintenance work can
Tire Inspection on page 10-50.
.
be dangerous and can cause
Use the recommended fuel. See serious injury. Perform . Check the windshield washer
Fuel on page 9-36. maintenance work only if the fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
Refer to the information in the required information, proper tools, page 10-20.
Maintenance Schedule Additional and equipment are available. Engine Oil Change
Required Services - Normal chart. If they are not, see your dealer to
have a trained technician do the When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
The Additional Required
work. See Doing Your Own SOON message displays, have the
Services - Severe are for vehicles
Service Work on page 10-3. engine oil and filter changed within
that are:
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. When the
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic CHANGE ENGINE OIL NOW
in hot weather. message displays, have the engine
oil and filter changed as soon as
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
possible. If driven under the best reset oil life system. See Engine
. Visually inspect steering,
conditions, the engine oil life system Oil on page 10-8 and Engine Oil suspension, and chassis
may not indicate the need for Life System on page 10-10. components for damaged, loose,
vehicle service for up to a year. or missing parts or signs of
. Check engine coolant level. See wear. See Exterior Care on
The engine oil and filter must be Engine Coolant on page 10-14. page 10-74.
changed at least once a year and . Check windshield washer fluid
the oil life system must be reset.
. Check restraint system
level. See Washer Fluid on components. See Safety System
Your trained dealer technician can page 10-20.
perform this work. If the engine oil Check on page 3-16.
life system is reset accidentally, . Visually inspect windshield wiper . Visually inspect fuel system for
service the vehicle within 5 000 km/ blades for wear, cracking, damage or leaks.
3,000 mi since the last service. or contamination. See Exterior
Reset the oil life system when the Care on page 10-74. Replace
. Visually inspect exhaust system
oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life worn or damaged wiper blades. and nearby heat shields for
System on page 10-10. See Wiper Blade Replacement loose or damaged parts.
on page 10-25. . Lubricate body components. See
Tire Rotation and Required . Exterior Care on page 10-74.
Check tire inflation pressures.
Services Every 12 000 km/
See Tire Pressure on . Check starter switch. See Starter
7,500 mi page 10-44. Switch Check on page 10-24.
Rotate the tires, if recommended for . Inspect tire wear. See Tire
the vehicle, and perform the
. Check automatic transmission
Inspection on page 10-50. shift lock control function. See
following services. See Tire
Rotation on page 10-50. . Visually check for fluid leaks. Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function Check on
. Check engine oil level and oil . Inspect engine air cleaner filter. page 10-24.
life percentage. If needed, See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
change engine oil and filter, and page 10-12.
. Check ignition transmission lock.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
. Inspect brake system. Check on page 10-25.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14

. Check parking brake and
automatic transmission park
mechanism. See Park Brake and
P (Park) Mechanism Check on
page 10-25.
. Check accelerator pedal for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. See your
dealer if service is required.
. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 2-14.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @
Replace brake fluid. (6) @
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Footnotes — Maintenance
Schedule Additional Required
Services - Normal
(1) Or every two years, whichever
comes first. More frequent
replacement may be needed if the
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10-13.
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. Inspect for fraying,
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Change automatic transmission fluid. @ @ @
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
AWD. (4)
@ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @
Footnotes — Maintenance vehicle is driven in areas with heavy (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
Schedule Additional Required traffic, areas with poor air quality, and hoses for proper hook-up,
Services - Severe or areas with high dust levels. routing, and condition.
(1) Or every two years, whichever Replacement may also be needed if (3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first. More frequent there is a reduction in air flow, comes first.
replacement may be needed if the excessive window fogging, or odors.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
(4) Do not directly power wash the Special Application Additional

transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the Services Maintenance and Care
seals and contaminate the transfer . Severe Commercial Use Your vehicle is an important
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis investment and caring for it properly
decrease the life of the transfer
components every 5 000 km/ may help to avoid future costly
case and should be replaced.
3,000 mi. repairs. To maintain vehicle
(5) Or every five years, whichever . performance, additional
Have underbody flushing service
comes first. See Cooling System on maintenance services may be
performed. See "Underbody
page 10-13. required.
Maintenance" in Exterior Care
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever on page 10-74. It is recommended that your dealer
comes first. Inspect for fraying, perform these services — their
excessive cracking, or damage; trained dealer technicians know
replace, if needed. your vehicle best. Your dealer can
(7) Or every 10 years, whichever also perform a thorough
comes first. assessment with a multi-point
inspection to recommend when your
vehicle may need attention.
The following list is intended to
explain the services and conditions
to look for that may indicate
services are required.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Battery Brakes Hoses

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are Hoses transport fluids and should
the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving. be regularly inspected to ensure
additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include that there are no cracks or leaks.
. To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing With a multi-point inspection, your
start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping. dealer can inspect the hoses and
battery with full cranking power. advise if replacement is needed.
. Trained dealer technicians have
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment Lamps
the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and Properly working headlamps,
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts taillamps, and brake lamps are
connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle. important to see and be seen on
corrosion-free. the road.
Fluids
Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
. Signs that the headlamps need
. Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems attention include dimming, failure
squeak or show signs of and components. See to light, cracking, or damage.
cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and The brake lamps need to be
Lubricants on page 11-12 for GM checked periodically to ensure
. Trained dealer technicians have that they light when braking.
access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
. With a multi-point inspection,
to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be your dealer can check the lamps
replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill. and note any concerns.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Shocks and Struts rubber; cracks or cuts in the Wheel Alignment

Shocks and struts help aid in control tread or sidewall; or a bulge or Wheel alignment is critical for
for a smoother ride. split in the tire. ensuring that the tires deliver
. Signs of wear may include
. Trained dealer technicians can optimal wear and performance.
steering wheel vibration, bounce/ inspect and recommend the right . Signs that the alignment may
sway while braking, longer tires. Your dealer can also need to be adjusted include
stopping distance, or uneven provide tire/wheel balancing pulling, improper vehicle
tire wear. services to ensure smooth handling, or unusual tire wear.
vehicle operation at all speeds.
. As part of the multi-point Your dealer sells and services . Your dealer has the required
inspection, trained dealer name brand tires. equipment to ensure proper
technicians can visually inspect wheel alignment.
the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care
of leaking, blown seals, Windshield
To help keep the vehicle looking like
or damage, and can advise new, vehicle care products are For safety, appearance, and the
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For best viewing, keep the windshield
information on how to clean and clean and clear.
Tires
protect the vehicle’s interior and . Signs of damage include
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on scratches, cracks, and chips.
rotated, and balanced. Maintaining page 10-78 and Exterior Care on
the tires can save money and fuel, page 10-74.
. Trained dealer technicians can
and can reduce the risk of tire inspect the windshield and
failure. recommend proper replacement
if needed.
. Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Wiper Blades
Wiper blades need to be cleaned
and kept in good condition to
provide a clear view.
. Signs of wear include streaking,
skipping across the windshield,
and worn or split rubber.
. Trained dealer technicians can
check the wiper blades and
replace them when needed.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Recommended Fluids
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 ® specification of the proper
SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended.
See Engine Oil on page 10-8.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-14.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON ®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88900401).
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668) or lubricant meeting
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and Liftgate Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241).
Sunroof Track Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770) or Dielectric Silicone
Grease (GM Part No. 12345579).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96815102 —
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
3.0L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 20901295 CF177
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108
3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 60.0 cm (24.0 in) 95479599 —
Passenger Side – 40.0 cm (16.0 in) 95479597 —
Rear – 30.0 cm (12.0 in) 96624648 —
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Odometer
Reading
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Odometer
Reading
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Odometer
Reading
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 8.5 L 9.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 10.9 L 11.5 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank 63.1 L 16.6 gal
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 (LEA) K Automatic 0.75–0.90 mm
(0.030–0.035 in)
3.0L V6 (LFW) 5 Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm
(0.037–0.043 in)
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.0L V6 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
12-4 Technical Data
2 NOTES
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Vehicle Data Recording and important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4 service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-8 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
Radio Frequency or parts manager, contact the owner
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-11 of your dealership or the general
Radio Frequency manager.
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge or write to: the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited United States and Puerto Rico
c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Center
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our From U.S. Virgin Islands:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9994
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Canada Assistance Center. Any TTY user in I (Service History): View and
the U.S. can communicate with print dealer-recorded service
General Motors of Canada Limited
Chevrolet by dialing: records and self-recorded service
Customer Care Centre,
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records.
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive D (Preferred Dealer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Information): Select a preferred
www.gm.ca Online Owner Center dealer and view dealer location,
1-800-263-3777 (English) Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
1-800-263-7854 (French) (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com J (Warranty Tracking
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Information): Track the vehicle’s
The Chevrolet online owner
Telephone devices (TTYs)) warranty information.
experience is a one-stop resource
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
that allows interaction with J (Recall Information): View
Chevrolet and keeps important active recalls by Vehicle
Overseas vehicle-specific information in one Identification Number (VIN). See
place. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Please contact the local General
on page 12-1.
Motors Business Unit. Membership Benefits
E (Vehicle Information): H (Other Account Information):
Customer Assistance for View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view
radio (if equipped), and OnStar
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific how-to videos.
account information.
Users G (Maintenance Information): F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
View maintenance schedules,
To assist customers who are deaf, with online help representatives.
alerts, OnStar onboard vehicle
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
diagnostic information, and
and who use Text Telephones
schedule service appointments. your vehicle.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.ca
Reimbursement Program or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner for details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. This program is available to 1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone
. Locate owner resources such as qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)
lease-end, financing, and reimbursement of eligible For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
warranty information. aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800.
. required for the vehicle, such as
Retrieve your favorite articles, Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/
quizzes, tips, and multimedia 365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
Sections. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information
. Download the owner manual for
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready:
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Find the 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and
Chevrolet-recommended home telephone number.
maintenance services for your . Telephone number of your
vehicle. location.
. Location of the vehicle.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14

. Model, year, color, and license driver if they decide the claims are must be in good condition and
plate number of the vehicle. made too often, or the same type of properly inflated. It is the owner's
. Odometer reading, Vehicle claim is made many times. responsibility for the repair or
Identification Number (VIN), and replacement of the tire if it is not
Services Provided covered by the warranty.
delivery date of the vehicle.
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Description of the problem.
Delivery of enough fuel for the jump start a dead battery.
Coverage vehicle to get to the nearest
service station. Services Not Included in
Services are provided up to 5 years/
. Lock-Out Service: Service to Roadside Assistance
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first. unlock the vehicle if you are . Impound towing caused by
locked out. A remote unlock may violation of any laws.
In the U.S., anyone driving the be available if you have OnStar.
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Legal fines.
For security reasons, the driver
person driving the vehicle without must present identification . Mounting, dismounting,
permission from the owner is not before this service is given. or changing of snow tires,
covered. chains, or other traction devices.
. Emergency Tow from a Public
Roadside Assistance is not a part of Road or Highway: Tow to the Service is not provided if a vehicle
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. nearest Chevrolet dealer for is in an area that is not accessible
General Motors North America and warranty service, or if the vehicle to the service vehicle or is not a
Chevrolet reserve the right to make was in a crash and cannot be regularly traveled or maintained
any changes or discontinue the driven. Assistance is not given public road, which includes ice and
Roadside Assistance program at when the vehicle is stuck in the winter roads. Off-road use is not
any time without notification. sand, mud, or snow. covered.
General Motors North America and . Flat Tire Change: Service to
Chevrolet reserve the right to limit change a flat tire with the spare
services or payment to an owner or tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Services Specific to permission to get local safety related. If it is, please call
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles emergency road service. You will your dealership, let them know this,
receive payment, up to $100, and ask for instructions.
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement after sending the original receipt
is up to 7 liters. Diesel fuel If your dealer requests you to bring
to Roadside Assistance. the vehicle for service, you are
delivery may be restricted. Mechanical failures may be
Propane and other fuels are not urged to do so as early in the work
covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for
provided through this service. parts and labor for repairs not same-day repair.
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle covered by the warranty are the
registration is required. owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Program
Assistance: Must be over Scheduling Service
150 kilometers from where your Appointments To enhance your ownership
trip was started to qualify. experience, we and our participating
When the vehicle requires warranty dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
General Motors of Canada
service, contact your dealer and Transportation, a customer support
Limited requires
request an appointment. By program for vehicles with the
pre-authorization, original
scheduling a service appointment Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
detailed receipts, and a copy of
and advising the service consultant Coverage period in Canada),
the repair orders. Once
of your transportation needs, your extended powertrain, and/or
authorization has been received,
dealer can help minimize your hybrid-specific warranties in both
the Roadside Assistance advisor
inconvenience. the U.S. and Canada.
will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive If the vehicle cannot be scheduled Several Courtesy Transportation
payment. into the service department options are available to assist in
. immediately, keep driving it until it reducing inconvenience when
Alternative Service: If
can be scheduled for service, warranty repairs are required.
assistance cannot be provided
unless, of course, the problem is
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Courtesy Transportation is not a by GM for shuttle service. If U.S. It may not be possible to provide a
part of the New Vehicle Limited customers arrange their own like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Warranty. A separate booklet transportation, limited
entitled “Limited Warranty and reimbursement for reasonable fuel Additional Program
Owner Assistance Information” expenses may be available. Claim Information
furnished with each new vehicle amounts should reflect actual costs All program options, such as shuttle
provides detailed warranty coverage and be supported by original service, may not be available at
information. receipts. See your dealer for every dealer. Contact your dealer
information. for specific availability.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle General Motors reserves the right to
Warranty service can generally be
For an overnight warranty repair, the unilaterally modify, change,
completed while you wait. However,
dealer may provide an available or discontinue Courtesy
if you are unable to do so, your
courtesy rental vehicle or provide for Transportation at any time and to
dealer may offer the following
reimbursement of a rental vehicle. resolve all questions of claim
transportation options:
Reimbursement is limited and must eligibility pursuant to the terms and
Shuttle Service be supported by original receipts as conditions described herein at its
well as a signed and completed sole discretion.
This includes one-way or round-trip
shuttle service within reasonable rental agreement and meet state/
time and distance parameters of provincial, local, and rental vehicle Collision Damage Repair
your dealer's area. provider requirements. If the vehicle is involved in a
Requirements vary and may include collision and it is damaged, have the
Public Transportation or Fuel minimum age requirements,
Reimbursement damage repaired by a qualified
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. technician using the proper
If overnight warranty repairs are Additional fees such as fuel usage equipment and quality replacement
needed, and public transportation is charges, taxes, levies, usage fees, parts. Poorly performed collision
used, the expense must be excessive mileage, or rental usage repairs diminish the vehicle resale
supported by original receipts and beyond the completion of the repair
within the maximum amount allowed are also your responsibility.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
value, and safety performance can these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained
be compromised in subsequent are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any equipment.
related failures are not covered by
Collision Parts that warranty. Insuring the Vehicle
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also Protect your investment in the GM
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by vehicle with comprehensive and
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may collision insurance coverage. There
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle. are significant differences in the
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit quality of coverage afforded by
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms.
ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide
appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM
are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not vehicle by limiting compensation for
GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle damage repairs through the use of
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some
Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not
may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts are typically removed from When purchasing insurance, we
vehicles that were total losses in Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the
prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts.
undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever If such insurance coverage is not
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer available from your current
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier.
designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment In the event that the vehicle requires
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
Genuine Manufacturer replacement .
that you take an active role in its
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
you may be charged at the end of repair facility of choice, take the
the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year.
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
leave the scene of a crash until all
. Insurance company and policy recycled parts will not be covered by
matters have been taken care of.
number. the GM vehicle warranty.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
officer. Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
to police and other parties involved See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
in the crash. section. the repair professional, and insist on
For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Roadside Assistance Program on Will You See after an Airbag if the vehicle is leased, you may be
page 13-5. Inflates? on page 3-22. obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions ORDER TOLL FREE:
company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle. 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
repair valuation based on that For Credit Card Orders Only
insurance company's collision policy Owner Information
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended
In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational Or write to:
of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The Helm, Incorporated
long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the Attention: Customer Service
reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all 47911 Halyard Drive
models. Plymouth, MI 48170
Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Prices are subject to change without
Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty notice and without incurring
Manual. obligation. Allow ample time for
Service Manuals
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 – delivery.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $40.00 (U.S.) plus handling and All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
and repair information on the shipping fees. funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
engines, transmission, axle,
Without Pouch: Owner Manual only. funds.
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc. RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
Radio Frequency
Service Bulletins Identification (RFID)
shipping fees.
Service Bulletins give additional RFID technology is used in some
technical service information Current and Past Models
vehicles for functions such as tire
needed to knowledgeably service Technical Service Bulletins and pressure monitoring and ignition
General Motors cars and trucks. Manuals are available for current system security, as well as in
and past model GM vehicles.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
connection with conveniences such Operation is subject to the following Reporting Safety
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) two conditions:
transmitters for remote door locking/ 1. The device may not cause
Defects
unlocking and starting, and harmful interference.
in-vehicle transmitters for garage Reporting Safety Defects
door openers. RFID technology in 2. The device must accept any
GM vehicles does not use or record interference received, including to the United States
personal information or link with any interference that may cause Government
other GM system containing undesired operation of the
device. If you believe that your vehicle
personal information.
has a defect which could cause
Changes or modifications to any of a crash or could cause injury or
Radio Frequency these systems by other than an death, you should immediately
Statement authorized service facility could void
inform the National Highway
authorization to use this equipment.
This vehicle has systems that Traffic Safety Administration
operate on a radio frequency that (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
comply with Part 15 of the Federal General Motors.
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and with Industry Canada If NHTSA receives similar
Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310. complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
To contact NHTSA, you may call In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 Vehicle Data
the Vehicle Safety Hotline (English) or 1-800-263-7854
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (French), or write: Recording and
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to General Motors of Canada Limited Privacy
http://www.safercar.gov; or Customer Care Centre,
The vehicle has a number of
write to: Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive computers that record information
Administrator, NHTSA Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 about the vehicle’s performance and
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. how it is driven. For example, the
Washington, D.C. 20590 vehicle uses computer modules to
monitor and control engine and
You can also obtain other transmission performance, to
information about motor monitor the conditions for airbag
vehicle safety from deployment and deploy them in a
http://www.safercar.gov. crash, and, if equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver
Reporting Safety Defects control the vehicle. These modules
to General Motors may store data to help the dealer
technician service the vehicle.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Some modules may also store data
Transport Canada) in a situation like about how the vehicle is operated,
this, notify General Motors. such as rate of fuel consumption or
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: average speed. These modules may
retain personal preferences, such as
Chevrolet Motor Division radio presets, seat positions, and
Chevrolet Customer Assistance temperature settings.
Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a if the vehicle is leased, with the
better understanding of the consent of the lessee; in response
This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and to an official request by police or
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are similar government office; as part of
main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a GM's defense of litigation through
record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no the discovery process; or, as
crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under required by law. Data that GM
bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no collects or receives may also be
obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender, used for GM research needs or may
understanding how a vehicle’s age, and crash location) are be made available to others for
systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties, research purposes, where a need is
designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could shown and the data is not tied to a
vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
routinely acquired during a crash OnStar®
investigation.
record such data as: If the vehicle is equipped with
To read data recorded by an EDR, OnStar® and has an active
. How various systems in your special equipment is required, and subscription, additional data may be
vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is collected through the OnStar
. Whether or not the driver and needed. In addition to the vehicle system. This includes information
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as about the vehicle’s operation;
buckled/fastened; law enforcement, that have the collisions involving the vehicle; the
.
special equipment, can read the use of the vehicle and its features;
How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
depressing the accelerator and, in certain situations, the
the vehicle or the EDR. location and approximate GPS
and/or brake pedal; and,
GM will not access this data or speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
. How fast the vehicle was share it with others except: with the
traveling. consent of the vehicle owner or,
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
OnStar Terms and Conditions and

Privacy Statement on the OnStar
website.
Infotainment System
If the vehicle is equipped with a
navigation system as part of the
infotainment system, use of the
system may result in the storage of
destinations, addresses, telephone
numbers, and other trip information.
See the infotainment manual for
information on stored data and for
deletion instructions.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
2 NOTES
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview vehicle, including location

information. See OnStar’s Terms
and Conditions and Privacy
Statement for more details including
OnStar Overview
system limitations at
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
OnStar Services www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 The OnStar system status light is
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 next to the OnStar buttons. If the
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 = Voice Command Button status light is:
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Q Blue OnStar Button
Vehicle Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
. Solid Green: System is on.
> Emergency Button . Flashing Green: On a call.
OnStar Additional Information
OnStar Additional This vehicle may be equipped with a . Red: Indicates a problem.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live OnStar
. Off: System is off. Press the blue
Advisor for Emergency, Security, OnStar button twice to speak
Navigation, Connection, and with an OnStar Advisor.
Diagnostic Services. OnStar Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
services may require a paid (1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
subscription. OnStar requires the Advisor.
vehicle battery and electrical
system, cellular service, and GPS Press = to:
satellite signals to be available and
operating. OnStar acts as a link to
. Make a call, end a call,
existing public emergency service or answer an incoming call.
providers. OnStar may collect . Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
information about you and your voice commands.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
14-2 OnStar
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Press > to get a priority connection OnStar Services
Navigation voice commands.
to an OnStar Emergency Advisor
Requires a specific OnStar
available 24/7 to: Emergency
subscription plan.
. Get help for an emergency.
. Obtain the WiFi network name, With Automatic Crash Response,
or Service Set Identifier or SSID, . Be a Good Samaritan or the OnStar system can
and passphrase (if equipped). respond to an AMBER Alert. automatically connect to an OnStar
. Get assistance in severe Emergency Advisor. The built-in
Press Q to connect to a live system can automatically connect to
Advisor to: weather or other crisis and
evacuation routes. help in certain crashes.
. Verify account information or
Press > to connect to an OnStar
update contact information.
Emergency Advisor. GPS
. Get driving directions. technology is used to identify the
Requires a specific OnStar vehicle location and can provide
subscription plan. important information to emergency
. Receive On-Demand personnel. OnStar Emergency
Diagnostics for a check of the Advisors are trained to provide
vehicle’s key operating systems. assistance and link to existing
public emergency service providers
. Receive Roadside Assistance. in emergency situations.
. Manage WiFi Settings (if With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially
equipped). trained Crisis Advisors are available
24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to
provide a central point of contact,
assistance, and information if a
crisis occurs.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
OnStar 14-3
Security 3. Directions are downloaded to the Repeat

vehicle.
OnStar provides services including 1. Press =. System responds:
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote 4. Follow the voice-guided “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
Ignition Block, and Roadside commands.
2. Say “Repeat.” System responds
Assistance, if equipped. OnStar can Using Voice Commands with the last direction given, then
unlock the vehicle doors remotely, During a Planned Route responds with “OnStar ready,”
if equipped with automatic door then a tone.
locks, and can help police locate the Cancel Route
vehicle if it is stolen. Get My Destination
1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say 1. Press =. System responds:
Navigation “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
“Cancel route.” System
OnStar navigation requires a responds: “Do you want to 2. Say “Get my destination.”
specific OnStar subscription plan. cancel directions?” System responds with the
Press Q to receive directions or 2. Say “Yes.” System responds: address and the distance to the
have them sent to the vehicle “OK, request completed, thank destination, then responds with
navigation screen, if equipped. you, goodbye.” “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
Destinations can also be forwarded Route Preview Other Navigation Services
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
Available from OnStar
1. Press =. System responds:
Turn-by-Turn Navigation “OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar eNav: Subscribers can
1. Press Q to connect to a live send destinations from
2. Say “Route preview.” System MapQuest.com to the vehicle
Advisor. responds with the next three Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
2. Request directions. maneuvers. screen-based navigation system (if
equipped). When ready, the
directions will be downloaded to the
vehicle.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
14-4 OnStar
Destination Download: Press Q, WiFi Connectivity (If Equipped) pressure (if the vehicle is equipped
then request the Advisor to The vehicle has a WiFi hotspot that with the tire pressure monitoring
download directions to the provides a high-speed, wireless system); or activate remote horn
navigation system in the vehicle (if Internet connection to connect and lights. Also remote start the
equipped). After the call ends, press multiple mobile devices (data plan vehicle (if factory equipped) or
the “Go” button on the navigation required). unlock the doors from anywhere
screen to begin driving directions. with a wireless connection (if
1. To retrieve WiFi hotspot equipped with automatic locks).
If directions are downloaded to the information, press = and select With the required specific OnStar
navigation system, the route can or say “WiFi settings.” subscription plan, a destination can
only be canceled through the be sent to the vehicle. For OnStar
navigation system. 2. The WiFi settings will display the RemoteLink information and
WiFi network name/SSID, compatibility, see www.onstar.com
Destinations can also be passphrase, and level of
downloaded on the go. For (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
encryption.
information about eNav or OnStar RemoteLink® Key Fob
Destination Download, see 3. To change the SSID or
Services
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or passphrase, press Q or call
www.onstar.ca (Canada). 1-888-4-ONSTAR to connect This feature is included for five
with an Advisor. years and allows for remote door
Connections lock/unlock (if equipped with
OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App automatic locks), remote start (if
A required specific OnStar (If Equipped) factory equipped), or activation of
subscription plan includes the horn and lights from anywhere with
Download the OnStar RemoteLink
services that follow to help a wireless signal. Download the app
mobile app to select Apple®,
customers stay connected. and start using it any time during the
Android™, and BlackBerry® or
For coverage maps, see Windows 7 or 8 mobile devices. trial period to get started.
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or From the mobile device, check the
www.onstar.ca (Canada). vehicle’s fuel level, oil life, or tire
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
OnStar 14-5
OnStar Hands-Free Calling 4. Say “Call.” System responds: 4. Pick a name tag. System
“OK, dialing 911.” responds: “About to store <name
This service allows calls to be made
tag>. Does that sound OK?”
and received from the vehicle. Retrieve My Number
5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
To Make a Call 1. Press =. System responds: again. System responds: “OK,
1. Press =. System responds: “OnStar ready.” storing <name tag>.”
“OnStar ready.” 2. Say “My number.” System Place a Call Using a Stored
2. Say “Call.” System responds: responds: “Your OnStar Number
“Please say the name or number Hands-Free Calling number is,”
to call.” then says the number. 1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready.”
3. Say the entire number without End a Call
pausing, including a “1” and the 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
Press =. System responds: “Call responds: “OK, calling
area code. System responds:
“OK calling.” ended.” <name tag>.”
Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed Verify Minutes and Expiration
Dialing
1. Press =. System responds: Press = and say “Minutes” then
“OnStar Ready,” followed by 1. Press =. System responds: “Verify” to check how many minutes
a tone. “OnStar ready.” remain and their expiration date.
2. Say “Call.” System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
“Please say the number you Vehicle Diagnostics
“Please say the name or number
to call.” would like to store.” OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics can
3. Say the entire number without perform a vehicle check every
3. Say “911” without pausing.
pausing. System responds: month. It will check the engine,
System responds: “911.”
“Please say the name tag.” transmission, antilock brakes, and
other major vehicle systems. It also
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
14-6 OnStar
checks the tire pressures, if the OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works
vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Information Automatic Crash Response,
Pressure Monitoring System. If an
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
On-Demand Diagnostics check is
Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
needed, press Q, and an Advisor Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
can run a check. Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
account information. all OnStar services are available
everywhere or on all vehicles. For
Selling/Transferring the more information, a full description
Vehicle of OnStar services, system
Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR immediately limitations, and OnStar terms and
to terminate your OnStar services if conditions:
the vehicle is disposed of, sold, . Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
transferred, or if the lease ends. (1-888-466-7827).
Reactivation for Subsequent . See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
Owners . See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Press Q and follow the prompts to . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible. The Advisor will update
. Press Q to speak with an
vehicle records and explain the Advisor.
OnStar service options available. OnStar services cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
OnStar 14-7
in that area. The wireless service Services for People with OnStar Personal Identification
provider must also have coverage, Disabilities Number (PIN)
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar Advisors provide services to help A PIN is needed to access some of
services. Service involving location subscribers with physical disabilities the OnStar services, like Remote
information about the vehicle cannot and medical conditions. Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
work unless GPS signals are Assistance. The PIN will need to be
Press Q for help with: changed the first time when
available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar . Locating a gas station with an speaking with an Advisor. To
hardware. OnStar services may not attendant to pump gas. change the OnStar PIN, contact an
work if the OnStar equipment is not . Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or
properly installed or it has not been that meets accessibility needs. calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR.
properly maintained. If equipment or
software is added, connected,
. Providing directions to the Warranty
or modified, OnStar services may closest hospital or pharmacy in OnStar equipment may be
not work. Other problems beyond urgent situations. warranted as part of the vehicle
the control of OnStar may prevent TTY Users warranty.
service such as hills, tall buildings,
tunnels, weather, electrical system OnStar has the ability to Languages
design and architecture of the communicate to deaf, The vehicle can be programmed to
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired respond in multiple languages.
crash, or wireless phone network customers while in the vehicle. The
available dealer-installed TTY Press Q and ask for an Advisor.
congestion or jamming. Advisors are available in English,
system can provide in-vehicle
See Radio Frequency Statement on access to all of the OnStar services, Spanish, and French. Available
page 13-12. except Virtual Advisor and OnStar languages may vary by country.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
14-8 OnStar
Potential Issues A temporary loss of GPS can cause to function properly. These systems
loss of the ability to send a may not operate if the battery is
OnStar cannot perform Remote
Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The discharged or disconnected.
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Advisor may give a verbal route or
Assistance after the vehicle has Add-on Electrical Equipment
may ask for a call back after the
been off continuously for five days.
vehicle is driven into an open area. The OnStar system is integrated
After five days, OnStar can contact
Roadside Assistance and a into the electrical architecture of the
Cellular and GPS Antennas vehicle. Do not add any electrical
locksmith to help gain access to the
vehicle. Do not place items over or near the equipment. See Add-On Electrical
antenna to prevent blocking cellular Equipment on page 9-47. Added
Global Positioning and GPS signal reception. Cellular electrical equipment may interfere
System (GPS) reception is required for OnStar to with the operation of the OnStar
send remote signals to the vehicle. system and cause it to not operate.
. Obstruction of the GPS can
occur in a large city with tall Unable to Connect to OnStar Privacy
buildings; in parking garages; Message The complete OnStar Privacy
around airports; in tunnels,
If there is limited cellular coverage Statement may be found at
underpasses; or in an area with
or the cellular network has reached www.onstar.com (U.S.),
very dense trees. If GPS signals
maximum capacity, this message or www.onstar.ca (Canada). We
are not available, the OnStar
may come on. Press Q to try the recommend that you review it. If you
system should still operate to
call again or try again after driving a have any questions, call
call OnStar. However, OnStar
few miles into another cellular area. 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
could have difficulty identifying
the exact location. or press Q to speak with an
Vehicle and Power Issues Advisor. Users of wireless
. In emergency situations, OnStar communications are cautioned that
OnStar services require a vehicle
can use the last stored GPS the privacy of any information sent
electrical system, wireless service,
location to send to emergency via wireless cellular communications
and GPS satellite technologies to be
responders. cannot be assured. Third parties
available and operating for features
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
OnStar 14-9
may unlawfully intercept or access IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT unzip:

transmissions and private LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the
communications without consent. OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS Info-ZIP copyright and license.
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE The definitive version of this
OnStar - libcurl and unzip AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
acknowledgments document should be available
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/
Certain OnStar components include EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR license.html indefinitely.
libcurl and unzip software. Below COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
are the notices and licenses LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All
associated with this software: DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, rights reserved.
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF For the purposes of this copyright
libcurl: CONTRACT, TORT OR and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, the following set of individuals:
NOTICE OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,
Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. THE SOFTWARE. Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley,
All rights reserved. Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris
Except as contained in this notice, Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
Permission to use, copy, modify, the name of a copyright holder shall Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,
and distribute this software for any not be used in advertising or Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,
purpose with or without fee is otherwise to promote the sale, use Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,
hereby granted, provided that the or other dealings in this Software Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,
above copyright notice and this without prior written authorization of Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
permission notice appear in all the copyright holder. George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
copies. Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
14-10 OnStar
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception “MacZip” without the explicit
Rich Wales, Mike White. to this condition is redistribution permission of Info-ZIP. Such
This software is provided “as is,” of a standard UnZipSFX binary altered versions are further
without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a prohibited from
express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is misrepresentative use of the
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the addresses or of the
incidental, special or consequential normal SFX banner has not Info-ZIP URL(s).
damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
inability to use this software. disabled. the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
Permission is granted to anyone to 3. Altered versions–including, but “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new “Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports and “MacZip” for its own source
and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces, and binary releases.
freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
restrictions: library versions–must be plainly
marked as such and must not be
1. Redistributions of source code misrepresented as being the
must retain the above copyright original source. Such altered
notice, definition, disclaimer, and versions also must not be
this list of conditions. misrepresented as being
2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releases–including, but
(compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
notice, definition, disclaimer, and “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Appearance Care

What Will You See after an Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
About Driving the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . iii
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Accessories and
When Should an Airbag Assistance Program,
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Add-On Electrical
Airbags CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Adding Equipment to the MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Additional Information
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Audio System
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Additional Maintenance
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Adjustments
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Automatic
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Climate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12
Alarm Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Air Filter, Passenger
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-24, 10-24 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Automatic Transmission
Airbag System
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Antenna Shift Lock Control
How Does an Airbag
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Antilock Brake Auxiliary
Passenger Sensing
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont'd) CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-29 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Stoplamps, and Check
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-25
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Ignition
Bluetooth
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Brake C Child Restraints
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Infants and Young
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16
California Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 Lower Anchors and
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Camera Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-38
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Rear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Capacities and Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-46
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Carbon Monoxide Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Cleaning
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 10-28
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Front Turn Signal and
Cargo Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Cautions, Danger, and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
INDEX i-3
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-8 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Door
Compartments Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Connections Text Telephone (TTY) Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3
Control Customer Information Drive Systems
Traction and Electronic Service Publications All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-24, 10-24
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11 Driver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Customer Satisfaction Driver Information
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Driving
Coolant D Characteristics and
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-8 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Engine Temperature Danger, Warnings, and Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Daytime Running For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21
Courtesy Transportation Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cover Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Devices Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
i-4 INDEX
Driving (cont'd) Engine F

Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Filter,
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Check and Service Engine
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Driving the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-4
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
E Coolant Temperature
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
FlexFuel
ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
E85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Economy Mode Cooling System Messages . . .5-29
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Fluid
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-17 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11
Electrical Equipment, Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Electrical System Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Engine Compartment Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Fog Lamps
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 6-4, 10-28
Fuses and Circuit Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-21
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-20
Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Instrument Panel Fuse Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 Frequency Statement
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Front Fog Lamp
Emergency Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Front Seats
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
INDEX i-5
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 G H

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Gauges Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Filling a Portable Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Daytime Running
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-21
Warning Lights and Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Requirements, California . . . . .9-37
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
General Information High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Fuses
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Engine Compartment
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Heating and Air
Fuses and Circuit
GM Mobility Reimbursement Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-5
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Instrument Panel Fuse High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-45
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
i-6 INDEX
I L Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-39
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Ignition Transmission Lock Lamps
Antilock Brake System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16
Infants and Young Children, Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Front Turn Signal and
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-17
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14
Engine Coolant
Instrument Panel Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-20
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-12 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii LATCH System
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Replacing Parts after a
Gate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
J Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
K Lighting
Low Washer Fluid Warning . . .5-22
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-31 Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-21
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Keyless Entry Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-16
StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont'd) M Messages (cont'd)

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Maintenance
Traction Control System Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
(TCS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Maintenance and Care
Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-19 Mirrors
Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Locks Automatic Dimming
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 11-2
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Recommended Fluids
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Messages
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-12
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-21 Monitor System, Tire
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Low Washer Fluid Warning Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-29
Lower Anchors and Tethers
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
for Children (LATCH
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 N
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Navigation
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Object Detection System . . . . .5-32 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
i-8 INDEX
O Operation, Infotainment Personalization

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Object Detection System
Ordering Phone
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Outlets Power
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Off-Road
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Overview, Infotainment Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Oil
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-21
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 P Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-17
Park Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Power Steering Warning
OnStar® Parking
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Pregnancy, Using Safety
OnStar® Additional Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Privacy
OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-19
Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . 13-13
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Program
OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Passenger Airbag Status
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7
OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Passenger Compartment Air
OnStar® Vehicle Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-24
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
INDEX i-9
R Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roof

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Radio Frequency
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Radio Frequency
Replacement Parts Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Running the Vehicle While
Radios
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-30
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Replacing LATCH System S
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Replacing Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-17 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-34
Reporting Safety Defects How to Wear Safety Belts
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Restraints Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-17
Recommended Fluids and
Retained Accessory Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Safety Defects Reporting
Records
Ride Control Systems General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Recreational Vehicle
Roads Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Reduced Engine Power
Roadside Assistance Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
i-10 INDEX
Seats Service (cont'd) Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Publications Ordering Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7 Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-19
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4 Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Services Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Special Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Storage Areas
Securing Child Shift Lock Control Function Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-46 Check, Automatic Cargo Management System . . . 4-2
Security Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Shifting Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Signals, Turn and Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Service Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Accessories and Spare Tire Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 Special Application Services . . . 11-8 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Specifications and Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Maintenance, General Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 StabiliTrak Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
INDEX i-11
System Tires (cont'd) Trailer

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 13-15 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-46 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Transmission
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
T Terminology and Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Taillamps Uniform Tire Quality Transportation Program,
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Wheel Alignment and Tire Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-10 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Turn and Lane-Change
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 When It Is Time for New Turn Signal
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Towing U
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-40 Uniform Tire Quality
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-41
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-70 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-47 Traction
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Control System Warning
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Traction Control/Electronic
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
7576028) - 2015 - First Edition - 3/21/14
i-12 INDEX
V W Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Vehicle Warning
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-25
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Wipers
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Identification Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Washer Fluid, Low Warning
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Wheels
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Alignment and Tire
Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Vehicle Care Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 When It Is Time for New
Vehicle Data Recording Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-36
Vehicle Diagnostics Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Windshield
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

2 K 15 Captivasport 1 ST Print

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2 K 15 Captivasport 1 ST Print

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2k15_chev_captiva_sport_23446878A.

2015 Captiva Sport

23446878 A chevrolet.com (U.S.)

2015 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2015 Chevrolet Captiva Sport Owner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Refer to the purchase Driver Behavior on page 9-2,

M : This symbol is shown when O : Exterior Lamps

In Brief Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Driver Information

Initial Drive See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote

doors will be locked and the climate Door Locks

Liftgate Windows Express-Down Window

Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster Power Seats

If available, move the lever up or If available, move the control

Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

To raise or lower the front or rear

To adjust the steering wheel:

Turn the control to the following Windshield Wiper/Washer

The exterior lamp control is on the

3: Sets a delay between wipes. Climate Controls

1. Fan Control See Climate Control Systems on

Replace the vehicle's tires with

the same TPC Spec number

TTY Users (U.S. Only):

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): L (Vehicle Locator/Panic new transmitter is programmed.

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Remote Vehicle Start Starting the Engine Using

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Door Locks Warning (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

Automatic Door Unlock Safety Locks

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Doors Warning (Continued)

If the vehicle must be driven with

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Power Mirrors Automatic Dimming Feature Interior Mirrors

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

Windows Power Windows Press the front of the switch to open

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Dirt and debris may collect on the

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the

Seats and Restraints 3-3

Rear Seats Front Seats 2. Slide the seat to the desired

If available, move the lever up or

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

3-4 Seats and Restraints

Power Seat Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment

To raise or lower the front or rear